IN-PROCESS APPLICATION

OPERATOR GUIDE
Manual Code: D291M000UC

Single Diameter
Diameters with Switching
Two Diameters Simultaneously
Two Diameters and Taper
Active Positioning
Active Centering

Passive Positioning
Passive Centering
Length
Check of flat surfaces-EXAR

P7tool_D291M000UC_44.doc 26/11/09
 Post Process Single Diameter
Post Process Diameters with Switching

Two Post Process Diameters Simultaneously

Two Post Process Diameters and Taper

Gap & Crash

 This product is in conformity with the EMC requirements as for the directive
2004/108/CE
This product is intended to operate in industrial locations; it is not intended for connections to a
public mains network but is intended to be connected to a power network supplied from a high
or medium voltage transformer.

This product is in conformity with the “Electrical Safety” requirements as for the directive
2006/95/EC

SAFETY WARNINGS
ƒ Follow the grinder manufacturer’s safety procedures.
ƒ Follow all safety procedures at the gauge system location.
ƒ There are NO Customer serviceable parts inside the P7ME. Always call technical service

MANUFACTURER: Marposs S.p.A.

ADDRESS: Via Saliceto 13, Bentivoglio (BO) Italia
www.marposs.com

SYSTEM SOFTWARE: V4.4

P7ME SYSTEM MODEL:

HARDWARE CODE:
SOFTWARE CODE:

MANUAL CODE NO.: D291M000UC

DATE OF ISSUE: September 14, 2005
EDITION: (04) November 2008
ISSUED BY: Marposs S.p.A. , Via Saliceto 13, Bentivoglio (BO) Italia

MARPOSS S.p.A. does not take on the obligation of notifying possible further changes to the product.
The descriptions reported in this book do not authorize any tampering by non-authorized personnel.
The warranty on the equipment will decay if such tampering is found.

© Copyright MARPOSS S.p.A. 2001-2008

P7tool_D291M000UC_44.doc 26/11/09
About the Directive 2002/95/EC “RoHS” regulating the presence of certain hazardous
substances in electrical and electronic equipment

The Member States of the European Community are in the process of completing the
national reception and enforcement of the Directive 2002/95/EC regulating the presence of
certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.

The Directive explicitly excludes from its scope of application finished products such as
those manufactured and sold by Marposs. It is still indeed a widely debated matter whether
the complete removal of the regulated substances could affect the reliability of the product.

Marposs shares in the social responsibility of continuously supporting every form of

innovation that reduces or minimizes any risk of adverse impact on human health and the
environment.

Marposs is therefore voluntarily pursuing the progressive removal of the regulated

substances from our products. Marposs will do so with the clear understanding that any
improvement achieved on the protection of health and the environment should not come as a
compromise for the quality and reliability of our products.

Marposs will put the greatest consideration in any initiative that our Customers
undertake with the purpose of reducing the environmental risk. Our commitment is the
support of their effort developing products that be of the highest quality and reliability.

– Operator Guide 5
6 – Operator Guide
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................. 19
1.1. Operator Guide ........................................................................................................... 19
1.2. Conventions................................................................................................................19
1.2.1. Interface between gauge and user .................................................................................. 19
1.2.2. Operator Guide ................................................................................................................. 19
2. FRONT PANEL ................................................................................................................ 20
2.1. Keys............................................................................................................................ 22
2.2. Keypad ....................................................................................................................... 22
2.3. Combination of keys ................................................................................................... 23
2.4. Panel test / Viewing the software version ................................................................... 23
3. HOW THE SYSTEM IS ORGANIZED .............................................................................. 24
3.1. Operating modes ........................................................................................................ 24
3.2. Software structure ...................................................................................................... 24
3.2.1. Folders.............................................................................................................................. 25
3.2.2. Sub-folders ....................................................................................................................... 26
3.2.3. Pages................................................................................................................................ 26
3.2.4. Messages and info section ............................................................................................... 27
3.3. Menu maps................................................................................................................. 28
4. USE .................................................................................................................................. 29
4.1. F keys ......................................................................................................................... 29
4.1.1. Function Keys ................................................................................................................... 29
4.1.2. Hot keys............................................................................................................................ 29
4.1.3. Defining the HOT keys...................................................................................................... 30
4.1.4. Deleting the HOT keys...................................................................................................... 30
4.2. Getting around the Program ....................................................................................... 31
4.2.1. Cursor controls ................................................................................................................. 31
4.2.2. Hot keys............................................................................................................................ 32
4.2.3. Defining the HOME key .................................................................................................... 32
4.3. If you get lost .............................................................................................................. 32
5. HOW TO PROGRAM ....................................................................................................... 33
5.1. Selecting predefined values........................................................................................ 33
5.2. Programming numerical values .................................................................................. 33
5.3. Undoing programming ................................................................................................ 33
6. DEFINING THE SETS ...................................................................................................... 34
6.1. How to select an already defined Set (Part/Cycle) ..................................................... 34
7. ENABLING THE P.I.P. WINDOW (PICTURE IN PICTURE) ............................................ 36
8. DIAMETER / DIAMETERS WITH SWITCHING ................................................. 39
8.1. Menu Maps................................................................................................................. 39
8.1.1. Automatic Mode - Diameter Menu Map ............................................................ 40

8.1.2. Manual Mode - Diameter Menu Map ................................................................ 42

– Operator Guide 7
 8.2. Viewing the Diameter Programming ................................................................... 44
8.2.1. Measurement data ............................................................................................................ 44
8.2.1.1. Measuring head sub-page ........................................................................................................ 45
8.2.1.2. Viewing Zero Shift..................................................................................................................... 47
8.2.1.3. Measurement equation ............................................................................................................. 48
8.2.1.4. Measurement Parameters ........................................................................................................ 48
8.2.1.5. Measurement optional functions (Options)............................................................................... 49
8.2.2. Integral measurement ....................................................................................................... 50
8.2.2.1. Parameters of the integral measurement ................................................................................. 51
8.2.3. Control points ............................................................................................................ 52
8.2.4. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces) .................................................... 53
8.2.4.1. Elaboration for trilobal parts ............................................................................................... 56
8.2.4.2. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters ........................................................... 56
8.2.5. TIR (Total Indicator Reading) (Option) ...................................................................... 58
8.2.6. Ovality (Option).......................................................................................................... 59
8.2.7. Stock Removal Speed (Adaptive Cycle) (Option)...................................................... 60
8.2.8. Stock Removal (Option) ............................................................................................ 62
8.2.9. Pulsed Feed Back (measurement correction) (option) .............................................. 63
8.2.10. BCD Feed Back (measurement correction) (option).................................................. 64
8.2.11. Direct coupling - Dirac (Option) ................................................................................ 65
8.2.12. PP/IP coupling – Taper compensation (Option) ........................................................ 67
8.2.12.1. Taper compensation ................................................................................................................. 68

8.3. Viewing Diameter Measurement ....................................................................... 70

8.3.1. Viewing the Measurement in Manual Mode ...................................................................... 70
8.3.2. Viewing the Measurement in Automatic mode.................................................................. 71
8.3.2.1. Viewing of associated measurements (Option) ............................................................. 72
8.4. Viewing the Diameter Zeroing values ................................................................. 73
8.4.1. Viewing the Zeroing values in Manual mode .................................................................... 74
8.4.2. Viewing the Zeroing values in Automatic mode ................................................................ 74
8.5. Zeroing diameter ........................................................................................................ 75
8.5.1. Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 75
8.5.2. Mechanical Zeroing of Diameter ............................................................................ 76
8.5.3. Electrical Zeroing of Diameter ................................................................................ 78
8.5.3.1. Shared Electric zero-setting (“Masterless” function)................................................................. 80
8.5.3.2. Multiple Electrical Zeroing (Option)........................................................................................... 81

8.6. Zero Adjustments for Diameter (Option) ............................................................ 83

8.6.1. Zero Adjustment in Manual mode ..................................................................................... 83
8.6.2. Zero Adjustments in automatic mode ............................................................................... 85
8.6.2.1. Zero adjustment for the current Set (part/cycle) ....................................................................... 85
8.6.2.2. Zero adjustment with Set (Part/Cycle) selection....................................................................... 86
8.6.2.3. Hardware modification of the zero correction (Option) .................................................. 88
8.7. Zero Reset for Diameter .................................................................................. 89
8.8. Changing Control Points value (Automatic mode) ............................................ 90
9. TWO SIMULTANEOUS DIAMETERS .................................................................... 91

8 – Operator Guide
9.1. Menu Maps................................................................................................................. 91
9.1.1. Automatic Mode - Two-Diameter Menu Map .................................................... 92

9.1.2. Manual Mode - Two-Diameter Menu Map ....................................................... 94

9.2. Viewing the Measurements A and B Programming ........................................... 96

9.2.1. Measurement data............................................................................................................ 97
9.2.1.1. Measuring head sub-page.........................................................................................................98
9.2.1.2. Viewing Zero Shift ...................................................................................................................100
9.2.1.3. Measurement equation............................................................................................................101
9.2.1.4. Measurement Parameters .......................................................................................................101
9.2.1.5. Measurement optional functions (Options)..............................................................................102
9.2.2. Integral measurement..................................................................................................... 103
9.2.2.1. Parameters of the integral measurement ................................................................................104
9.2.3. Control points .......................................................................................................... 105
9.2.4. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces) .................................................. 106
9.2.4.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters .........................................................109
9.2.5. TIR (Total Indicator Reading) (Option) .................................................................... 110
9.2.6. Ovality (Option) ....................................................................................................... 111
9.2.7. Stock Removal Speed (Adaptive Cycle) (Option) ................................................... 112
9.2.8. Stock Removal (Option) .......................................................................................... 114
9.2.9. Pulsed Feed Back (measurement correction) (option) ............................................ 115
9.2.10. BCD Feed Back (measurement correction) (option) ............................................... 116
9.2.11. Direct coupling - Dirac (Option) .............................................................................. 117
9.2.12. PP/IP coupling (Option).......................................................................................... 119
9.3. Viewing Measurements A and B ....................................................................... 120
9.3.1. Viewing the Measurement in Manual Mode.................................................................... 120
9.3.2. Viewing the Measurement in Automatic mode ............................................................... 122
9.3.2.1. Viewing of associated measurements (Option) ............................................................124
9.4. Viewing the Zeroing values of Measurements A and B .................................... 125
9.4.1. Viewing the Zeroing values in Manual mode .................................................................. 126
9.4.2. Viewing the Zeroing values in Automatic mode.............................................................. 126
9.5. Zeroing Measurements A and B ............................................................................... 127
9.5.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 127
9.5.2. Mechanical Zeroing ............................................................................................... 128
9.5.3. Electrical Zeroing ................................................................................................. 131
9.5.3.1. Shared Electric zero-setting (“Masterless” function) ...............................................................133
9.5.3.2. Multiple Electrical Zeroing (Option) .........................................................................................134

9.6. Zero Adjustments for Measurements A and B (Option).................................... 136

9.6.1. Zero Adjustment in Manual mode................................................................................... 137
9.6.2. Zero Adjustments in automatic mode ............................................................................. 139
9.6.2.1. Zero adjustment for the current Set (part/cycle)......................................................................139
9.6.2.2. Zero adjustment with Set (Part/Cycle) selection .....................................................................140
9.6.2.3. Hardware modification of the zero correction (Option) .................................................143
9.7. Zero Reset for Measurements A and B ........................................................... 144

– Operator Guide 9
 9.8. Changing Control Points value Meas. A and B (Automatic mode) ................... 145
10. TWO-DIAMETERS & TAPER ............................................................................. 147
10.1. Menu Maps ........................................................................................................... 147
10.1.1. Automatic Mode - Two diameters & Taper Menu Map .................................... 148

10.1.2. Manual Mode - Two diameters & Taper Menu Map ........................................ 150
10.2. Viewing the Measurements A, B and Taper Programming ................................... 152
10.2.1. Measurement data .......................................................................................................... 153
10.2.1.1. Measuring head sub-page ...................................................................................................... 154
10.2.1.2. Viewing Zero Shift................................................................................................................... 156
10.2.1.3. Measurement equation ........................................................................................................... 157
10.2.1.4. Measurement Parameters ...................................................................................................... 157
10.2.1.5. Measurement optional functions (Options)............................................................................. 158
10.2.2. Integral measurement ..................................................................................................... 159
10.2.2.1. Parameters of the integral measurement ............................................................................... 160
10.2.3. Taper Measurement........................................................................................................ 161
10.2.3.1. Area controls for taper measurement (Option)............................................................... 161
10.2.4. Control points .......................................................................................................... 162
10.2.5. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces) .................................................. 163
10.2.5.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters ......................................................... 166
10.2.6. TIR (Total Indicator Reading) (Option) .................................................................... 167
10.2.7. Ovality (Option) ....................................................................................................... 168
10.2.8. Stock Removal Speed (Adaptive Cycle) (Option) ................................................... 169
10.2.9. Stock Removal (Option) .......................................................................................... 171
10.2.10. Pulsed Feed Back (measurement correction) (option) ......................................... 172
10.2.11. BCD Feed Back (measurement correction) (option) ............................................ 173
10.2.12. Direct coupling - Dirac (Option) ........................................................................... 174
10.2.13. PP/IP coupling (Option)....................................................................................... 176
10.3. Viewing Measurements A and B ................................................................... 177
10.3.1. Viewing the Measurement in Manual Mode .................................................................... 177
10.3.2. Viewing the Measurement in Automatic mode................................................................ 179
10.3.2.1. Viewing of associated measurements (Option) ........................................................... 181
10.4. Viewing the Zeroing values of Measurements A and B ................................. 182
10.4.1. Viewing the Zeroing values in Manual mode .................................................................. 183
10.4.2. Viewing the Zeroing values in Automatic mode .............................................................. 183
10.5. Zeroing Measurements A and B............................................................................ 184
10.5.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 184
10.5.2. Mechanical Zeroing ............................................................................................... 185
10.5.3. Electrical Zeroing ................................................................................................. 188
10.5.3.1. Shared Electric zero-setting (“Masterless” function)............................................................... 190
10.5.3.2. Multiple Electrical Zeroing (Option)......................................................................................... 191

10.6. Zero Adjustments for Measurements A and B (Option) ................................ 193

10.6.1. Zero Adjustment in Manual mode ................................................................................... 194
10.6.2. Zero Adjustments in automatic mode ............................................................................. 195

10 – Operator Guide
 10.6.2.1. Zero adjustment for the current Set (part/cycle)......................................................................195
10.6.2.2. Zero adjustment with Set (Part/Cycle) selection .....................................................................197
10.6.2.3. Hardware modification of the zero correction (Option) .................................................199
10.7. Zero Reset for Measurements A and B ........................................................ 200
10.8. Changing Control Points Value Meas. A and B (Automatic mode) ................ 201
11. PASSIVE POSITIONING .................................................................................. 203
11.1. Menu Maps ............................................................................................................ 203
11.1.1. Automatic Mode – Passive Position Menu Map ............................................. 204

11.1.2. Manual Mode – Passive Position Menu Map ................................................ 205

11.2. Viewing the Passive Position Programming ................................................ 206

11.2.1. Measurement data.......................................................................................................... 206
11.2.1.1. Measuring head sub-page.......................................................................................................207
11.2.1.2. Zero shift display .....................................................................................................................208
11.2.2. Integral measurement..................................................................................................... 209
11.2.2.1. Parameters of the integral measurement ................................................................................210
11.2.3. Positioning Over Range values ...................................................................................... 210
11.2.4. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces) .................................................. 211
11.2.4.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters .........................................................213
11.2.5. PP/IP coupling (Option).......................................................................................... 215
11.3. Viewing Passive Position Measurement ...................................................... 216
11.3.1. Viewing the Measurement in Manual mode.................................................................... 216
11.3.2. Viewing the Measurement in Automatic Mode ............................................................... 217
11.4. Viewing the Passive Position Zeroing values ................................................ 218
11.4.1. Viewing the Zeroing values in Manual mode .................................................................. 218
11.4.2. Viewing the Zeroing values in Automatic mode.............................................................. 218

11.5. Passive Position Zeroing ............................................................................. 219

11.5.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 219
11.5.2. Mechanical Zeroing of Passive Position ............................................................... 220
11.5.3. Electrical Zeroing of Passive Position .................................................................. 222
11.5.3.1. Shared Electric zero-setting (“Masterless” function) ...............................................................224
11.5.3.2. Multiple Electrical Zeroing (Option) .........................................................................................225

11.6. Zero Adjustments for Passive Position (Option)............................................ 227

11.6.1. Zero Adjustment in Manual mode................................................................................... 227
11.6.2. Zero Adjustments in automatic mode ............................................................................. 228
11.6.2.1. Zero adjustment for the current Set (part/cycle)......................................................................228
11.6.2.2. Zero adjustment with Set (Part/Cycle) selection .....................................................................229
11.7. Zero Reset for Passive Position .................................................................. 231

12. PASSIVE CENTERING ..................................................................................... 233

12.1. Menu Maps ............................................................................................................ 233
12.1.1. Automatic Mode – Passive Centering Menu Map ........................................... 234

12.1.2. Manual Mode – Passive Centering Menu Map .............................................. 235

– Operator Guide 11
 12.2. Viewing the Passive Centering Programming ............................................. 236
12.2.1. Measurement data .......................................................................................................... 236
12.2.1.1. Measuring head sub-page ...................................................................................................... 237
12.2.1.2. Zero shift display..................................................................................................................... 238
12.2.2. Integral measurement ..................................................................................................... 239
12.2.2.1. Parameters of the integral measurement ............................................................................... 240
12.2.3. Centering Over Range values......................................................................................... 240
12.2.4. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces) .................................................. 241
12.2.4.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters ......................................................... 243
12.2.5. PP/IP coupling (Option).......................................................................................... 245
12.3. Viewing Passive Centering Measurement ................................................... 246
12.3.1. Viewing the Measurement in Manual mode .................................................................... 246
12.3.2. Viewing the Measurement in Automatic Mode................................................................ 247
12.4. Viewing the Passive Centering Zeroing values ............................................. 248
12.4.1. Viewing the Zeroing values in Manual mode .................................................................. 248
12.4.2. Viewing the Zeroing values in Automatic mode .............................................................. 248
12.5. Passive Centering Zeroing .......................................................................... 249
12.5.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 249
12.5.2. Mechanical Zeroing of Passive Centering ............................................................. 250
12.5.3. Electrical Zeroing of Passive Centering ............................................................... 252
12.5.3.1. Shared Electric zero-setting (“Masterless” function)............................................................... 254
12.5.3.2. Multiple Electrical Zeroing (Option)......................................................................................... 255

12.6. Zero Adjustments for Passive Centering (Option)......................................... 257

12.6.1. Zero Adjustment in Manual mode ................................................................................... 257
12.6.2. Zero Adjustments in automatic mode ............................................................................. 258
12.6.2.1. Zero adjustment for the current Set (part/cycle) ..................................................................... 258
12.6.2.2. Zero adjustment with Set (Part/Cycle) selection..................................................................... 259
12.7. Zero Reset for Passive Centering ............................................................... 262
13. ACTIVE POSITIONING ..................................................................................... 263
13.1. Menu Maps ........................................................................................................... 263
13.1.1. Automatic Mode – Active Position Menu Map ................................................ 264

13.1.2. Manual Mode – Active Position Menu Map .................................................... 265

13.2. Viewing the Active Position Programming ................................................... 266

13.2.1. Measurement data .......................................................................................................... 266
13.2.1.1. Measuring head sub-page ...................................................................................................... 267
13.2.1.2. Zero shift display..................................................................................................................... 268
13.2.1.3. Measurement parameters....................................................................................................... 269
13.2.2. Controls ................................................................................................................... 270
13.2.3. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces) .................................................. 271
13.2.3.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters ......................................................... 273

13.3. Viewing Active Position Measurement ........................................................ 275

13.3.1. Viewing the Measurement in Manual mode .................................................................... 275
13.3.2. Viewing the Measurement in Automatic Mode................................................................ 276

12 – Operator Guide
 13.4. Viewing the Active Position Zeroing values ................................................... 277
13.4.1. Viewing the Zeroing values in Manual mode .................................................................. 277
13.4.2. Viewing the Zeroing values in Automatic mode.............................................................. 277
13.5. Active Position Zeroing .......................................................................................... 278
13.5.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 278
13.5.2. Mechanical Zeroing of Active Position .................................................................. 279
13.5.3. Electrical Zeroing of Active Position ..................................................................... 280
13.5.3.1. Shared Electric zero-setting (“Masterless” function) ...............................................................282
13.5.3.2. Multiple Electrical Zeroing (Option) .........................................................................................283

13.6. Zero Adjustments for Active Position (Option)............................................... 285

13.6.1. Zero Adjustment in Manual mode................................................................................... 285
13.6.2. Zero Adjustments in automatic mode ............................................................................. 286
13.6.2.1. Zero adjustment for the current Set (part/cycle)......................................................................286
13.6.2.2. Zero adjustment with Set (Part/Cycle) selection .....................................................................287
13.7. Zero Reset for Active Position ..................................................................... 290
13.8. Changing Control Points Value (Automatic mode) ........................................ 291
14. ACTIVE CENTERING ....................................................................................... 293
14.1. Menu Maps ............................................................................................................ 293
14.1.1. Automatic Mode – Active Centering Menu Map ............................................. 294

14.1.2. Manual Mode – Active Centering Menu Map ................................................. 295

14.2. Viewing the Active Centering Programming ................................................. 296
14.2.1. Measurement data.......................................................................................................... 296
14.2.1.1. Measuring head sub-page.......................................................................................................297
14.2.1.2. Zero shift display .....................................................................................................................298
14.2.1.3. Measurement parameters .......................................................................................................299
14.2.2. Controls ................................................................................................................... 300
14.2.3. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces) .................................................. 301
14.2.3.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters .........................................................303

14.3. Viewing Active Centering Measurement ...................................................... 305

14.3.1. Viewing the Measurement in Manual mode.................................................................... 305
14.3.2. Viewing the Measurement in Automatic Mode ............................................................... 306
14.4. Viewing the Active Centering Zeroing values ................................................ 307
14.4.1. Viewing the Zeroing values in Manual mode .................................................................. 307
14.4.2. Viewing the Zeroing values in Automatic mode.............................................................. 307
14.5. Active Centering Zeroing ....................................................................................... 308
14.5.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 308
14.5.2. Mechanical Zeroing of Active Centering ............................................................... 309
14.5.3. Electrical Zeroing of Active Centering .................................................................. 311
14.5.3.1. Shared Electric zero-setting (“Masterless” function) ...............................................................313
14.5.3.2. Multiple Electrical Zeroing (Option) .........................................................................................314

14.6. Zero Adjustments for Active Centering (Option)............................................. 316

14.6.1. Zero Adjustment in Manual mode................................................................................... 316
14.6.2. Zero Adjustments in automatic mode ............................................................................. 317
14.6.2.1. Zero adjustment for the current Set (part/cycle)......................................................................317

– Operator Guide 13
 14.6.2.2. Zero adjustment with Set (Part/Cycle) selection..................................................................... 318
14.7. Zero Reset for Active Centering ................................................................. 320
14.8. Changing Control Points Value (Automatic mode)........................................ 321
15. LENGTH (THICKNESS) .................................................................................... 323
15.1. Menu Maps ........................................................................................................... 323
15.1.1. Automatic Mode - Length (Thickness) Menu Map ......................................... 324

15.1.2. Manual Mode - Length (Thickness) Menu Map ............................................. 326

15.2. Viewing the Length (Thickness) Programming ............................................ 328
15.2.1. Measurement data .......................................................................................................... 328
15.2.1.1. Measuring head sub-page ...................................................................................................... 329
15.2.1.2. Zero shift display..................................................................................................................... 330
15.2.1.3. Measurement equation ........................................................................................................... 331
15.2.1.4. Measurement Parameters ...................................................................................................... 331
15.2.1.5. Measurement optional functions (Options)............................................................................. 332
15.2.2. Integral measurement ..................................................................................................... 333
15.2.2.1. Parameters of the integral measurement ............................................................................... 334
15.2.3. Control points .......................................................................................................... 335
15.2.4. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces) .................................................. 336
15.2.4.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters ......................................................... 338
15.2.5. TIR (Total Indicator Reading) (Option) .................................................................... 340
15.2.6. Stock Removal (Option) .......................................................................................... 341
15.2.7. Pulsed Feed Back (measurement correction) (option) ............................................ 342
15.2.8. BCD Feed Back (measurement correction) (option)................................................ 343
15.2.9. Direct coupling - Dirac (Option) .............................................................................. 344
15.3. Viewing Length (Thickness) Measurement .................................................. 346
15.3.1. Viewing the Measurement in Manual Mode .................................................................... 346
15.3.2. Viewing the Measurement in Automatic mode................................................................ 347
15.4. Viewing the Length (Thickness) Zeroing values ............................................ 348
15.4.1. Viewing the Zeroing values in Manual mode .................................................................. 349
15.4.2. Viewing the Zeroing values in Automatic mode .............................................................. 349
15.5. Zeroing length (Thickness).................................................................................... 350
15.5.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 350
15.5.2. Mechanical Zeroing of Length .............................................................................. 351
15.5.3. Electrical Zeroing of Length ................................................................................. 353
15.5.3.1. Shared Electric zero-setting (“Masterless” function)............................................................... 355
15.5.3.2. Multiple Electrical Zeroing (Option)......................................................................................... 356

15.6. Zero Adjustments for Length (Thickness) (Option) ....................................... 358

15.6.1. Zero Adjustment in Manual mode ................................................................................... 358
15.6.2. Zero Adjustments in automatic mode ............................................................................. 359
15.6.2.1. Zero adjustment for the current Set (part/cycle) ..................................................................... 359
15.6.2.2. Zero adjustment with Set (Part/Cycle) selection..................................................................... 360
15.7. Zero Reset for Length (Thickness) .............................................................. 362
15.8. Changing Control Points Value (Automatic mode)........................................ 363

14 – Operator Guide
16. EXAR ................................................................................................................ 365
16.1. Menu Maps ............................................................................................................ 365
16.1.1. Automatic Mode - Exar Menu Map ............................................................... 366

16.1.2. Manual Mode - Exar Menu Map ................................................................... 368

16.2. Viewing the Exar Programming ................................................................... 370
16.2.1. Measurement data.......................................................................................................... 370
16.2.1.1. Measuring head sub-page.......................................................................................................371
16.2.1.2. Zero shift display .....................................................................................................................372
16.2.1.3. Measurement Parameters .......................................................................................................373
16.2.1.4. Measurement optional functions (Options)..............................................................................373
16.2.2. Measurement synchronization mode.............................................................................. 374
16.2.3. Measurement type .......................................................................................................... 374
16.2.4. Control points .......................................................................................................... 375
16.2.5. Stock Removal (Option) ......................................................................................... 376
16.2.6. Pulsed Feed Back (measurement correction) (option) ............................................ 377
16.2.7. BCD Feed Back (measurement correction) (option) ............................................... 378
16.2.8. Direct coupling - Dirac (Option) .............................................................................. 379
16.3. Viewing Exar Measurement .......................................................................... 381
16.3.1. Viewing the Measurement in Manual Mode.................................................................... 381
16.3.2. Viewing the Measurement in Automatic mode ............................................................... 382
16.4. Viewing the Exar Zeroing values ................................................................... 383
16.4.1. Viewing the Zeroing values in Manual mode .................................................................. 384
16.4.2. Viewing the Zeroing values in Automatic mode.............................................................. 384
16.5. Zeroing Exar .......................................................................................................... 385
16.5.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 385
16.5.2. Mechanical Zeroing of Exar ................................................................................. 386
16.5.3. Electrical Zeroing of Exar ..................................................................................... 388
16.5.3.1. Shared Electric zero-setting (“Masterless” function) ...............................................................389
16.5.3.2. Multiple Electrical Zeroing (Option) .........................................................................................390

16.6. Zero Adjustments for Exar (Option)............................................................... 392

16.6.1. Zero Adjustment in Manual mode................................................................................... 392
16.6.2. Zero Adjustments in automatic mode ............................................................................. 393
16.6.2.1. Zero adjustment for the current Set (part/cycle)......................................................................393
16.6.2.2. Zero adjustment with Set (Part/Cycle) selection .....................................................................394
16.7. Zero Reset for Exar ..................................................................................... 397

17. POST PROCESS DIAMETER / P.P. DIAMETERS WITH SWITCHING ..... 399
17.1. Menu Maps ............................................................................................................ 399
17.1.1. Automatic Mode - Post Process Diameter Menu Map ..................................... 400

17.1.2. Manual Mode - Post Process Diameter Menu Map ......................................... 402
17.2. Viewing the Diameter Programming ............................................................... 404
17.2.1. Measurement data.......................................................................................................... 404
17.2.1.1. Measuring head sub-page.......................................................................................................405
17.2.1.2. Zero shift display .....................................................................................................................406
17.2.1.3. Measurement Parameters .......................................................................................................407

– Operator Guide 15
 17.2.1.4. Measurement optional functions (Options)............................................................................. 407
17.2.2. Integral measurement ..................................................................................................... 408
17.2.2.1. Parameters of the integral measurement ............................................................................... 409
17.2.3. Control points .......................................................................................................... 410
17.2.4. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces) .................................................. 411
17.2.4.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters ......................................................... 413
17.2.5. TIR (Total Indicator Reading) (Option) .................................................................... 415
17.2.6. Ovality (Option)........................................................................................................ 416
17.2.7. Direct coupling - Dirac (Option) .............................................................................. 417
17.2.8. PP/IP coupling (Option).......................................................................................... 418
17.3. Viewing Diameter Measurement .................................................................. 419
17.3.1. Viewing the Measurement in Manual Mode .................................................................... 419
17.3.2. Viewing the Measurement in Automatic mode................................................................ 420
17.4. Viewing the Diameter Zeroing values ............................................................ 421
17.4.1. Viewing the Zeroing values in Manual mode .................................................................. 422
17.4.2. Viewing the Zeroing values in Automatic mode .............................................................. 422
17.5. Zeroing diameter ................................................................................................... 423
17.5.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 423
17.5.2. Mechanical Zeroing of Diameter .......................................................................... 424
17.5.3. Electrical Zeroing of Diameter .............................................................................. 426
17.5.3.1. Shared Electric zero-setting (“Masterless” function)............................................................... 428
17.5.3.2. Multiple Electrical Zeroing (Option)......................................................................................... 429

17.6. Zero Adjustments for Diameter (Option) ....................................................... 431

17.6.1. Zero Adjustment in Manual mode ................................................................................... 431
17.6.2. Zero Adjustments in automatic mode ............................................................................. 432
17.6.2.1. Zero adjustment for the current Set (part/cycle) ..................................................................... 432
17.6.2.2. Zero adjustment with Set (Part/Cycle) selection..................................................................... 433
17.7. Zero Reset for Diameter ............................................................................. 436
18. TWO POST-PROCESS DIAMETERS SIMULTANEOUSLY .............................. 437
18.1. Menu Maps ........................................................................................................... 437
18.1.1. Automatic Mode - Two Post-Process Diameters Simultaneously Menu Map .. 438

18.1.2. Manual Mode - Two Post-Process Diameters Simultaneously Menu Map ....... 440
18.2. Viewing the Measurements A and B Programming............................................... 442
18.2.1. Measurement data .......................................................................................................... 443
18.2.1.1. Measuring head sub-page ...................................................................................................... 444
18.2.1.2. Zero shift display..................................................................................................................... 445
18.2.1.3. Measurement Parameters ...................................................................................................... 446
18.2.1.4. Measurement optional functions (Options)............................................................................. 446
18.2.2. Integral Measurement ..................................................................................................... 447
18.2.2.1. Parameters of the integral measurement ............................................................................... 448
18.2.3. Control points .......................................................................................................... 449
18.2.4. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces) .................................................. 450
18.2.4.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters ......................................................... 452
18.2.5. TIR (Total Indicator Reading) (Option) .................................................................... 454

16 – Operator Guide
 18.2.6. Ovality (Option) ...................................................................................................... 455
18.2.7. Direct coupling - Dirac (Option) .............................................................................. 456
18.2.8. PP/IP coupling (Option).......................................................................................... 458
18.3. Viewing Measurements A and B .................................................................... 459
18.3.1. Viewing the Measurement in Manual Mode.................................................................... 459
18.3.2. Viewing the Measurement in Automatic mode ............................................................... 461
18.4. Viewing the Zeroing values of Measurements A and B ................................. 463
18.4.1. Viewing the Zeroing values in Manual mode .................................................................. 464
18.4.2. Viewing the Zeroing values in Automatic mode.............................................................. 464
18.5. Zeroing Measurements A and B ............................................................................ 465
18.5.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 465
18.5.2. Mechanical Zeroing ............................................................................................... 466
18.5.3. Electrical Zeroing ................................................................................................. 469
18.5.3.1. Shared Electric zero-setting (“Masterless” function) ...............................................................471
18.5.3.2. Multiple Electrical Zeroing (Option) .........................................................................................472

18.6. Zero Adjustments for Measurements A and B (Option)................................. 474

18.6.1. Zero Adjustment in Manual mode................................................................................... 475
18.6.2. Zero Adjustments in automatic mode ............................................................................. 476
18.6.2.1. Zero adjustment for the current Set (part/cycle)......................................................................476
18.6.2.2. Zero adjustment with Set (Part/Cycle) selection .....................................................................478
18.7. Zero Reset for Measurements A and B ........................................................ 480
19. TWO POST-PROCESS DIAMETERS & TAPER ................................................ 481
19.1. Menu Maps ............................................................................................................ 481
19.1.1. Automatic Mode - Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper Menu Map ............. 482

19.1.2. Manual Mode - Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper Menu Map ................. 484
19.2. Viewing the Measurements A, B and Taper Programming .................................... 486
19.2.1. Measurement data.......................................................................................................... 487
19.2.1.1. Measuring head sub-page.......................................................................................................488
19.2.1.2. Zero shift display .....................................................................................................................489
19.2.1.3. Measurement Parameters .......................................................................................................490
19.2.1.4. Measurement optional functions (Options)..............................................................................490
19.2.2. Taper Measurement ....................................................................................................... 491
19.2.3. Integral Measurement..................................................................................................... 492
19.2.3.1. Parameters of the integral measurement ................................................................................493
19.2.4. Control points .......................................................................................................... 494
19.2.5. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces) .................................................. 495
19.2.5.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters .........................................................497
19.2.6. TIR (Total Indicator Reading) (Option) .................................................................... 499
19.2.7. Ovality (Option) ....................................................................................................... 500
19.2.8. Direct coupling - Dirac (Option) .............................................................................. 501
19.2.9. PP/IP coupling (Option).......................................................................................... 503
19.3. Viewing Measurements A and B .................................................................... 504
19.3.1. Viewing the Measurement in Manual Mode.................................................................... 504
19.3.2. Viewing the Measurement in Automatic mode ............................................................... 506

– Operator Guide 17
 19.4. Viewing the Zeroing values of Measurements A and B ................................. 508
19.4.1. Viewing the Zeroing values in Manual mode .................................................................. 509
19.4.2. Viewing the Zeroing values in Automatic mode .............................................................. 509
19.5. Zeroing Measurements A and B............................................................................ 510
19.5.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 510
19.5.2. Mechanical Zeroing ............................................................................................... 511
19.5.3. Electrical Zeroing ................................................................................................. 514
19.5.3.1. Shared Electric zero-setting (“Masterless” function)............................................................... 516
19.5.3.2. Multiple Electrical Zeroing (Option)......................................................................................... 517

19.6. Zero Adjustments for Measurements A and B (Option) ................................ 519

19.6.1. Zero Adjustment in Manual mode ................................................................................... 520
19.6.2. Zero Adjustments in automatic mode ............................................................................. 521
19.6.2.1. Zero adjustment for the current Set (part/cycle) ..................................................................... 521
19.6.2.2. Zero adjustment with Set (Part/Cycle) selection..................................................................... 523
19.7. Zero Reset for Measurements A and B ....................................................... 525
20. GAP & CRASH CONTROL SETTING ............................................................ 527
20.1. Page for GAP and CRASH controls setting .................................................. 528
20.2. GAP control setting ..................................................................................... 530
20.3. CRASH control setting ................................................................................ 532
21. DIAGNOSTICS ........................................................................................................... 533
22. MEASURING HEAD MECHANICAL ZERO-SETTING .............................................. 535
22.1. Mechanical zero-setting with adjustment guides ................................................... 535
22.2. Mechanical zero-setting with contact tips.............................................................. 539
22.3. Rapid zero-setting of unimar heads with locking lever (frictioned support) ........... 542
22.4. Mechanical zero-setting with WEMAR type support.............................................. 544
22.5. Mechanical zero-setting of Positionar ................................................................... 546
22.6. Zero-setting a Multicomparator application ........................................................... 547
23. "THRUVAR" MEASURING HEAD ............................................................................. 549
23.1. Pneumatic retraction of the styli ............................................................................ 549
23.2. Assembling the measuring styli on the head ......................................................... 550
23.3. Zero-setting on the diameters included in the measurement range ...................... 551
24. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE ........................................................................................ 553
24.1. Cleaning the electronic unit ................................................................................... 553
24.2. Data back-up batteries .......................................................................................... 553

18 – Operator Guide
1. INTRODUCTION
Gauge computer used to control the grinding cycle. It can be customized to a variety
of applications and measuring heads. The gauge can control and integrate touch
probes and ultrasonic microphones in order to monitor air gap and crash protection.
The gauge processes the signals coming from the measuring head/s and/or the
various sensors and supplies information on the measurement to the machine’s logic
system. There are up to 7 outputs (controls) for changing feed rates and when the
zero size of the workpiece is reached to retract the grinding wheel.
Optional features include TIR, Ovality, Remspeed and Stock Removal.
1.1. Operator Guide
This guide is customized to the grinding machine on which the gauge is installed and
describes its specific measurement application.
This guide was written for the machine operator. It will also be useful for plant
personnel who must perform maintenance and assistance technicians.
This guide describes the following gauge operator functions:
ƒ Selecting part types and cycles.
ƒ Viewing the measurement screens.
ƒ Zeroing the gauge system.
ƒ Correcting the measuring cycle zero.
ƒ Viewing and modifying the grinding cycle controls.
1.2. Conventions
Conventions are standard methods of representing components or functions.
1.2.1. Interface between gauge and user
The gauge software uses graphics and/or icons to show the various functions and
make comprehension and use easy and intuitive.
Other conventions used in this program are:
ƒ Numbers or text inside a dotted line can be changed.
ƒ Icons or text that appear as a phantom image (or grayed out) cannot be selected
on that page or are not available for the application and its options.
1.2.2. Operator Guide
In order to make this guide easy to use, several typographical conventions were
chosen:
ƒ Folders, sub-folders and page names are in Italics.
ƒ Numbers or choices that can be changed are within quotes; i.e. “100 µm".
ƒ Front panel keys or software buttons are shown using the actual icon.
ƒ Section title references within the text are in bold.
ƒ Names of operator functions are followed by their icon.

– Operator Guide Introduction 19

2. FRONT PANEL
The gauge front panel allows the operator to view information about the grinding
cycle. The keypad is used to access the various program pages, to zero the gauge
system, to modify control points of the grinding cycle and adjust damping values for
interrupted surfaces.
Three types of front panel are available:
ƒ Standard panel (in local or remote version)
ƒ 3HE 19" panel (in remote version only)
ƒ 3HE ½19" panel (in remote version only)
The function of the panels is similar, they differ just in the keys arrangement.

Standard panel

F keys
Manual/Automatic key
Display Keypad

Hot key menu Shift key

F keys

20 Conventions – Operator Guide

 3HE 19" front panel

Manual/Automatic
F keys key

Display
Keypad

Hot key menu NOT enabled key

F keys
Shift key

3HE ½19" front panel

Manual/Automatic
NOT enabled key key Shift key

Hot key
Keypad
menu

F keys Display F keys

– Operator Guide Front Panel 21

2.1. Keys

ICON NAME FUNCTION

F1 to F6 keys can be used in two ways: as Hot keys or as

Function keys. Hot keys are shortcuts for moving through
F Keys the various pages and can be assigned by the operator
using the keypad, see section 4.1.2, page 29. Function
keys are predefined to do a one task on page.
Hot Key Display the Hot keys on the screen and removes them.
Menu
Automatic Switch the gauge system between Automatic and Manual
Manual modes.

Shift
Key used with other keys (see section 2.3 “Combination
Shift
of keys page 23).

------------- NOT enabled key.

2.2. Keypad

ICON NAME FUNCTION

Return the program to the Home page. The Home page

Home can be defined using the keypad, see section 4.2.3
“Defining the HOME key”, page 32.
View the software version number at power up and test
? ? the panel (see section 2.4 on page 23).

Arrows Move the cursor around the screen.

Move the cursor through data groups on page. Used with

TAB the Shift key to choose the Wheel/Cycle, see section 6
page 34.
Move up one level of the program. During a programming
Esc session aborts all changes made.
Enter data. Move down one level of the program.
Enter Enter

Decrease data values one digit at a time (with autorepeat

function).
Minus
In case of predefined data, allow scrolling parameters or
icons to view the desired one.

22 Keys – Operator Guide

 Increase data values one digit at a time (with autorepeat
function).
Plus
In case of predefined data, allow scrolling parameters or
icons to view the desired one.

2.3. Combination of keys

COMBINATION OF KEYS FUNCTION

Shift In Manual mode enable the Wheel/Cycle selection.

+
Upon programming they abort all the changes made
Shift
+ before confirmation.
Upon programming these key disable/restore (with the
Shift Enter last programmed value) the selected data, for the data
+
allowing for it.
Enable P.I.P. window (Picture In Picture) on display
Shift
+ (see section 7 on page 36).

2.4. Panel test / Viewing the software version

?
Hold down the key at the system power-on: the following appears:

SOFTWARE VERSION Software version

Firm:4.1A (example)

<F1> For keyboard test

<F2> For display test
<Escape> To continue

<F1> Press to test the keyboard (follow the directions appearing on

display)

<F2> Press to test the display (follow the directions appearing on display).
A sequence of five pages is displayed (three pages in the basic colors
RGB for color display, a black page and a white page for the b/w display)
to carry out a visual check of the display efficiency.

<Escape> Press to continue.

– Operator Guide Front Panel 23

3. HOW THE SYSTEM IS ORGANIZED
3.1. Operating modes
The operating modes are: Manual and Automatic.
The active operating mode is indicated at the bottom right.
Examples:

Manual Automatic
operation operation

The operating mode is selected either with the dedicated key , or through signals
from the machine’s logic.

3.2. Software structure

The Software is divided into folders. Similar functions are grouped into sub-folders.
Related sub-folders are contained in folders. Each matter takes one or more pages of
a sub-folder.

24 Operating modes – Operator Guide

3.2.1. Folders
The following folders are available:

FOLDER NAME ICON FUNCTION MODE

Viewing Show measurement value, zero conditions and

the application programming.

General Give access to the pages for zero adjustments

Adjustments and modification of control points value.

Utilities Access the following environments:

- measuring head setup (mechanical
zeroing),
- electrical zeroing,
- zero adjustment,
- viewing control points;
- viewing measurement damping for
interrupted surfaces,
- viewing the measurement;
- zeroing summary,
- viewing the programmed data.

Programming Give access to the environment where the

specific measuring cycle is parameterized.

Inputs & Outputs Allow to select the I/O’s involved in the bit test
function and to access the arm ratio and
retraction value self acquisition functions (if
available).

External Info Allow viewing the current configuration for the

specific application.

Note: The Viewing, General Adjustment and Utilities folders are described in
this manual, while the other folders are described in the “Programming
Manual“.

– Operator Guide How the sYstem is organized 25

 The highlighted icon indicates the current folder. The message in the lower left
corresponds to the highlighted icon (current folder).

Folders (Manual mode)

Current folder
highlighted

Name of
highlighted folder

3.2.2. Sub-folders
The sub-folders are the second level of the software structure and contain pages with
similar functions.
Enter
Use or to highlight the sub-folder icon and press to access. The
message in the lower left is the name of the highlighted sub-folder.

Selected Sub-folders
sub-folder

Name of selected
sub-folder

3.2.3. Pages
The pages are the third level of the software structure. Each contains a separate
function with information and function keys to perform that task.
Each page has three sections:
ƒ An icon at the top indicating the page function.
ƒ Function information in the middle including function keys.
ƒ Messages and information along the bottom.

26 Software structure – Operator Guide

 Example:
Page icon

Page data

Function Keys

Messages &
Information

The example above shows the page for programming a single diameter.

3.2.4. Messages and info section

1 4 5 6

2 3 7

ICON NAME FUNCTION

Either the name of the highlighted icon or button or

1 Message
instructions on which button to press.

Currently selected workpiece number. The software

2 Part number
can handle up to 16 different workpieces.

Currently selected cycle number. The can handle up

3 Cycle number
to 16 different cycles.

A graphical representation of the programmed

Measurement
4 application
application. In this case “Single inside diameter
measurement ”.

Data display The Operator is viewing data.

5
Data entry The Operator is changing data.

– Operator Guide How the sYstem is organized 27

 ICON NAME FUNCTION

6 In-process Indication of the process control shown on display.

Manual
7 Mode
Automatic

3.3. Menu maps

The arrangement of pages, sub-folders and folders is shown by a menu map. Each
different measurement application and operating mode has its own menu map.
Only the menu map folders with operator functions (Viewing, General Adjustments
and Utilities) are shown in this guide. The specific menu maps are in the section
describing each measuring cycle type.

28 Menu maps – Operator Guide

4. USE
4.1. F keys

to keys on the front panel can be used either as Function keys or Hot keys.
Note: Function keys have an F number in the upper left corner of the icon.
Function key Hot key
F number

4.1.1. Function Keys

Function keys are only available on a specified page. They are predefined to do a
specific task on that page and cannot be changed.

Function Keys

Note: Function keys are available only after the page is selected. To select the
Enter
page, press .
4.1.2. Hot keys
These are shortcuts to any page of the program at any moment and are defined by
the operator via keypad. This allows customization of the gauge system to specific
needs or preferences. Six Hot keys are available in Automatic mode and another six
in Manual mode. For instructions on how to define these keys, see section 4.1.3,
page 30.
Hot keys are available at the folder, sub-folder or page level as shown below. Press
to view the Hot keys currently defined. These are examples of typical hot key
definitions.

– Operator Guide Use 29

 folder

sub-folder

page

4.1.3. Defining the HOT keys

1. Get to the desired page using the menu maps. Highlight the page icon.
2. Press and hold the desired “F#” key down until the icon is no longer highlighted,
about 5 seconds.
3. Release “F#”: the Hot Key is now defined.
4.1.4. Deleting the HOT keys
1. With the hot key to be deleted, call out the page currently stored.

2. Press to highlight the page icon.

3. Press and hold the desired “F#” key down until the icon is no longer highlighted,
about 5 seconds.

30 F keys – Operator Guide

 4. Release “F#”: the Hot Key is deleted.
4.2. Getting around the Program
There are three ways of moving through the program:
1. Using the cursor controls.
2. Shortcuts via the Hot Keys.
3. Home key to the default screen.
4.2.1. Cursor controls

ƒ The and keys move the cursor at the same level between folders, sub-
folders or pages.

ƒ The keys move the cursor around on page:

or move the cursor clockwise.

or move the cursor counter clockwise.

Enter
ƒ The key moves the program down one level.

ƒ The key moves the program up one level.

Enter
ƒ With a folder icon highlighted, press to move to the sub-folder level.
Enter
ƒ With a sub-folder icon highlighted, press to move to the page level.
Referring to the appropriate menu map select the path to the desired page.

Example:

Press to go to the program top level, then press

to select the icon of the desired folder.

Enter
Press to go to the sub-folder or second level of the
program.
Press to highlight the icon of the desired sub-folder.

– Operator Guide Use 31

 Enter
Press to go to the page level of the program.

If there are more pages on at the same level, press to

Enter
highlight the icon of the page. Press to access the
page.

4.2.2. Hot keys

To use the shortcuts method of getting around the program:

1. Turn on Hot key menu by pressing .

2. Press the F1 - F6 hot key associated with the desired page icon.
4.2.3. Defining the HOME key
The Home key defines a Home Page or default screen. A Home Page is available in
both Manual and Automatic modes. When power is turned on the Manual Home Page
is shown.
The operator defines the Home key:
1. Go to the desired page, see menu maps. The page icon should be highlighted.

2. Press and hold down until the icon is not highlighted, about 5 seconds.

3. Release , the Home Page for the current mode is now defined.
4.3. If you get lost
ƒ Press .

ƒ Press as many times as needed to reach the folder level of the program. Then
refer to the menu map for the path to the desired page or use a Hot key shortcut.

32 If you get lost – Operator Guide

5. HOW TO PROGRAM
Programmable parameters are within dotted lines.
5.1. Selecting predefined values
The values that can be given to some parameters are selected from a predefined list
(numerical value or icon).

1. Use or to highlight the desired parameter.

2. Press or to scroll through the values or icons available to the desired

one.
Enter
3. Press to confirm.
5.2. Programming numerical values
There are two methods to program a numerical value.
Method 1

1. Use or to highlight the numerical value.

2. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

Enter
3. Press , the value has been entered.
Method 2
Enter
1. Use or to highlight the number and press .

2. Press to highlight the digit that needs changing.

3. Press or to increase or decrease that digit.

4. Press to highlight the next digit, then press or to increase or

decrease that digit. Repeat for each digit.
Enter
5. Press , the numerical value has been entered.
5.3. Undoing programming

While holding down press to reset the values.

– Operator Guide How to program 33

6. DEFINING THE SETS
The work data are associated to a Set number: each Set is defined by the
combination of two numbers, each one programmable from 1 to 16, totaling 256
combinations (256 Sets).
Set

1st Set no (1 - 16) 2nd Set no (1 - 16)

Each Set can be combined with different types of part and numbers of cycle based on
the programming of the machine logic.

6.1. How to select an already defined Set (Part/Cycle)

Note: In manual mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) must be selected prior to performing
any zeroing procedure or viewing of screens.

Note: Selection of the Set (Part/Cycle) in Automatic mode is made by the

machine’s logic.

ƒ Manual mode only

1. While holding down press to highlight the Set selection box on bottom.
The current Set appears.

Note: If the Set selection box is not highlighted, it means that just one Set was
defined.

Set number

Application’s icon
Part Cycle

34 How to select an already defined Set (Part/Cycle) – Operator Guide

 2. Press or to view the required Set. The icon changes to indicate the
application combined with it.
Enter
3. Press to confirm the Set selection. The program automatically exits the
selection box and returns to the page.

– Operator Guide Defining the Sets 35

7. ENABLING THE P.I.P. WINDOW (PICTURE IN PICTURE)

Press the + keys to make a P.I.P. (Picture In Picture) window appear on

display. The P.I.P. window views the main information relevant to each process
control present in the application.
P.I.P. window

The P.I.P. window allows simultaneously monitoring either different situations of a

same process control.
Example:
Main display screen and P.I.P. window relevant to “In-Process” control

Viewing of machining
cycle

Programmed Data
viewing page.

How to select the type of P.I.P. window (information to be displayed)

Shift
• Press the + keys to highlight the window (a dashed line is displayed on
the window outline)

• Press or to select the type of P.I.P. window (information to be displayed):

it is possible to select one of the following windows:
Viewing of Mida probe control status, GAP control, Crash
control, status of measuring head retraction, and error
indication
Viewing of machining cycle (measurement value, status of
machining controls).

36 How to select an already defined Set (Part/Cycle) – Operator Guide

 Shift
• Press the + keys to confirm the selection.

How to move the P.I.P. window on the screen

Shift
• Press + to highlight the window (a dashed line is displayed on the window
outline).

• Press or to move the window to the desired position.

Shift
• Press the + keys to confirm the selection.

How to disable the P.I.P. window

Shift
• Press + to highlight the window (a dashed line is displayed on the window
outline).

• Press .

– Operator Guide Enabling the P.I.P. window (Picture In Picture) 37

38 How to select an already defined Set (Part/Cycle) – Operator Guide
8. DIAMETER / DIAMETERS WITH SWITCHING
This section covers the measurement application SINGLE DIAMETER – outside or inside
– and its configured options.
Note: Anyway the description of this section is valid also for the TWO DIAMETERS
WITH SWITCHING measurement application.

For this section of the guide, the diameter has been programmed as Part Type 1,
Cycle 1 and Head 1. This gauging cycle can be defined with different Part Types and
Cycle numbers as long as they match the machine’s logic programming.
8.1. Menu Maps
Operator tasks are performed in both Automatic and Manual modes. Only the menu
map folders with operator functions -Viewing, General Adjustments and Utilities -
are shown on the following pages.

The only difference between an outside (O.D.) and an inside (I.D.) diameter is the
graphic on the Zero Adjustments page.

– Operator Guide Diameter / Diameters with Switching 39

8.1.1. Automatic Mode - Diameter Menu Map

Viewings General adjustments

FOLDERS
SUB-FOLDERS

View measure View zeroings View programming Zero adjustment Modify control
(Option) points
PAGES

Measurement Zero value Programmed Zero adjustment Modify control

bargraph Section 8.4.2 values (Option) points
Section 0 Section 8.2 Section 8.6.2 Section 8.8

F5 – Surface elaboration (only if

F4 -
the measuring function for interrupted
Control points
surfaces is enabled)
(Section 8.2.3)
(Section 8.2.4)

Options (See the following page ….)

40 Menu Maps – Operator Guide

 Options
Automatic Mode

The optional functions are enabled during the application configuration stage; if the
optional function is available the corresponding icon function key is displayed.
There may be two function keys (F6 and F3) for calling out the optional functions (see
section 8.2.1.5)

TIR Ovality
(Section 8.2.5) (Section 8.2.6)

Remspeed cycle
Stock Removal
(Adaptive Cycle)
(Section 8.2.8)
(Section 8.2.7)

Pulsed Feedback BCD Feedback

(measurement (measurement
correction). Section 8.2.9 correction). Section 8.2.10

Direct coupling- PP/IP coupling –

Dirac. Taper compensation.
Section 8.2.11 Section 8.2.12

Getting around the program

Enter
moves down to the next level.

moves up one level.

moves between folders, sub-folders or pages on the same level..

– Operator Guide Diameter / Diameters with Switching 41

8.1.2. Manual Mode - Diameter Menu Map

Utilities
FOLDERS

Measure zeroing Measure setup View

SUB-FOLDERS
PAGES

Mechanical Electrical Zero View Surface type View View

zeroing zeroing adjustments Measure setup (1) Zeroings Programming
Sec. 8.5.2 Sec. 8.5.3 (Option) Sec. 8.3.1 Sec. 8.4.1 Sec. 8.2
Sec. 8.6

(1) This page is not seen if the surface is

smooth.

F5 – Surface elaboration
F4 - Control (only if the measuring function
points for interrupted surfaces is
(Section 8.2.3) enabled) (Section 8.2.4)

Options (See the following page ….)

42 Menu Maps – Operator Guide

 Options
Manual Mode

The optional functions are enabled during the application configuration stage; if the
optional function is available the corresponding icon function key is displayed.
There may be two function keys (F6 and F3) for calling out the optional functions (see
section 8.2.1.5)

TIR Ovality
(Section 8.2.5) (Section 8.2.6)

Remspeed cycle
Stock Removal
(Adaptive Cycle)
(Section 8.2.8)
(Section 8.2.7)

Pulsed Feedback BCD Feedback

(measurement (measurement
correction). Section 8.2.9 correction). Section 8.2.10

Direct coupling- PP/IP coupling –

Dirac. Taper compensation.
Section 8.2.11 Section 8.2.12

Getting around the program

Enter
moves down to the next level.

moves up one level.

moves between folders, sub-folders or pages on the same level..

– Operator Guide Diameter / Diameters with Switching 43

8.2. Viewing the Diameter Programming

All the programmed values can be viewed in To reach this page:

either Automatic or Manual mode on the
¾ Select Manual or Automatic
”View Programming” page.
mode
Additional pages can be viewed by using the
¾ Refer to the Menu maps on
F3-F6 function keys or highlighting an option
pages 40 and 42.
Enter
and pressing .

Measurement
data

Measurement
type (integral)
data

Automatic mode Manual mode

The data viewed concern the selected Set (Part/Cycle).

Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the machine’s
logic.

8.2.1. Measurement data

Zero shift data (only

with measuring heads Measuring head sub-page
enabled for “zero
shift”)

Measurement equation

Head Number of measuring head combined with the part/cycle selected.

Nominal Value Nominal value of the measurement (data valid only with measuring
heads enabled for “zero shift”).

44 Viewing the Diameter Programming – Operator Guide

 Data not valid if the modality “Static/Dynamic self-learning zero shift” is active (see
chapter 8.2.1.2 “Viewing Zero Shift” on page 47).

Master Deviation The difference between the nominal value of master and the
gauged measurement of the workpiece used as such.

Delay Time passing between the “start cycle” signal supplied by the logic
system and the internal enabling to gauge for starting the measuring cycle.

8.2.1.1. Measuring head sub-page

Use to move the cursor to (highlight) the box before the head number and press
Enter
.
The measuring head sub-page is different in case of application with “single
measurement” or application with “switched measurements”.
Single measurement

Measuring head sub-page

Switched measurements

Measuring head sub-page

Presence of virtual
measuring head

Head Measuring head number for the current Set (part/cycle). Data not
significant (underlit) if a virtual head is present.

Display resolution for the current set:

• Metric system :1µm / 0,1 µm / 0,01µm
• Imperial/Inches system: 0.00001” / 0.000001” / 0.0000001”

ABS View Measure visualization modality. Non-significant data (underlit) with

measuring heads not enabled for “Zero shift” (measure in relative value).
DISABLED: measure visualization in relative value, with reference to the measure
“zero”.

– Operator Guide Diameter / Diameters with Switching 45

 Nominal Value: measure visualization in absolute value with reference to the
nominal value.
Field Center: measure visualization in absolute value in the whole measurement
range of the head, with reference to the field center value and without change of
scale.
Example

ABS View= DISABLED ABS View= Nominal Value ABS View= Field Center
(40.0000)

Sensor Selection with the check box OFF …, the current set is combined with
the physical measuring head indicated in “Head”.
With the check box ON :, the current set is associated to a virtual or a logical
measuring head. The virtual head is defined by the sensors S# indicated in "T1
Sensor Code" / "T2 Sensor Code", belonging to different physical measuring
heads.
The “Head” data (physical head number) is not significant (underlit).

K Transducer coefficient (with virtual heads only). Value representing a coefficient

of the contribution of each individual sensor to the measurement.

In the different pages a physical head is indicated with a number between 1 and 4 (8
with expansion): the virtual head is indicated with letters X and Y.

Example
Set 2/2: measurement performed with physical head (1) - sensors T1/T2
Set 1/1: measurement performed with virtual head (X) – sensors S1/S3

46 Viewing the Diameter Programming – Operator Guide

 Warnings !!
When checking the retraction of the sensors of a virtual head, if they belong to two
different physical heads, the remaining sensors belonging to the two physical heads
but not used for that virtual head are checked as well.
Example: when a pair of sensors type T1=S1 and T2=S3 is selected, and two sensors
(S1 and S2), are connected to the first little module, it is not possible to control the
retraction of S1 without the one of S2.
In the same way when acquiring (or resetting) the retraction threshold the physical
head is always considered, therefore if S4 and S7 are used in a virtual head also the
retraction thresholds S3 and S8 (if any) are acquired (or reset).

The zero corrections for the part -Part Adj (corrections involving all the cycles that
use the same head and belong to the same part) are not possible with virtual heads
(with physical heads only).

8.2.1.2. Viewing Zero Shift

Only with measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”.
Enter
Use to highlight the box beside the “Nominal Value” data and press : access
to a sub-page where there are displayed the type and values programmed for the
zero shift used.

The state of the Check Boxes defines the type of zero shift used in the cycle:

Internally calculated zero shift

The check boxes relevant to the other zero shift
modalities are OFF … (modalities not active).
Zero shift internally calculated based on the
nominal measurement value programmed
(Nominal Value) and the programmed value of
the Range Center.

– Operator Guide Diameter / Diameters with Switching 47

 Programmed zero shift
Set the corresponding check box to ON :.
For each contact of the measuring head it was
defined its own “Zero shift” value that is used
regardless the nominal measurement value
(Nominal Value) programmed.

Static/Dynamic self-learning zero shift

When the “Nominal Value” data is underlit
(invalid data) it means that the (static or dynamic)
zero shift self-learning mode is active.
Selecting this modality allows zero-setting in the
whole Zero Shift range, regardless the nominal
measurement value (Nominal Value)
programmed.

Note: the modality “Static/Dynamic self-learning zero shift” is not available in

applications with measure card with DSP (linearization of the measure range /
“Masterless” application).

8.2.1.3. Measurement equation

Indication of how the measurement is determined (the direction and the sign of the
contacts T1 and T2 determine the measurement value).
The following possibilities are available: T1, T2, -T1, -T2, T1+T2, T1-T2, -T1-T2, T2-
T1

8.2.1.4. Measurement Parameters

Controls. The number of control points is set at the configuration level.

Surface Elaboration. Icon present only if the measurement function for

interrupted surfaces has been enabled.

48 Viewing the Diameter Programming – Operator Guide

8.2.1.5. Measurement optional functions (Options)
The optional functions are enabled during the application configuration stage; if the
optional function is available the corresponding function key is displayed.
There may be two function keys (F6 and F3) for calling out the optional functions.

Function keys (F6 and F3) for

measurement optional function

If there are more than two optional functions (more function keys necessary) the F6
and F3 key have dynamic management. The “scroll” icon appears within the
key, beside the associated F# key number, to indicate that there are non-displayed
function keys. Highlight the key and use the and keys to scroll the list of the
measurement optional functions (represented by the relevant icons) available. Select
the optional function by pressing the F6 or F3 function key associated to the icon of
that function.
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the measurement optional
functions present; an optional function is active when the box to the left of the
corresponding function key is full.

Example: TIR optional function active

– Operator Guide Diameter / Diameters with Switching 49

8.2.2. Integral measurement
Manual Mode

Enter
Type of
integral
measurement Parameters of the integral measurement

Automatic Mode

Enter

Type of
integral
measurement Parameters of the integral measurement

Type Type of integral measurement. The following modalities represented by the

icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

Processing of the Average value
Processing of the Rolling average
Elaboration for smooth parts in eccentric rotation

Note: in case of surface elaboration for trilobal partsi the type of integral
measurement programmed takes a different meaning (see section 8.2.4.1, page 56),
and access to the page of the integral measurement parameters is disabled.

Parameters Access to the sub-page containing the parameters of the integral

Enter
measurement: press to highlight the check-box and press .

50 Viewing the Diameter Programming – Operator Guide

8.2.2.1. Parameters of the integral measurement
The sub-page containing the parameters of the integral measurement can also be
called out from the page of “Ovality” measurement, if present (section 8.2.6, page 59)
and/or from the page of ”Removal speed control”, if present (section 8.2.7, page 60).
Manual Mode example.

Ovality Measurement Removal speed control

4
Enter

Enter Enter

Parameters of the integral

measurement

4 With “Type of integral measurement” = , the parameters of the integral

measurement concern just the “Ovality” measurement (if present) and/or the
“Removal speed control” (if present). Should these options be not present,
access to the page of the integral measurement parameters is disabled.

Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside. With
the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of the
workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking the
interval between two clock pulses as time.
The data “Meas. Rpm” and “Rev. Percentage” are not valid anymore.
Meas. Rpm Number of revolutions/minute of the workpiece for the integral
measurement processing.

Rev. Percentage (1 to 1000%) percentage of the revolution of the part on which the
integral measurement is performed. Default 100% = 1 revolution of the part.

Estim. Removal Function for estimating the stock removal trend (measurement
trend) up to the end of the cycle (continuous curve processing).
With the check box enabled, successive measurement samples are processed so
as to display a continuous trend of the measurement itself.

– Operator Guide Diameter / Diameters with Switching 51

8.2.3. Control points
The gauge is configured with a fixed number of control points, including a zero point.
To change the value or remove a control point see section 8.8 “Changing Control
Points value “ on page 90.
Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the machine’s
logic.

ƒ To view the programmed control points, press F4 or highlight and

Enter
press .

Viewing control points in Manual mode

Viewing control points in Automatic mode

52 Viewing the Diameter Programming – Operator Guide

8.2.4. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces)
The measurement of interrupted surfaces is electrically damped (filtered) and such a
damping shall be linked both to the type of workpiece and rotation speed. Damping
serves to keep the measurement stable when there are interruptions on the
workpiece.
Upon Programming it is possible to define the features of the measurement
processing for interrupted surfaces.
Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ To access the data relevant to the measurement of interrupted surfaces

Enter
press F5 or highlight and press .

Surface elaboration type Surface elaboration

coefficient
Integral measurement
type

Sub-page of the
algorithm parameters

Viewing data for interrupted surfaces in Manual mode

Viewing data for interrupted surfaces in Automatic mode

The validity of the data appearing on the page depend on the “Surface Elaboration
Type ” selected (see the table below):

– Operator Guide Diameter / Diameters with Switching 53

 Surface Elaboration Type

Surface elaboration Fixed Fixed Fixed

coefficient at 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes at 1 at 1
Integral measurement
No No No Yes Yes No No
type
Max. Settling Time No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
Algorithm type No No No Yes Yes No No
Estim. Removal No Yes Yes No No No No

Surface Elaboration Type type of workpiece based on the surface features

(interruptions present or not); it will be used for the execution of the measurement
processing.

Smooth workpiece

Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are simultaneously on the

full section.
Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are NEVER simultaneously
on the full section.
Workpiece with keyway

Inside diameter measurement (also while swinging).

Elaboration for cams (parts with cam profiles with just one lobe)
Elaboration for trilobal parts (parts with cam profiles with three identical
lobes arranged at 120°) See section 8.2.4.1, page 56

Surface elaboration coefficient Measurement damping filter for interrupted

surfaces. The processing algorithms of the measurement for interrupted surfaces
foresee determined parameters of the filter, selectable with three different pre-
defined coefficients (1, 2, 3).
The higher damping is obtained with “Surface elaboration coefficient” = 3

“Surface Elaboration Type” = or : each one of the three coefficients (1, 2

and 3) is associated with three different damping speeds.

“Surface Elaboration Type” = or : programming the coefficients (1, 2 and 3)

causes the measurement to be held when the contacts are not touching the
workpiece. The measurement is held in different ways for coefficient 1, and for
coefficients 2 and 3 (different “Algorithm type” for measure elaboration).

54 Viewing the Diameter Programming – Operator Guide

 Algorithm type programmed algorithm type.
THRESHOLD – Sampling memory
Four successive measure samples are elaborated (samples distance: 8 ms):
- If the difference between them is more than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is held.
- If the difference between them is less than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is acquired.
HEAD EXT. SYNC. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside. With
the check box enabled, the measurement processing and the integral
measurement requested are enabled or disabled according to this signal (for
external synchronism ON the measure is performed)
DERIVATE – Derived memory
The measure trailing edge and leading edge are identified. After the leading edge,
a settling time is awaited before acquiring the measure; it can be programmed in
the sub-page of the technical parameters of the algorithm (Latency Time data).
See chapter 8.2.4.2, on page 56.

Integral Measurement Type type of integral measurement for the period of validity
of the measurement itself.
The following modalities represented by the icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

Processing of the Average value

Max. Settling Time Maximum time passing between the moment the start cycle
is given and the moment when the software starts processing the damped
measurement.

Estim. Removal Function for estimating the stock removal trend (measurement
trend) up to the end of the cycle (continuous curve processing).
With the check box enabled, the measurement damping value does not depend
anymore on the “Surface elaboration coefficient” programmed (1, 2 or 3), but is
automatically calculated at each measurement interruption (interruption of the
workpiece).

– Operator Guide Diameter / Diameters with Switching 55

8.2.4.1. Elaboration for trilobal parts

Type of integral
measurement

Programmed type of integral measurement takes the following meaning:

Measurement of the last lobe

Measurement of the maximum value of the last three lobes
Measurement of the minimum value of the last three lobes
Average of the last three lobes

8.2.4.2. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters

The presence and validity of the parameters appearing on this sub-page depend on
the programming of the “Surface Elaboration Type” and “Algorithm type” parameters.

B
C

Algorithm’s technical parameters sub-page (example)

Surface elaboration type

Surface elaboration
No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
parameters (A)
Measure Times (B) No No No Yes Yes No No
Filter parameters (C) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

56 Viewing the Diameter Programming – Operator Guide

 A Parameters of the surface elaboration algorithm defined upon the application
configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical personnel or Marposs’
personnel).

B Measure times
Latency Time Lapse of time during which the measurement is held to
prevent the instability due to over-elongations in the instant in which the
contacts, exiting the hold time, return onto the workpiece.
Measure Time Measurement acquisition time (minimum lapse of time
during which the contacts touch the workpiece).

C Filter parameters for the surface elaboration algorithm. Parameters defined

upon the application configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical
personnel or Marposs’ personnel).

– Operator Guide Diameter / Diameters with Switching 57

8.2.5. TIR (Total Indicator Reading) (Option)
It allows to determine the eccentricity error of the workpiece to the rotation axis by
using just a contact (T1).
The TIR option can be enabled or disabled upon Programming. The option is enabled
when the small box to the left of the icon is filled in.
Note: In manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to view the TIR measurement
data.

Viewing TIR measurement data in Manual mode

Viewing TIR measurement data in Automatic mode

Tir Control Value beyond which the T.I.R. measurement must be considered
out of tolerance.

Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside. With
the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of the
workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking the
interval between two clock pulses as time.
The datum “Tir Rpm” is not valid anymore.

Tir Rpm Rotation speed of the workpiece during T.I.R. check.

Tir Delay Time delay before taking the T.I.R. measurement.

58 Viewing the Diameter Programming – Operator Guide

8.2.6. Ovality (Option)
Check of workpiece ovality.
Note: The Ovality measurement is NOT valid with Fenar-L measuring heads
(the ovality check does not make sense at all).
The Ovality option can be enabled or disabled upon Programming. The option is
enabled when the small box to the left of the icon is filled in.
Note: In manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to view the ovality

measurement data.

Parameters of the integral

measurement
Viewing the ovality measurement data in Manual mode

Parameters of the integral

measurement
Viewing the ovality measurement data in Automatic mode

Ovality Control Value beyond which the ovality measurement must be considered
out of tolerance.

Parameters Access to the sub-page containing the parameters of the integral

Enter
measurement: press .
See the meaning of the parameters on chapter 8.2.2.1 "Parameters of the integral
measurement”, page 51.

– Operator Guide Diameter / Diameters with Switching 59

8.2.7. Stock Removal Speed (Adaptive Cycle) (Option)
It monitors the stock removal rate of the workpiece. When the rate falls above or
below the control limits a signal is sent to the machine’s logic system.
The Remspeed option can be enabled or disabled upon Programming. The option is
enabled when the small box to the left of the icon is filled in.
Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle). (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to view the stock removal
speed control (Adaptive Cycle) data.

Parameters of the integral

measurement
Viewing data in Manual mode

Parameters of the integral

measurement
Viewing data in Automatic mode
Remspeed Control 1 lower programmed control.
Remspeed Control 2 upper programmed control.
The gauge gives the machine’s logic information about stock removal in time (µm/s)
through the status (ON/OFF) of Remspeed 1 and Remspeed 2 controls.

Remspeed Cont.1 Remspeed Cont. 2

OFF OFF Insufficient removal
ON OFF Removal OK
ON ON Excessive removal

60 Viewing the Diameter Programming – Operator Guide

 Parameters Access to the sub-page containing the parameters of the integral
Enter
measurement:: press .
See the meaning of the parameters on chapter 8.2.2.1 "Parameters of the integral
measurement”, page 51.

– Operator Guide Diameter / Diameters with Switching 61

8.2.8. Stock Removal (Option)
It allows to carry out machining cycles in which a predetermined quantity of stock is
removed instead of reaching the zero value.
The “Stock removal” option is enabled or disabled upon Programming, and its type
(ABSOLUTE or PERCENTAGE) is defined. The option is active if the box to the left of
the icon is full.
Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle). (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to view the stock removal data.

Viewing data in Manual mode

Viewing data in Automatic mode

Stock Removal Amount amount of stock to be removed.

Stock Removal Percentage percentage of stock to be removed

Note: Stock removal with input from outside (BCD, Binary or Field Bus). The value
displayed (stock value or percentage) represents the last value received. The stock
value is received in Automatic mode, before the cycle, and concerns the selected set.

62 Viewing the Diameter Programming – Operator Guide

8.2.9. Pulsed Feed Back (measurement correction) (option)
We call Pulsed Feedback the measurement correction through “zero” shift determined
by pulses supplied through external logic unit.
Such a shift may be both positive and negative based on the type of pulse.
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the “Pulsed Feedback” option and
define its characteristics. The option is enabled when the small box to the left of the
icon is filled in.

Note: In manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to view the page of the pulsed
Feedback data.

Viewing pulsed Feedback data in Manual mode

Viewing pulsed Feedback data in Automatic mode

Pulse Weight minimum correction value (0 to 50 µm) performed at each pulse.

– Operator Guide Diameter / Diameters with Switching 63

8.2.10. BCD Feed Back (measurement correction) (option)
Correction of the In-Process measurement based on a determined Post-Process
measurement performed with Marposs gauge. The communication between the two
applications takes place through BCD/Binary interface.
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the “BCD Feedback” option and
define its characteristics. The option is enabled when the small box to the left of the
icon is filled in.

Note: In manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the BCD
Feedback data.

Viewing BCD Feedback data in Manual mode

Viewing BCD Feedback data in Automatic mode

Corr. Code request code associated with the measurement you want to correct
(combination of Post-Process measurement and the current In-Process
measurement).

Interface number identification number of the BCD or Binary interface from which
the correction value comes. The maximum number of BCD/Binary interfaces is
fixed to four (IF#1 – IF#4).

64 Viewing the Diameter Programming – Operator Guide

8.2.11. Direct coupling - Dirac (Option)
The Dirac application consists in the execution of the In-Process measurement of a
workpiece (typically an outside diameter) directly coupled with the Pre-Process
measurement of another workpiece (typically an inside diameter – hole).
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the “Dirac” option and define its
characteristics. The option is enabled when the small box to the left of the icon is filled
in.
Note: In manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the Dirac
application data.

Viewing Dirac application data in Manual mode

Viewing Dirac application data in Automatic mode

Correction Source the type of source of the correction values for the Dirac
function may be:

INTERNAL the correction comes from a set of the Post-Process type of the
same In-Process measurement CPU card that must carry out the
Dirac application.

EXTERNAL the correction comes from a Post-Process measurement processed

in a measurement CPU card other than the one that handles the In-

– Operator Guide Diameter / Diameters with Switching 65

 Process cycle. (Post-Process measurement CPU card belonging to
a different equipment).

Correction Code request code associated with the measurement on which you want
to carry out the Dirac-type correction.
With INTERNAL-type "Correction source": the "Correction code" of the set of the
In-Process type that must carry out the Dirac correction shall be the same of the
associated set of the Post-Process type that determines the correction value.
With EXTERNAL-type "Correction source": the In-Process set that shall perform
the Dirac correction based on the measurement performed on a Post-Process
control plan shall have the same "Correction Code" number of the Post-Process
measurement associated.

Correction Sign selection of sign (+ or -) for the Dirac correction.

+ sign (default): standard Dirac application (Post-Process measurement Æ inside
diameter / In-Process measurement Æ outside diameter)
- sign: special Dirac application (the sign of the correction is inverted).
Example: Post-Process measurement Æ outside diameter / In-Process
measurement Æ inside diameter.

Interface Numberidentification number of the BCD or Binary interface from which the
Dirac correction comes (with EXTERNAL-type "Correction source" only). The
maximum number of BCD/Binary interfaces is fixed to four (IF#1 – IF#4).
The In-Process set that shall perform the Dirac correction based on the
measurement performed on a Post-Process control plan shall have the same
"Interface Number" of the Post-Process measurement associated.

One correction at a cycle Dirac correction used either only once (for just one
cycle) or more times (for more cycles)
: Dirac correction used for an In-Process cycle only
… Dirac correction used for more In-Process cycles

66 Viewing the Diameter Programming – Operator Guide

8.2.12. PP/IP coupling – Taper compensation (Option)
Association of an In-Process diameter measurement with one or more Pre/Post-
Process measurements among the following ones:
• T.I.R. cycle
• Simple or double Post-Process diameter cycle
• Passive centering cycle
• Passive positioning cycle
The association between sets is obtained by setting the same coupling code (1 to 31,
necessarily different from 0) in all the sets to be associated.

Note: for the T.I.R. measurement it is not necessary to program a specific coupling
code since it is obtained as a cycle of the same set of the In-Process measurement
(see section 8.2.5 on page 58).

During the execution of the cycle in automatic operating mode this function makes it
possible to monitor the value of the Pre/Post-Process measurements associated to it.
The value of the associated measurements will be visible, in automatic operating
mode, in a single display page (see section 8.3.2.1, page 72).

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to view the page of data.

Viewing data in Manual mode

Viewing data in Automatic mode

Coupling Code code of association between the sets (1 to 31). Code “0” indicates
no association.

– Operator Guide Diameter / Diameters with Switching 67

 In case of association between an In-Process diameter measurement set and a
Passive Positioning set there could be present the taper compensation function (see
section 8.2.12.1 on page 68).

8.2.12.1. Taper compensation

Function active with the corresponding check-box ON (:).
Taper compensation based on the last positioning cycle performed.

Correction Sign Sign of the taper angle ( + or – )

If it was programmed in the data of the Passive Positionar, the Measure Sign
datum = + (default value), the Correction Sign datum takes the following meaning:

In-process Diameter: Sign = - In-process Diameter: Sign = +

Passive Positionar: Measure sign = + Passive Positionar: Measure sign = +

In-process Diameter: Sign = + In-process Diameter: Sign = -

Passive Positionar: Measure sign = + Passive Positionar: Measure sign = +

P = Positionar measuring head

68 Viewing the Diameter Programming – Operator Guide

 Angle Value – Value of the cone angle. (from 0 to 44° 59’ 59”).
Angle value

The taper compensation is calculated based on the last positioning cycle performed
as soon as the In-Process cycle is selected.
If no Passive Positioning sets are associated to the current In-Process diameter set,
that is if at least an associated Passive Positioning cycle is not preventively
performed, the compensation will prove to be null.
If more Passive Positioning sets are associated to the same In-Process diameter set,
the compensation will be performed using the last positioning cycle performed.
In case of passage to the manual mode the passive positioning measurement will be
reset; in case of a successive passage to the automatic mode the compensation will
prove to be null until a new Positioning cycle is performed.
If the calculated compensation is higher that the maximum zero correction permitted,
the alarm “Excessive taper compensation” will be issued. In this case the involved
compensation will not be applied (also if the alarm is cleared) up to a new positioning
cycle or a re-programming of the taper angle of the part.
No taper compensation is performed with a positioning value higher than 2000 µm in
absolute value.

– Operator Guide Diameter / Diameters with Switching 69

8.3. Viewing Diameter Measurement

The View Measure Bargraph page is where To reach this page:

the size of the workpiece can be monitored
¾ Select Automatic or Manual
during the grinding cycle in both Manual and
mode then choose one:
Automatic modes.
¾ Press
Typically, the View Measure Bargraph page
is defined as the Home page (default ¾ Press then
screen), see section 4.2.3 “Defining the ¾ Refer to Menu maps on pages
HOME key” on page 32. 40 and 42.

“ABS View” data valid: based on its programming (measuring head sub-page
- section 8.2.1.1, page 45) the measure visualization (numerical and
graphical) may be:
i • in relative value, with reference to the measure “zero”
• in absolute value, with reference to the programmed nominal value
• in absolute value in the whole measurement range of the head, with
reference to the field center value and without change of scale.

8.3.1. Viewing the Measurement in Manual Mode

ƒ Select the corresponding Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).

Numerical and Electrical Zeroing

graphical button (2)
representation of
measuring head (1)
Numerical value of
measurement
Retraction status

Bargraph of
measurement
Selected Part/Cycle

(1) A physical head is indicated with a number between 1 and 4 (8 with expansion): a
virtual or a logical head is indicated with the letters X and Y.

(2) Not present if the “Multiple electric zeroing” function (section 8.5.3.2 on page 81)
is enabled.

70 Viewing Diameter Measurement – Operator Guide

 Note: The electric zero-setting from this page through the zeroing button
(see chapter 8.5.3 “Electrical Zeroing of Diameter ” on page 78), is
possible only with mechanically zeroed measuring head (see chapter 8.5.2
“Mechanical Zeroing of Diameter ” on page 76).

8.3.2. Viewing the Measurement in Automatic mode

Note: In Automatic mode the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the machine’s
logic.

Numerical and graphic

representation of current
measuring head (1) Bargraph of
measurement

Measurement zeroing status

(red) not zeroed Numerical value of
(green) zeroed measurement

Status of commands:
Nominal value of the highlighted box =
measurement (2) command triggered

Current Set (Part/Cycle)

(1) A physical head is indicated with a number between 1 and 4 (8 with expansion): a
virtual or a logical head is indicated with the letters X and Y.
(2) Not displayed with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning modality”
enabled.

When TIR, Ovality, Remspeed options are installed, this tab has an additional icon.
Icon indicating additional pages.

Press or to reach the other pages.

Bargraph of measurement
Numerical value of
measurement
TIR
Control point status:
under limit
over limit

– Operator Guide Diameter / Diameters with Switching 71

 Bargraph of measurement
Numerical value of
Ovality measurement
Control point status::
under limit
over limit
Note: The Ovality measurement is NOT valid with Fenar-L measuring heads
(the ovality check does not make sense at all).
Bargraph of stock removal
rate
Numerical value of
measurement
Remspeed
Control point status:
under limit
over limit

8.3.2.1. Viewing of associated measurements (Option)

If the “PP/IP coupling” function is enabled it is possible to view a further page showing
the values of the measurements associated to the current measurement.

“ PP/IP coupling” enabled Viewing of associated measurements

The measurements displayed refer to the last corresponding cycle performed.
When exiting the automatic mode the measurements associated to the current set are
reset.
The measurements corresponding to non existent sets or not associated to the
current set are displayed with -----------.

72 Viewing Diameter Measurement – Operator Guide

8.4. Viewing the Diameter Zeroing values

The Zero Summary page contains To reach this page:

information about the various zeroing
¾ Select Manual or Automatic
functions of the gauge system and can be
mode then choose one:
viewed in either Manual or Automatic
mode. ¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to Menu maps on pages
40 and 42.

Viewing Zeroing values in Manual and Automatic Modes

Note: this page shows only the zeroing values for the functions active in the current
application.

Zeroing Value Sum of the accumulated zeroing values from electrically zeroing
the gauge system.
Note: if the modality “Static/Dynamic self-learning zero shift” (see paragraph
8.2.1.2, page 47) is active, the “Zeroing Value” is not significant anymore,
and is replaced by the following symbols:

(red): system not zeroed

(green): zero-setting performed (system zeroed).

Master Deviation Value programmed to indicate the difference between the size of
the sample part and the final size you want to obtain.

Zero Adjust Sum of the zero corrections given through keyboard during the part
machining.

Dirac correction value of the Dirac correction (it appears if the "Direct
coupling/Dirac" option is enabled). The Dirac correction value is reset for all the
sets provided with the Dirac option in the following cases:
at the electronic unit power on
• in the Automatic/Manual switching
• during zero-setting or zero-setting reset

– Operator Guide Diameter / Diameters with Switching 73

 Measure Feedback Measure correction value (it appears if the "Feed Back –
measure correction" option is enabled). The measure Feedback value is reset
whenever the zero-setting is reset.

Taper Compensation value of the taper compensation (appears if the

“Taper compensation” function is enabled – Section 8.2.12.1, page 68).
The compensation value will be reset in case of passage to manual mode. at the
successive passage to automatic mode the compensation will be null until a new
Positioning cycle is performed

8.4.1. Viewing the Zeroing values in Manual mode

ƒ Select the Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).

8.4.2. Viewing the Zeroing values in Automatic mode

Note: In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the

machine’s logic.

74 Viewing the Diameter Zeroing values – Operator Guide

8.5. Zeroing diameter
8.5.1. Introduction
Zeroing is the process of setting up and adjusting the gauge and a measuring head to
a master workpiece to assure that post-process inspection of the workpiece yields the
desired final dimensions.
Types of Zeroing:
Mechanical Zeroing – physically adjusts the fingers/contacts so that they are within
the foreseen measurement range (see section 8.5.2 on page 76).
Electrical Zeroing – adjustment operation to be performed periodically to obtain the
maximum accuracy and reliability of measurements on the workpiece (see section
8.5.3 on page 78).
• Electric zero-setting shared by the sets – operation to be performed in case
of “Masterless” application (linearization of the measurement range). (see
section 8.5.3.1 on page 80).
• Multiple Electrical Zeroing – this functional feature is present if it was
enabled upon the configuration stage of the application (see section 8.5.3.2, on
page 81).
Zero Adjustments – Corrections made when after a post-process inspection of the
workpieces small differences in size are found (see section 8.6 on page 83).
Zero Resets – removes the offsets generated by the system during the last electrical
zeroing (see section 8.7 on page 89).
Zeroing Conditions
Static – The master workpiece is NOT rotating.
Dynamic – The master workpiece is rotating and wet by the coolant.

When to zero the gauge system?

TYPE OF ZEROING CONDITIONS
Mechanical Zeroing
At initial setup
followed by
Electrical Zeroing
At grinder start up
Electrical Zeroing At the beginning of each work shift
After changing Part Type
Zero Adjust When the workpiece size changes
When the zeroing range of the measuring head
Zero Reset has been exceeded.
followed by After replacement of any measuring head
Mechanical Zeroing & component (head, contacts, fingers, etc.)
Electrical Zeroing After any mechanical changes are made to the
gauge system.

– Operator Guide Diameter / Diameters with Switching 75

8.5.2. Mechanical Zeroing of Diameter
Mechanical zeroing MUST be done to a master workpiece:
ƒ At initial set up of the gauge system.
ƒ If the allowed zero adjustment range has been exceeded.
ƒ After any mechanical or electrical changes to the gauge system (fingers, contacts,
...).
Note: In case of application with “Thruvar” type measuring head (inside diameter
check) see the relevant zeroing procedure in chapter 23 "Thruvar"
measuring head “ on page 549.

Mechanical zeroing must be performed only in Manual mode and statically.

Note: Each measuring head that has been defined MUST be Mechanically
Zeroed.

Mechanical Zeroing of a measuring head:

1. Gauge in Manual Mode.
2. Select the Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) relevant to the head to
be zeroed.
3. Eliminate any zeroing offsets:

- press then ;
Enter
- press F5 or highlight the Zero Reset button and press .

Enter
- a question box appears asking to Reset: press .

4. Press then to highlight the Mechanical Zeroing page icon.

76 Zeroing diameter – Operator Guide

 Numerical and graphic
Numerical and graphic view of measurement
view of measurement value of the second
value of the first transducer
transducer -T2: physical head
-T1: physical head -S#: virtual head
-S#: virtual head
Numerical and graphic
representation of current
measuring head (1)

(1) A physical head is indicated with a number between 1 and 4 (8 with

expansion): a virtual or a logical head is indicated with the letters X and Y.
5. Place the master workpiece into the machine.
6. Adjust the finger/contact assemblies of the measuring head so they can be
inserted into gauging position safely.
The adjustment mode of the finger/contact assemblies depends on the
adjustment method used (with adjustable guides or with contacts).
(pls. see Chapter 22 “Measuring head Mechanical zero-setting” on page 535).

Finger/contact assembly – T1
Cable

Measuring
head support Measuring Contacts
head DO NOT
touch master

Slide
adapter
Finger/contact assembly – T2
Slide

7. Bring the measuring head to gauging position.

8. Adjust the upper finger/contact assembly (T1) making the contact touch the
master until the measurement value on the upper digital display of the
Mechanical Zeroing page is next to zero (± 10 µ).

Measurement value
next to zero.

– Operator Guide Diameter / Diameters with Switching 77

 9. Adjust the lower finger/contact assembly (T2) making the contact touch the
master until the measurement value on the upper digital display of the
Mechanical Zeroing page is next to zero (± 10 µ).

Measurement value
next to zero

This completes the mechanical setup of the measuring head; now perform an Electric
Zeroing (see section 8.5.3 on page 78).

8.5.3. Electrical Zeroing of Diameter

Note: In case of application with “Thruvar” type measuring head (inside diameter
check) see the relevant zeroing procedure in chapter 23 "Thruvar"
measuring head “ on page 549.

Electrical Zeroing MUST be done:

ƒ In manual mode on a master workpiece.
ƒ Dynamically, i.e. with the master workpiece rotating and wet by coolant.
ƒ Regularly, usually at the beginning of each work shift and/or when the grinding
wheel is switched on.

Note: Each measuring head that has been defined MUST be electrically zeroed
for each work cycle in which it is used.

Electrical Zeroing Procedure:

Gauge in Manual mode.
1. Select the Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
2. Position the master workpiece in machine (master workpiece rotating and wet
with coolant).
3. Bring the head to measurement position.

4. Bring up the electric zeroing page: press and then . The electric zero-
setting button is highlighted.

78 Zeroing diameter – Operator Guide

 Zeroing value (1)

Electric zeroing
button
Master deviation
Nominal value of the Measurement value
measurement (2)

(2) Not displayed with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning modality”
enabled.

Enter
5. Press F4 or . A question box appears for zeroing confirmation.

Enter
6. Press to highlight “Yes” and press . Electrical zeroing is completed.

If no error messages are displayed the electric zero-setting procedure has been
correctly performed.
The Gauge can be switched to Automatic operating mode.

Note: Electric zero-setting with integral measurement.

Once completed the electric zero-setting procedure the measurement is
still displayed (graphic and numerical display) dynamically (viewing of the
measurement variation during the part rotation).

(1)Note: if the modality “Static/Dynamic self-learning zero shift” (see paragraph

8.2.1.2, page 47) is active, the “Zeroing Value” is not significant anymore,
and is replaced by the following symbols:

(red): system not zeroed

(green): zero-setting performed (system zeroed).

– Operator Guide Diameter / Diameters with Switching 79

8.5.3.1. Shared Electric zero-setting (“Masterless” function)
In case of application with “Masterless” function (linearization of the measurement
range / measurement card with DSP-Digital Signal Processing), carry out a
simultaneous zero-setting of all the sets that use the selected measuring head
(shared electric zero-setting).

Mechanical Zeroing
Page Measurement value 1
of the first contact

Measurement value of
the second contact
Measuring head in use

1 Data present only with measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”.

Execution of electric zero-setting shared by the sets

Aborts the electric zero-setting shared by the sets

Zero-setting procedure
• Position the measuring heads (contacts T1 / T2) and fasten them onto the special
mechanical support, in the most suitable range based on the available sample
workpiece.
• Bring the measuring heads to measuring position on the sample workpiece.

• Press the key to carry out zero-setting. In this way all the sets that use the
measuring head are perfectly zeroed (shared zero-setting).

Note: if a new set is defined, combined with this measuring head, it is necessary
to repeat the zero-setting procedure.

80 Zeroing diameter – Operator Guide

8.5.3.2. Multiple Electrical Zeroing (Option)
This functional feature is present if it was enabled upon the configuration stage of the
application.
This functional feature allows using up to 32 different zeroing indexes for each set;
this means that it is possible to zero-set on different masters without having to change
the set (all the other programming data being equal). Afterwards it is possible to work
with the corresponding parts by calling out the different zeroing indexes.

Measurement zeroing status

Zeroing index no. (red) not zeroed
(1 to 32)
(green) zeroed

Electric zeroing button

Measurement nominal
value (1)

(1) Not displayed with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning modality”
enabled.

To select the index no. act as follows:

ƒ use to move the cursor to the index number, or to view the desired
Enter
value, then press to confirm.

This functional feature is optimized for the use with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic)
self-learning” modality (see section 8.2.1.2, page 47), but can also be used if such a
modality has not been enabled
“Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning” modality, enabled
After the execution of the mechanical zeroing it is possible, by exploiting the different
zeroing indexes (1 to 32), to carry out an electric zeroing on masters that do not differ
more than the maximum zeroing range without changing the measurement nominal
value (maximum zeroing range: maximum value of the zero shift range +
programmed value of the head zero range).
Changing the measurement nominal value does not cause a reset of the current
zeroing index.

“Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning” modality, NOT enabled

After the execution of an electric zeroing with a determined index, if you want to zero-
set with another index it is necessary to:
• change the zeroing index
• change the measurement nominal value

– Operator Guide Diameter / Diameters with Switching 81

 • zero-set.
This procedure is necessary because changing the nominal value causes a reset of
the current zeroing index.
If you change the Field Center value, the current zeroing index is always reset, unlike
the other indexes.
The zero adjust that was set remains valid until you switch between the zeroed
indexes, while it is reset when switching to a index that was not zeroed.

82 Zeroing diameter – Operator Guide

8.6. Zero Adjustments for Diameter (Option)

Zero adjustments are made when a post- To reach this page:

process inspection of the workpiece shows
¾ Select Manual or Automatic
an incorrect size.
mode then choose one:

¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to the Menu maps on
pages 40 and 42.

Example:
The workpiece is undersize: enter a zero adjustment with the same value but with
opposite sign.
APPLICATION PART TOO SMALL PART TOO BIG
OUTSIDE diameter Add Subtract
INSIDE diameter Subtract Add
This can be done in either Manual or Automatic mode.

8.6.1. Zero Adjustment in Manual mode

Enter
Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) and press .
Note: Zero adjustments in manual mode affect the next cycle.

Bargraph of Σ value

Part drawing Sum of zero

adjustments (Σ)

Bargraph and numerical

display of measurement
value

Value of zero adjustment

value entered

Zero Adjustment Reset key

– Operator Guide Diameter / Diameters with Switching 83

 Changing Zero Adjustment value

1. Press to highlight the field

2. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

Enter
3. Press .
4. The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the top of the
page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments).

Resetting Zero Adjustments

Enter
1. Press F5 or highlight and press . A “Reset?” question box will appear.
Zero
adjustments reset

Enter
2. Press to highlight “Yes” and press . The zero adjustments are reset.

84 Zero Adjustments for Diameter (Option) – Operator Guide

8.6.2. Zero Adjustments in automatic mode

Note: Zero adjustments in automatic mode are made while grinding and affect
the current cycle.

8.6.2.1. Zero adjustment for the current Set (part/cycle)

Bargraph of Σ value

Sum of zero adjustments

Part drawing
(Σ)

Bargraph and numerical

display of measurement
value

Zero adjustment
value entered

Changing the zero adjustment value

1. Press to reach the page

2. Press to highlight the field

3. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

4. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments for the cycle).

– Operator Guide Diameter / Diameters with Switching 85

8.6.2.2. Zero adjustment with Set (Part/Cycle) selection

Bargraph of Σ value for the

selected cycle
Sum of zero adjustments
(Σ) for the selected cycle
Part drawing

Sum of zero adjustments

(Σ) for the selected Part

Zero adjustment value

entered for the selected cycle Number of selected Part

Zero adjustment value entered

for the selected Part

The zero adjustments entered for the selected Part concern all the cycles using the
same head and belong to the same part. The common correction value is subtracted
in the same way following an electric zero-setting.

Selecting the Set (Part/Cycle)

1. Holding down press to highlight the Part/Cycle selection box below.

Current Part Type

Part Number Cycle Number

2. Press or to view the selected Part/Cycle, otherwise press or to

change the Cycle number and or to change the Part number.

3. Press to confirm the Part/Cycle selection made. The program automatically

exits the selection box and returns to the page.

86 Zero Adjustments for Diameter (Option) – Operator Guide

 Changing the zero adjustment value for the cycle

1. Press to reach the page

2. Press to highlight the field

3. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

4. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments for the cycle).

5. Press .

Changing the zero adjustment value for the part

1. Press to reach the page

2. Press to highlight the field

3. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

4. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments for the part).

5. Press .

– Operator Guide Diameter / Diameters with Switching 87

8.6.2.3. Hardware modification of the zero correction (Option)
Functional feature present if it was enabled upon the application configuration stage.
The hardware modification of the zero correction is not admitted:
ƒ in automatic with active cycle
ƒ with non zeroed measurement
ƒ if the “(Static or dynamic) zero shift self-learning” mode (see section 8.2.1.2 on
page 47) is not enabled,

Enter
Function active with the corresponding check-box ON (:).Press to change its
state (:function active / … function not active).

Programming of a zero correction value for single transducer that is added to the zero
correction calculated by a previous zero-setting.

Zero correction for T1 Zero correction for T2

Indication of the
measurement zeroing state:
green = zeroed
red = not zeroed

Act as follows for programming:

ƒ highlight the involved field with , press or to view the desired value,
Enter
and then press to confirm.

88 Zero Adjustments for Diameter (Option) – Operator Guide

8.7. Zero Reset for Diameter

This function removes all offsets generated To reach this page:

by the system during the last electrical
¾ Select Manual mode, then
zeroing (the transducers value is shown).
choose one:

¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to the Menu map on page
42.

It can be selected only in manual mode:

ƒ After mechanical changes to the gauge system.
ƒ When the maximum Zero Adjustment value available has been reached.

Electric Zeroing Reset Procedure:

1. Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
Enter
2. Press F5 or highlight and press . A “Reset?” question box will appear.

Enter
3. Press to highlight “Yes” and press .

4. Press and to highlight the Mechanical Zeroing page icon.

Mechanical
Zeroing page

The gauge system MUST NOW be Mechanically then Electrically Zeroed (see page
76).

– Operator Guide Diameter / Diameters with Switching 89

8.8. Changing Control Points value (Automatic mode)
During the grinding process, it may be necessary to modify the control points value to
reach the optimum cycle.
Note: In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

Note: Changes made to the Control Points affect the current cycle.

To reach this page:

¾ Select Automatic mode, then
choose one:

¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to the Menu map on pages
40.

Enter
1. Press to highlight the control point to be changed and press .

2. Press to highlight the digit that needs changing.

3. Press or to increase or decrease the digit.

4. If more than one digit needs changing, press to highlight the next digit, then
press or to increase or decrease the digit
Enter
5. Press ,
Enter
6. Press to highlight “Apply to measure” and press .

Control point
to be changed

Apply to measure
button

7. The control point value has been changed.

90 Changing Control Points value (Automatic mode) – Operator Guide

9. TWO SIMULTANEOUS DIAMETERS
This section covers the measurement application TWO SIMULTANEOUS DIAMETERS and
its configured options.
In this application two measuring heads are used to perform two different
measurements simultaneously (Measurement A & Measurement B) on a part.
Note: Anyway the measuring application TWO SIMULTANEOUS DIAMETERS can also
be used as SINGLE DIAMETER (Measurement A) measuring cycle.
This measuring cycle can be combined with Parts/Cycles as long as they match the
machine’s logic programming.

Note: In the rest of the chapter the screen pages relevant to Measurement A will
be reported as an example; the pages relevant to Measurement B are
identical.

9.1. Menu Maps

Operator tasks are performed in both Automatic and Manual modes. Only the menu
map folders with operator functions -Viewing, General Adjustments and Utilities -
are shown on the following pages.

– Operator Guide Two simultaneous diameters 91

9.1.1. Automatic Mode - Two-Diameter Menu Map
Viewings General adjustments
FOLDERS
SUB-FOLDERS

View measure View zeroings View programming Zero adjustment Modify control
(Option) points
PAGES

View measure Zero values Programmed Zero adjustment Modify control

Section 9.3.2 Section 0 values (Option) points
Section 9.6.2 Section 9.8
+ Æ
Use to view
+ Æ
Section 9.2

Use to view
Measure A
Options
Measure A

Use to view
Measure B
Options
Measure B

F5 – Surface elaboration
F4 -
(only if the measuring function for
Control points
interrupted surfaces is enabled
(Section . 9.2.3)
(Section 9.2.4)

Options (measure A/measure B) (See the following page ….)

92 Menu Maps – Operator Guide

 Options(measure A/measure B)
Automatic Mode

The optional functions are enabled during the application configuration stage; if the
optional function is available the corresponding icon function key is displayed.
There may be two function keys (F6 and F3) for calling out the optional functions (see
section 9.2.1.5)

TIR Ovality
(Section9.2.5) (Section 9.2.6)

Remspeed cycle
Stock Removal
(Adaptive Cycle)
(Section 9.2.8)
(Section 9.2.7)

Pulsed Feedback BCD Feedback

(measurement (measurement
correction). Section 9.2.9 correction). Section 9.2.10

Direct coupling-
PP/IP coupling –
Dirac.
Section 9.2.12
Section 9.2.11

Getting around the program

Enter
moves down to the next level.

moves up one level.

moves between folders, sub-folders or pages on the same level..

– Operator Guide Two simultaneous diameters 93

9.1.2. Manual Mode - Two-Diameter Menu Map

Utility
FOLDERS

Measure zeroing Measure setup View

SUB-FOLDERS
PAGES

Meas. A Meas. A Meas. A Meas. A Meas. A Meas. A Meas. A

Meas. B Meas. B Meas. B Meas. B Meas. B Meas. B

Mechanical Electrical Zero View measure Surface type View Meas. B
zeroing zeroing adjustments Sec. 9.3.1 setup (1) Zeroings View
Sec. 9.5.2 Sec. 9.5.3 (Option) Sez. 0 Programming.
Sec. 9.6.1 Sec. 9.2
(1) This page is not seen if the
surface is smooth

F4 - Control F5 – Surface elaboration

points (only if the measuring function for
(Section . 9.2.3) interrupted surfaces is enabled ).
Section 9.2.4

Options (measure A/measure B) (See the following page ….)

94 Menu Maps – Operator Guide

 Options(measure A/measure B)
Manual Mode

The optional functions are enabled during the application configuration stage; if the
optional function is available the corresponding icon function key is displayed.
There may be two function keys (F6 and F3) for calling out the optional functions (see
section 9.2.1.5)

TIR Ovality
(Section 9.2.5) (Section 9.2.6)

Remspeed cycle
Stock Removal
(Adaptive Cycle)
(Section 9.2.8)
(Section 9.2.7)

Pulsed Feedback BCD Feedback

(measurement (measurement
correction). Section 9.2.9 correction). Section 9.2.10

Direct coupling-
PP/IP coupling –
Dirac.
Section 9.2.12
Section 9.2.11

Getting around the program

Enter
moves down to the next level.

moves up one level.

moves between folders, sub-folders or pages on the same level..

– Operator Guide Two simultaneous diameters 95

9.2. Viewing the Measurements A and B Programming

All the programmed values can be viewed in To reach this page:

either Automatic or Manual mode on the
¾ Select Manual or Automatic
”View Programming” page.
mode
Additional pages can be viewed by using the
¾ Refer to the Menu maps on
F3-F6 function keys or highlighting an option
pages 92 and 94.
Enter
and pressing .

There are identical and independent programming pages for each measurement, only
the icon of the page that identifies the measurement type is different.

Measurement A (Diameter 1)
Measurement B (Diameter 2)

For simplicity we will always refer to the page relevant to Measurement A from
here on.
Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) and
the measurement (A or B) to be viewed.
In Automatic mode the Set (Part/Cycle) and the measurement selection is
made by the machine’s logic.

Viewing programming page in Manual mode

Press to view Measurement A or Measurement B individually and in

sequence.

Measurement A Measurement B
Integral measurement data

Measurement data

The data viewed concern the selected Part/Cycle.

96 Viewing the Measurements A and B Programming – Operator Guide

 Viewing programming page in Automatic mode

Press + to view Measurement A or Measurement B individually

and in sequence.

Measurement A Measurement B
Integral measurement data

Measurement data

The data viewed concern the selected Part/Cycle.

9.2.1. Measurement data

Zero shift data (only with
measuring heads Measuring head sub-page
enabled for “zero shift”)

Measurement equation

Head Number of measuring head (Measurement A ) for the current Set

(part/cycle).

Nominal value Nominal value of measurement (data valid only with measuring
heads enabled for “zero shift”).
Data not valid if the modality “ Static/Dynamic self-learning zero shift” is active (see
chapter 9.2.1.2 “Viewing Zero Shift” on page 100).
Master deviation The difference between the nominal value of master and the
gauged measurement of the workpiece used as such.
Delay Time passing between the “start cycle” signal supplied by the logic
system and the internal enabling to gauge for starting the measuring cycle.

– Operator Guide Two simultaneous diameters 97

9.2.1.1. Measuring head sub-page

Use to move the cursor to (highlight) the box before the head number and press
Enter
.

Measuring head sub-page

Presence of virtual
measuring head

Head Measuring head number (Measurement A ) for the current Set

(part/cycle). Data not significant (underlit) if a virtual head is present.

Display resolution for the current set:

• Metric system :1µm / 0,1 µm / 0,01µm
• Imperial/Inches system: 0.00001” / 0.000001” / 0.0000001”

ABS View Measure visualization modality. Non-significant data (underlit) with

measuring heads not enabled for “Zero shift” (measure in relative value).
DISABLED: measure visualization in relative value, with reference to the measure
“zero”.
Nominal Value: measure visualization in absolute value with reference to the
nominal value.
Field Center: measure visualization in absolute value in the whole measurement
range of the head, with reference to the field center value and without change of
scale.
Example

ABS View= DISABLED ABS View= Nominal Value ABS View= Field Center
(40.0000)

Sensor Selection with the check box OFF …, the current set is combined with
the physical measuring head indicated in “Head”.
With the check box ON :, the current set is associated to a virtual or a logical
measuring head. The virtual head is defined by the sensors S# indicated in "T1

98 Viewing the Measurements A and B Programming – Operator Guide

 Sensor Code" / "T2 Sensor Code", belonging to different physical measuring
heads.
The “Head” data (physical head number) is not significant (underlit).

K Transducer coefficient (with virtual heads only). Value representing a coefficient

of the contribution of each individual sensor to the measurement.

In the different pages a physical head is indicated with a number between 1 and 4 (8
with expansion): the virtual head is indicated with letters X and Y.

Example
Measure B: measurement performed with physical head (2) - sensors T1/T2
Measure A: measurement performed with virtual head (X) – sensors S1/S4

Warnings !!
When checking the retraction of the sensors of a virtual head, if they belong to two
different physical heads, the remaining sensors belonging to the two physical heads
but not used for that virtual head are checked as well.
Example: when a pair of sensors type T1=S1 and T2=S3 is selected, and two sensors
(S1 and S2), are connected to the first little module, it is not possible to control the
retraction of S1 without the one of S2.
In the same way when acquiring (or resetting) the retraction threshold the physical
head is always considered, therefore if S4 and S7 are used in a virtual head also the
retraction thresholds S3 and S8 (if any) are acquired (or reset).

The zero corrections for the part -Part Adj (corrections involving all the cycles that
use the same head and belong to the same part) are not possible with virtual heads
(with physical heads only).

– Operator Guide Two simultaneous diameters 99

9.2.1.2. Viewing Zero Shift
Only with measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”.
Enter
Use to highlight the box beside the “Nominal Value” data and press : access
to a sub-page where there are displayed the type and values programmed for the
zero shift used.

The state of the Check Boxes defines the type of zero shift used in the cycle:

Internally calculated zero shift

The check boxes relevant to the other zero shift
modalities are OFF … (modalities not active).
Zero shift internally calculated based on the
nominal measurement value programmed
(Nominal Value) and the programmed value of
the Range Center.

Programmed zero shift

Set the corresponding check box to ON :.
For each contact of the measuring head it was
defined its own “Zero shift” value that is used
regardless the nominal measurement value
(Nominal Value) programmed.

Static/Dynamic self-learning zero shift

When the “Nominal Value” data is underlit
(invalid data) it means that the (static or dynamic)
zero shift self-learning mode is active.
Selecting this modality allows zero-setting in the
whole Zero Shift range, regardless the nominal
measurement value (Nominal Value)
programmed.

100 Viewing the Measurements A and B Programming – Operator Guide

 Note: the modality “Static/Dynamic self-learning zero shift” is not available in
applications with measure card with DSP (linearization of the measure range /
“Masterless” application).

9.2.1.3. Measurement equation

Indication of how the measurement is determined (the direction and the sign of the
contacts T1 and T2 determine the measurement value).
The following possibilities are available: T1, T2, -T1, -T2, T1+T2, T1-T2, -T1-T2, T2-
T1

9.2.1.4. Measurement Parameters

Controls. The number of control points is set at the configuration
level.
Surface Elaboration. Icon present only if the measurement function
for interrupted surfaces has been enabled.

– Operator Guide Two simultaneous diameters 101

9.2.1.5. Measurement optional functions (Options)
The optional functions are enabled during the application configuration stage; if the
optional function is available the corresponding function key is displayed.
There may be two function keys (F6 and F3) for calling out the optional functions.

Function keys (F6 and F3) for

measurement optional function

If there are more than two optional functions (more function keys necessary) the F6
and F3 key have dynamic management. The “scroll” icon appears within the
key, beside the associated F# key number, to indicate that there are non-displayed
function keys. Highlight the key and use the and keys to scroll the list of the
measurement optional functions (represented by the relevant icons) available. Select
the optional function by pressing the F6 or F3 function key associated to the icon of
that function.

Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the measurement optional

functions present; an optional function is active when the box to the left of the
corresponding function key is full.
Example:

TIR optional function active

102 Viewing the Measurements A and B Programming – Operator Guide

9.2.2. Integral measurement

Manual Mode

Type of Enter

integral
measurement
Parameters of the integral measurement

Automatic Mode

Type of Enter

integral
measurement
Parameters of the integral measurement

Type Type of integral measurement. The following modalities represented by the

icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

Processing of the Average value
Processing of the Rolling average

Parameters Access to the sub-page containing the parameters of the integral

Enter
measurement: press to highlight the check-box and press .

– Operator Guide Two simultaneous diameters 103

9.2.2.1. Parameters of the integral measurement
The sub-page containing the parameters of the integral measurement can also be
called out from the page of “Ovality” measurement, if present (section 9.2.6, page
111) and/or from the page of ”Removal speed control”, if present (section 9.2.7, page
112).
Manual Mode example.

Ovality Measurement Removal speed control

4
Enter

Enter Enter

Parameters of the integral

measurement

4 With “Type of integral measurement” = , the parameters of the integral

measurement concern just the “Ovality” measurement (if present) and/or the
“Removal speed control” (if present). Should these options be not present,
access to the page of the integral measurement parameters is disabled.

Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside. With
the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of the
workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking the
interval between two clock pulses as time.
The data “Meas. RPM” and “Rev. Percentage” are not valid anymore.

Meas. Rpm Number of revolutions/minute of the workpiece for the integral

measurement processing.

Rev. Percentage (1 to 1000%) percentage of the revolution of the part on

which the integral measurement is performed. Default 100% = 1 revolution of the
part.

Estim. Removal Function for estimating the stock removal trend (measurement
trend) up to the end of the cycle (continuous curve processing).
With the check box enabled, successive measurement samples are processed so
as to display a continuous trend of the measurement itself.

104 Viewing the Measurements A and B Programming – Operator Guide

9.2.3. Control points
The gauge is configured with a fixed number of control points, including a zero point.
To change the value or remove a control point see section 9.8 “Changing Control
Points value Meas. A and B (Automatic mode) ” on page 145.

Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) and
the measurement (A or B) to be viewed.
In Automatic mode the Set (Part/Cycle) and the measurement selection is
made by the machine’s logic.

ƒ To view the programmed control points, press F4 or highlight and

Enter
press .

Viewing control points in Manual mode

Viewing control point in Automatic mode

– Operator Guide Two simultaneous diameters 105

9.2.4. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces)
The measurement of interrupted surfaces is electrically damped (filtered) and such a
damping shall be linked both to the type of workpiece and rotation speed. Damping
serves to keep the measurement stable when there are interruptions on the
workpiece.
Upon Programming it is possible to define the features of the measurement
processing for interrupted surfaces.
Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ To access the data relevant to the measurement of interrupted surfaces

Enter
press F5 or highlight and press .

Surface elaboration type Surface elaboration

coefficient
Integral measurement
type

Sub-page of the
algorithm parameters

Viewing data for Interrupted surfaces in Manual mode

Viewing data for Interrupted surfaces in Automatic mode

The validity of the data appearing on the page depend on the “Surface Elaboration
Type ” selected (see the table below):

106 Viewing the Measurements A and B Programming – Operator Guide

 Surface Elaboration Type

Surface elaboration
Fixed at 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes
coefficient
Integral measurement type No No No Yes Yes
Algorithm type No No No Yes Yes
Max. Settling Time No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Estim. Removal No Yes Yes No No

Surface Elaboration Type type of workpiece based on the surface features

(interruptions present or not); it will be used for the execution of the measurement
processing.

Smooth workpiece

Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are simultaneously on the

full section.
Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are NEVER simultaneously
on the full section.
Workpiece with keyway

Inside diameter measurement (also while swinging).

Surface elaboration coefficient Measurement damping filter for interrupted

surfaces. The processing algorithms of the measurement for interrupted surfaces
foresee determined parameters of the filter, selectable with three different pre-
defined coefficients (1, 2, 3).
The higher damping is obtained with “Surface elaboration coefficient” = 3

“Surface Elaboration Type” = or : each one of the three coefficients (1, 2

and 3) is associated with three different damping speeds.

“Surface Elaboration Type” = or : programming the coefficients (1, 2 and 3)

causes the measurement to be held when the contacts are not touching the
workpiece. The measurement is held in different ways for coefficient 1, and for
coefficients 2 and 3 (different “Algorithm type” for measure elaboration).

Algorithm type programmed algorithm type.

THRESHOLD – Sampling memory
Four successive measure samples are elaborated (samples distance: 8 ms):
- If the difference between them is more than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is held.

– Operator Guide Two simultaneous diameters 107

 - If the difference between them is less than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is acquired.
HEAD EXT. SYNC. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside. With
the check box enabled, the measurement processing and the integral
measurement requested are enabled or disabled according to this signal (for
external synchronism ON the measure is performed)
DERIVATE – Derived memory
The measure trailing edge and leading edge are identified. After the leading edge,
a settling time is awaited before acquiring the measure; it can be programmed in
the sub-page of the technical parameters of the algorithm (Latency Time data).
See chapter 9.2.4.1, on page 109.

Integral Measurement Type type of integral measurement for the period of validity
of the measurement itself.
The following modalities represented by the icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

Processing of the Average value

Max. Settling Time Maximum time passing between the moment the start cycle
is given and the moment when the software starts processing the damped
measurement.

Estim. Removal Function for estimating the stock removal trend (measurement
trend) up to the end of the cycle (continuous curve processing).
With the check box enabled, the measurement damping value does not depend
anymore on the “Surface elaboration coefficient” programmed (1, 2 or 3), but is
automatically calculated at each measurement interruption (interruption of the
workpiece).

108 Viewing the Measurements A and B Programming – Operator Guide

9.2.4.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters
The presence and validity of the parameters appearing on this sub-page depend on
the programming of the “Surface Elaboration Type” and “Algorithm type” parameters.

B
C

Algorithm’s technical parameters sub-page (example)

Surface elaboration type

Surface elaboration
No Yes Yes Yes Yes
parameters (A)
Measure Times (B) No No No Yes Yes
Filter parameters (C) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

A Parameters of the surface elaboration algorithm defined upon the application

configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical personnel or Marposs’
personnel).

B Measure times
Latency Time Lapse of time during which the measurement is held to
prevent the instability due to over-elongations in the instant in which the
contacts, exiting the hold time, return onto the workpiece.
Measure Time Measurement acquisition time (minimum lapse of time
during which the contacts touch the workpiece).

C Filter parameters for the surface elaboration algorithm. Parameters defined

upon the application configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical
personnel or Marposs’ personnel).

– Operator Guide Two simultaneous diameters 109

9.2.5. TIR (Total Indicator Reading) (Option)
It allows to determine the eccentricity error of the workpiece to the rotation axis by
using just a contact (T1).
The TIR option can be enabled or disabled upon Programming. The option is enabled
when the small box to the left of the icon is filled in.
Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) and
measurement (A or B) to be viewed.
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) and the measurement selection is
made by the machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to view the TIR measurement
data.

Viewing TIR measurement data in Manual mode

Viewing TIR measurement data in Automatic mode

Tir Control Value beyond which the T.I.R. measurement must be considered
out of tolerance.
Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside. With
the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of the
workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking the
interval between two clock pulses as time.
The datum “Tir Rpm” is not valid anymore.
Tir Rpm Rotation speed of the workpiece during T.I.R. check.
Tir Delay Time delay before taking the T.I.R. measurement.

110 Viewing the Measurements A and B Programming – Operator Guide

9.2.6. Ovality (Option)
Check of workpiece ovality.
Note: The Ovality measurement is NOT valid with Fenar-L measuring heads
(the ovality check does not make sense at all).
The Ovality option can be enabled or disabled upon Programming. The option is
enabled when the small box to the left of the icon is filled in.
Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) and
measurement (A or B) to be viewed.
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) and the measurement selection is
made by the machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to view the ovality

measurement data.

Parameters of the integral

measurement
Viewing the ovality measurement data in Manual mode

Parameters of the integral

measurement
Viewing the ovality measurement data in Automatic mode

Ovality Control Value beyond which the ovality measurement must be considered
out of tolerance.

Parameters Access to the sub-page containing the parameters of the integral

Enter
measurement: press .
See the meaning of the parameters on chapter 9.2.2.1 "Parameters of the integral
measurement”, page 104.

– Operator Guide Two simultaneous diameters 111

9.2.7. Stock Removal Speed (Adaptive Cycle) (Option)
It monitors the stock removal rate of the workpiece. When the rate falls above or
below the control limits a signal is sent to the machine’s logic system.
The Remspeed option can be enabled or disabled upon Programming. The option is
enabled when the small box to the left of the icon is filled in.
Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) and
measurement (A or B) to be viewed.
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) and the measurement selection is
made by the machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to view the stock removal
speed control (Adaptive Cycle) data.

Parameters of the integral

measurement
Viewing data in Manual mode

Parameters of the integral

measurement
Viewing data in Automatic mode
Remspeed Control 1 lower programmed control.
Remspeed Control 2 upper programmed control.
The gauge gives the machine’s logic information about stock removal in time (µm/s)
through the status (ON/OFF) of Remspeed 1 and Remspeed 2 controls.

Remspeed Cont.1 Remspeed Cont. 2

OFF OFF Excessive removal
ON OFF Removal OK
ON ON Insufficient removal

112 Viewing the Measurements A and B Programming – Operator Guide

 Parameters Access to the sub-page containing the parameters of the integral
Enter
measurement: press .
See the meaning of the parameters on chapter 9.2.2.1 "Parameters of the integral
measurement”, page 104.

– Operator Guide Two simultaneous diameters 113

9.2.8. Stock Removal (Option)
It allows to carry out machining cycles in which a predetermined quantity of stock is
removed instead of reaching the zero value.
The “Stock removal” option is enabled or disabled upon Programming, and its type
(ABSOLUTE or PERCENTAGE) is defined. The option is active if the box to the left of
the icon is full.
Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle). (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to view the stock removal data.

Viewing data in Manual mode

Viewing data in Automatic mode

Stock Removal Amount amount of stock to be removed.

Stock Removal Percentage percentage of stock to be removed

Note: Stock removal with input from outside (BCD, Binary or Field Bus). The value
displayed (stock value or percentage) represents the last value received. The stock
value is received in Automatic mode, before the cycle, and concerns the selected set.

114 Viewing the Measurements A and B Programming – Operator Guide

9.2.9. Pulsed Feed Back (measurement correction) (option)
We call Pulsed Feedback the measurement correction through “zero” shift determined
by pulses supplied through external logic unit.
Such a shift may be both positive and negative based on the type of pulse.
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the “Pulsed Feedback” option and
define its characteristics. The option is enabled when the small box to the left of the
icon is filled in.

Note: In manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the
pulsed Feedback data.

Viewing pulsed Feedback data in Manual mode

Viewing pulsed Feedback data in Automatic mode

Pulse Weight minimum correction value (0 to 50 µm) performed at each pulse.

– Operator Guide Two simultaneous diameters 115

9.2.10. BCD Feed Back (measurement correction) (option)
Correction of the In-Process measurement based on a determined Post-Process
measurement performed with Marposs gauge. The communication between the two
applications takes place through BCD/Binary interface.
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the “BCD Feedback” option and
define its characteristics. The option is enabled when the small box to the left of the
icon is filled in.

Note: In manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the BCD
Feedback data.

Viewing BCD Feedback data in Manual mode

Viewing BCD Feedback data in Automatic mode

Corr. Code request code associated with the measurement you want to correct
(combination of Post-Process measurement and the current In-Process
measurement).

Interface number identification number of the BCD or Binary interface from which
the correction value comes. The maximum number of BCD/Binary interfaces is
fixed to four (IF#1 – IF#4).

116 Viewing the Measurements A and B Programming – Operator Guide

9.2.11. Direct coupling - Dirac (Option)
The Dirac application consists in the execution of the In-Process measurement of a
workpiece (typically an outside diameter) directly coupled with the Pre-Process
measurement of another workpiece (typically an inside diameter – hole).
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the “Dirac” option and define its
characteristics. The option is enabled when the small box to the left of the icon is filled
in.

Note: In manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the Dirac
application data.

Viewing Dirac application data in Manual mode

Viewing Dirac application data in Automatic mode

Correction Source the type of source of the correction values for the Dirac
function may be:

INTERNAL the correction comes from a set of the Post-Process type of the
same In-Process measurement CPU card that must carry out the
Dirac application.

EXTERNAL the correction comes from a Post-Process measurement processed

– Operator Guide Two simultaneous diameters 117

 in a measurement CPU card other than the one that handles the In-
Process cycle (Post-Process measurement CPU card belonging to
a different equipment).

Correction Code request code associated with the measurement on which you want
to carry out the Dirac-type correction.
With INTERNAL-type "Correction source": the "Correction code" of the set of the
In-Process type that must carry out the Dirac correction shall be the same of the
associated set of the Post-Process type that determines the correction value.
With EXTERNAL-type "Correction source": the In-Process set that shall perform
the Dirac correction based on the measurement performed on a Post-Process
control plan shall have the same "Correction Code" number of the Post-Process
measurement associated.

Correction Sign selection of sign (+ or -) for the Dirac correction.

+ sign (default): standard Dirac application (Post-Process measurement Æ inside
diameter / In-Process measurement Æ outside diameter)
- sign: special Dirac application (the sign of the correction is inverted).
Example: Post-Process measurement Æ outside diameter / In-Process
measurement Æ inside diameter.

Interface Numberidentification number of the BCD or Binary interface from which the
Dirac correction comes (with EXTERNAL-type "Correction source" only). The
maximum number of BCD/Binary interfaces is fixed to four (IF#1 – IF#4).
The In-Process set that shall perform the Dirac correction based on the
measurement performed on a Post-Process control plan shall have the same
"Interface Number" of the Post-Process measurement associated.

One correction at a cycle Dirac correction used either only once (for just one
cycle) or more times (for more cycles)
: Dirac correction used for an In-Process cycle only
… Dirac correction used for more In-Process cycles

118 Viewing the Measurements A and B Programming – Operator Guide

9.2.12. PP/IP coupling (Option)
Association of an In-Process diameter measurement with one or more Pre/Post-
Process measurements among the following ones:
ƒ T.I.R. cycle
ƒ Simple or double Post-Process diameter cycle
ƒ Passive centering cycle
ƒ Passive positioning cycle
The association between sets is obtained by setting the same coupling code (1 to 31,
necessarily different from 0) in all the sets to be associated.

Note: for the T.I.R. measurement it is not necessary to program a specific coupling
code since it is obtained as a cycle of the same set of the In-Process measurement
(see section 9.2.5 on page 110).

During the execution of the cycle in automatic operating mode this function makes it
possible to monitor the value of the Pre/Post-Process measurements associated to it.
The value of the associated measurements will be visible, in automatic operating
mode, in a single display page (see section 9.3.2.1, page 124).

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to view the page of data.

Viewing data in Manual mode

Viewing data in Automatic mode

Coupling Code code of association between the sets (1 to 31). Code “0” indicates
no association.

– Operator Guide Two simultaneous diameters 119

9.3. Viewing Measurements A and B

The View Measure Bargraph page is where To reach this page:

the size of the workpiece can be monitored
¾ Select Automatic or Manual
during the grinding cycle in both Manual and
mode then choose one:
Automatic modes.
¾ Press
Typically, the View Measure Bargraph page
is defined as the Home page (default ¾ Press then
screen), see section 4.2.3 “Defining the ¾ Refer to Menu maps on pages
HOME key” on page 32. 92 and 94.

“ABS View” data valid: based on its programming (measuring head sub-page
- section 9.2.1.1, page 98) the measure visualization (numerical and
graphical) may be:
i • in relative value, with reference to the measure “zero”
• in absolute value, with reference to the programmed nominal value
• in absolute value in the whole measurement range of the head, with
reference to the field center value and without change of scale.

9.3.1. Viewing the Measurement in Manual Mode

Select the corresponding Part/Cycle (see section 6.1 on page 34).
Meas. selection field
Current measurement

Electrical Zeroing
Numerical and gra- button (2)
phical representation of
the selected measuring
head (1) Numerical value of
measurement
Retraction
status
Bargraph of
measurement
Selected Part
Type/Cycle

(1) A physical head is indicated with a number between 1 and 4 (8 with expansion): a
virtual or a logical head is indicated with the letters X and Y.

(2) Not present if the “Multiple electric zeroing” function (section 9.5.3.2 on page 134)
is enabled.

120 Viewing Measurements A and B – Operator Guide

 To pass from viewing of Measurement A to Measurement B, and the contrary, act as
follows:
Enter
1. Press to access the page.

2. Press to highlight the “Measurement selection” field.

3. Press or to pass from Measurement A to Measurement B or the

contrary.

Measurement
selection field

or

Note: The electric zero-setting from this page through the zeroing button
(see chapter 9.5.3 “Electrical Zeroing ” on page 131), is possible only
with mechanically zeroed measuring head (see chapter 9.5.2 “Mechanical
Zeroing ” on page 128).

– Operator Guide Two simultaneous diameters 121

 9.3.2. Viewing the Measurement in Automatic mode

Note: In Automatic mode the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the machine’s
logic.

Numerical and graphic Numerical and graphic

representation of representation of
Measurement A Measurement B

Current Part/Cycle

Press to view measurements A and B individually and in sequence.

Bargraph of Numerical value of

measurement measurement

Numerical and gra-

phical representation of
the selected measuring
head (1)

Measurement A Measurement B
Status of commands: highlighted box =
command triggered
Nominal value of the measurement (2)

Measurement zeroing status

(red) not zeroed
(green) zeroed

(1) A physical head is indicated with a number between 1 and 4 (8 with expansion): a
virtual or a logical head is indicated with the letters X and Y.
(2) Not displayed with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning modality”
enabled.

122 Viewing Measurements A and B – Operator Guide

 If optional functions (TIR, Ovality, Remspeed, etc.) are present on one or both
measurements, they can be viewed in sequence by means of key or .

The display sequence is as follows:

Measurement A « Meas. A Options« Measurement B « Meas. B Options
Hereafter there are the Measurement A options view pages as an example.

Bargraph of measurement
Numerical value of
measurement
TIR
Control point status:
under limit
over limit
Bargraph of measurement
Numerical value of
measurement
Ovality
Control point status:
under limit
over limit
Note: The Ovality measurement is NOT valid with Fenar-L measuring heads
(the ovality check does not make sense at all).
Bargraph of stock removal
rate
Numerical value of
Remspeed measurement
Control point status:
under limit
over limit

– Operator Guide Two simultaneous diameters 123

9.3.2.1. Viewing of associated measurements (Option)
If the “PP/IP coupling” function is enabled it is possible to view a further page showing
the values of the measurements associated to the current measurement.

“PP/IP coupling” enabled Viewing of associated measurements

The measurements displayed refer to the last corresponding cycle performed.
When exiting the automatic mode the measurements associated to the current set are
reset.
The measurements corresponding to non existent sets or not associated to the
current set are displayed with -----------.

124 Viewing Measurements A and B – Operator Guide

9.4. Viewing the Zeroing values of Measurements A and B

The Zero Summary page contains To reach this page:

information about the various zeroing
¾ Select Manual or Automatic
functions of the gauge system and can be
mode then choose one:
viewed in either Manual or Automatic
mode. ¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to Menu maps on pages
92 and 94.
Measurement
selection field

Viewing zeroing values in Manual and Automatic Modes

Note: this page shows only the zeroing values for the functions active in the current
application.

Zeroing Value Sum of the accumulated zeroing values from electrically zeroing
the gauge system.
Note: if the modality “Static/Dynamic self-learning zero shift” (see paragraph
9.2.1.2, page 100) is active, the “Zeroing Value” is not significant
anymore, and is replaced by the following symbols:

(red): system not zeroed

(green): zero-setting performed (system zeroed).

Master Deviation Value programmed to indicate the difference between the size of
the sample part and the final size you want to obtain.

Zero Adjust Sum of the zero corrections given through keyboard during the part
machining.

Dirac correction value of the Dirac correction (it appears if the "Direct
coupling/Dirac" option is enabled). The Dirac correction value is reset for all the
sets provided with the Dirac option in the following cases:
at the electronic unit power on
• in the Automatic/Manual switching
• during zero-setting or zero-setting reset

– Operator Guide Two simultaneous diameters 125

 Measure Feedback Measure correction value (it appears if the "Feed Back –
measure correction" option is enabled). The measure Feedback value is reset
whenever the zero-setting is reset.

9.4.1. Viewing the Zeroing values in Manual mode

Select the Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).

9.4.2. Viewing the Zeroing values in Automatic mode

Note: In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the

machine’s logic.

126 Viewing the Zeroing values of Measurements A and B – Operator Guide

9.5. Zeroing Measurements A and B
9.5.1. Introduction
Zeroing is the process of setting up and adjusting the gauge and a measuring head to
a master workpiece to assure that post-process inspection of the workpiece yields the
desired final dimensions.
Types of Zeroing:
Mechanical Zeroing – physically adjusts the fingers/contacts so that they are within
the foreseen measurement range (see section 9.5.2 on page 128).
Electrical Zeroing – adjustment operation to be performed periodically to obtain the
maximum accuracy and reliability of measurements on the workpiece (see section
9.5.3 on page 131).
• Electric zero-setting shared by the sets – operation to be performed in case
of “Masterless” application (linearization of the measurement range). See
section 9.5.3.1 on page 133.
• Multiple Electrical Zeroing – this functional feature is present if it was enabled
upon the configuration stage of the application (see section 9.5.3.2, on page
134).
Zero Adjustments – Corrections made when after a post-process inspection of the
workpieces small differences in size are found (see section 9.6 on page 136).
Zero Resets – removes the offsets generated by the system during the last electrical
zeroing (see section 9.7 on page 144).
Zeroing Conditions
Static – The master workpiece is NOT rotating.
Dynamic – The master workpiece is rotating and wet by the coolant.

When to zero the gauge system?

TYPE OF ZEROING CONDITIONS
Mechanical Zeroing
followed by At initial setup
Electrical Zeroing
At grinder start up
Electrical Zeroing At the beginning of each work shift
After changing Part Type
Zero Adjust When the workpiece size changes
When the zeroing range of the measuring head
Zero Reset has been exceeded.
followed by After replacement of any measuring head
Mechanical Zeroing & component (head, contacts, fingers, etc.)
Electrical Zeroing After any mechanical changes are made to the
gauge system.

– Operator Guide Two simultaneous diameters 127

9.5.2. Mechanical Zeroing
Mechanical zeroing MUST be done to a master workpiece:
ƒ At initial set up of the gauge system.
ƒ If the allowed zero adjustment range has been exceeded.
ƒ After any mechanical or electrical changes to the gauge system (fingers, contacts,
...).
Mechanical zeroing must be performed only in Manual mode and statically.
Note: Each measuring head that has been defined MUST be Mechanically
Zeroed.

Mechanical Zeroing of a measuring head:

1. Gauge in Manual Mode.
2. Select the Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) relevant to the head to
be zeroed.
3. Eliminate any zeroing offsets:

- press then ;
Enter
- press F5 or highlight the Zero Reset button and press .

- a question box appears asking to Reset: press to highlight “Yes” and press
Enter
.
Note:Zero reset is performed both for Measurement A and Measurement B.

4. Press then to highlight the Mechanical Zeroing page icon.

The mechanical zeroing page relevant to Measurement A is viewed.

128 Zeroing Measurements A and B – Operator Guide

 Indication of measurement

Numerical and graphic

view of measurement
value of the second
Numerical and graphic
transducer:
view of measurement
-T2: physical head
value of the first
-S#: virtual head
transducer:
-T1: physical head
-S#: virtual head
Numerical and graphic
representation of current
measuring head (1)

(1) A physical head is indicated with a number between 1 and 4 (8 with

expansion): a virtual or a logical head is indicated with the letters X and Y.
5. Place the master workpiece into the machine.
6. Adjust the finger/contact assemblies of the measuring head 1 so they can be
inserted into gauging position safely.
The adjustment mode of the finger/contact assemblies depends on the
adjustment method used (with adjustable guides or with contacts).
(pls. see Chapter 22 “Measuring head Mechanical zero-setting” on page 535).

Finger/contact assembly – T1
Cable

Measuring Contacts
head support Measuring DO NOT
head touch
master

Slide adapter
Finger/contact assembly – T2
Slide

7. Bring the measuring head to gauging position.

8. Adjust the upper finger/contact assembly (T1) making the contact touch the
master until the measurement value on the upper digital display of the
Mechanical Zeroing page is next to zero (± 10 µ).

– Operator Guide Two simultaneous diameters 129

 Measurement value
next to zero.

9. Adjust the lower finger/contact assembly (T2) making the contact touch the
master until the measurement value on the upper digital display of the
Mechanical Zeroing page is next to zero (± 10 µ).

Measurement value
next to zero.

This completes the mechanical setup of Measurement A; now perform the

mechanical setup of Measurement B.
Enter
ƒ Press to highlight the “Measurement selection” field.

ƒ Press or to pass from Measurement A to Measurement B.

Measurement
selection field

Repeat the operations described for measuring head-Measurement A, from step 6 to

step 9, for measuring head– Measurement B.

This completes the mechanical setup of measuring heads; now perform an Electric
Zeroing (see section 9.5.3 on page 131).

130 Zeroing Measurements A and B – Operator Guide

9.5.3. Electrical Zeroing
Electrical Zeroing MUST be done:
ƒ In manual mode on a master workpiece.
ƒ Dynamically, i.e. with the master workpiece rotating and wet by coolant.
ƒ Regularly, usually at the beginning of each work shift and/or when the grinding
wheel is switched on.
Note: Each measuring head that has been defined MUST be electrically zeroed
for each work cycle in which it is used.
It is possible to zero-set either each individual measurement separately or
both of them simultaneously

Electrical Zeroing Procedure:

1. Gauge in manual mode.
2. Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
3. Position the master workpiece in machine (master workpiece rotating and wet by
coolant).
4. Bring the measuring head(s) to measurement position

5. Bring up the electric zeroing page: press and then . Measurement A is

displayed.
Press or with the “Measurement selection” field highlighted to switch
from Measure A to Measure B and back.
Zeroing value (1)

Electric zeroing
button
Master deviation
Nominal value of the Measurement value
measurement (2)

Measurement selection field

Current measurement

(2) Not displayed with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning modality”
enabled.

Enter
6. Press F4 or use to highlight the key and press .

– Operator Guide Two simultaneous diameters 131

 Cancel Cancels the electric zero-setting procedure

Ø Ø Electric zero-setting of both measures (A and B)

Ø Electric zero-setting of one measure only (current measurement

brought up in the measure selection field).

Enter
7. Select the desired option and press .

One measure only or both measurements have been electrically zero-set.

If no error messages are displayed the electric zero-setting procedure has been
correctly performed.
The Gauge can be switched to Automatic operating mode.

Note: Electric zero-setting with integral measurement.

Once completed the electric zero-setting procedure the measurement is
still displayed (graphic and numerical display) dynamically (viewing of the
measurement variation during the part rotation).

(1)Note: if the modality “Static/Dynamic self-learning zero shift” (see paragraph

9.2.1.2, page 100) is active, the “Zeroing Value” is not significant
anymore, and is replaced by the following symbols:

(red): system not zeroed

(green): zero-setting performed (system zeroed).

132 Zeroing Measurements A and B – Operator Guide

9.5.3.1. Shared Electric zero-setting (“Masterless” function)
In case of application with “Masterless” function (linearization of the measurement
range / measurement card with DSP-Digital Signal Processing), carry out a
simultaneous zero-setting of all the sets that use the selected measuring head
(shared electric zero-setting).

Measuring head in use

Mechanical Zeroing
Page Measurement value
of the first contact

Measurement value of 1
the second contact
Measurement selection field

1 Data present only with measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”.

Execution of electric zero-setting shared by the sets

Aborts the electric zero-setting shared by the sets

Zero-setting procedure
• Position the measuring heads (contacts T1 / T2) and fasten them onto the special
mechanical support, in the most suitable range based on the available sample
workpiece.
• Bring the measuring heads to measuring position on the sample workpiece.

• Press or with the “Measurement selection” field highlighted to switch

from Measure A to Measure B and back.

• Press the key to carry out zero-setting. In this way all the sets that use the
measuring head are perfectly zeroed (shared zero-setting).

Note: if a new set is defined, combined with this measuring head, it is necessary
to repeat the zero-setting procedure.

– Operator Guide Two simultaneous diameters 133

9.5.3.2. Multiple Electrical Zeroing (Option)
This functional feature is present if it was enabled upon the configuration stage of the
application.
This functional feature allows using up to 32 different zeroing indexes for each set;
this means that it is possible to zero-set on different masters without having to change
the set (all the other programming data being equal). Afterwards it is possible to work
with the corresponding parts by calling out the different zeroing indexes.

Measurement zeroing status

Zeroing index no. (red) not zeroed
(1 to 32)
(green) zeroed

Electric zeroing button

Measurement nominal
value (1)

(1) Not displayed with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning” modality
enabled.

To select the index no. act as follows:

ƒ use to move the cursor to the index number, or to view the desired
Enter
value, then press to confirm.

This functional feature is optimized for the use with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic)
self-learning” modality (see section 9.2.1.2, page 100), but can also be used if such a
modality has not been enabled
“Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning” modality, enabled
After the execution of the mechanical zeroing it is possible, by exploiting the different
zeroing indexes (1 to 32), to carry out an electric zeroing on masters that do not differ
more than the maximum zeroing range without changing the measurement nominal
value (maximum zeroing range: maximum value of the zero shift range +
programmed value of the head zero range).
Changing the measurement nominal value does not cause a reset of the current
zeroing index.

“Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning” modality NOT enabled

After the execution of an electric zeroing with a determined index, if you want to zero-
set with another index it is necessary to:
• change the zeroing index
• change the measurement nominal value

134 Zeroing Measurements A and B – Operator Guide

 • zero-set.
This procedure is necessary because changing the nominal value causes a reset of
the current zeroing index.
If you change the Field Center value, the current zeroing index is always reset, unlike
the other indexes.
The zero adjust that was set remains valid until you switch between the zeroed
indexes, while it is reset when switching to a index that was not zeroed.

– Operator Guide Two simultaneous diameters 135

9.6. Zero Adjustments for Measurements A and B (Option)

Zero adjustments are made when a post- To reach this page:

process inspection of the workpiece shows
¾ Select Manual or Automatic
an incorrect size.
mode then choose one:

¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to the Menu maps on
pages 92 and 94.

Example:
The workpiece is undersize: enter a zero adjustment with the same value but with
opposite sign.
APPLICATION PART TOO SMALL Part too big
OUTSIDE diameter Add Subtract
INSIDE diameter Subtract Add
This can be done in either Manual or Automatic mode.

There are identical and independent pages for zero adjustment programming for
Measurement A and for Measurement B:
Measurement selection field
Current measurement

Measurement A Measurement B
To select Measurement A or Measurement B:

1. Press to reach the page.

2. Use to highlight the “Measurement selection” field .

3. Press or to select Measurement A or Measurement B.

For simplicity we will always refer to the page relevant to Measurement A from here
on.

136 Zero Adjustments for Measurements A and B (Option) – Operator Guide

9.6.1. Zero Adjustment in Manual mode

Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) and press .
Note: Zero adjustments in manual mode affect the next cycle.

Bargraph of sum of zero

adjustments

Part drawing Sum of zero

adjustments

Single/double zero Bargraph and numerical

adjustment display of measurement
value

Value of zero adjustment

value entered

Zero Adjustment Reset key

Changing Zero Adjustment value

1. Press to highlight the field

2. Press or to increase or decrease the value

3. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form (summation of zero adjustments).

Single/double zero adjustment

Possibility of inserting a zero adjustment value either for the single measurement or
for both measurements simultaneously.

– Operator Guide Two simultaneous diameters 137

 To select the desired mode, press the F2 key or highlight the key and press
until the corresponding icon is selected.
The selected icon (key) indicates:

Zero adjustment on the single measurement A or B selected

Zero adjustment on both measurements simultaneously

Resetting Zero Adjustments

Enter
1. Press F5 or highlight and press . A “Reset?” question box will appear.

Zero
adjustments reset

Enter
2. Press to highlight “Yes” and press . The zero adjustments are reset
for both measurements.

138 Zero Adjustments for Measurements A and B (Option) – Operator Guide

9.6.2. Zero Adjustments in automatic mode

Note: Zero adjustments in automatic mode are made while grinding and affect
the current cycle.

9.6.2.1. Zero adjustment for the current Set (part/cycle)

Bargraph of sum of zero

adjustments

Part drawing Sum of zero adjustments

Single/double zero Bargraph and numerical

adjustment display of measurement
value

Zero adjustment
value entered

Changing the zero adjustment value

1. Press to reach the page

2. Press to highlight the field

3. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

4. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form (summation of zero adjustments for the
cycle).

Single/double zero adjustment

Possibility of inserting a zero adjustment value either for the single measurement or
for both measurements simultaneously.

– Operator Guide Two simultaneous diameters 139

 To select the desired mode, press the F2 key or highlight the key and press
until the corresponding icon is selected.
The selected icon (key) indicates:

Zero adjustment on the single measurement A or B selected

Zero adjustment on both measurements simultaneously

9.6.2.2. Zero adjustment with Set (Part/Cycle) selection

Bargraph of Σ value for the

selected cycle
Sum of zero adjustments
for the selected cycle
Part drawing

Sum of zero adjustments

for the selected Part

Zero adjustment value

entered for the selected cycle Number of selected Part

Zero adjustment value entered

for the selected Part

The zero adjustments entered for the selected Part concern all the cycles using the
same head and belong to the same part. The common correction value is subtracted
in the same way following an electric zero-setting.

140 Zero Adjustments for Measurements A and B (Option) – Operator Guide

 Selecting the Set (Part/Cycle)

1. Holding down press to highlight the Part/Cycle selection box below.

Current Part Type

Part Number Cycle Number

2. Press or to view the selected Part/Cycle, otherwise press or to

change the Cycle number and or to change the Part number.

3. Press to confirm the Part/Cycle selection made. The program automatically

exits the selection box and returns to the page.

Changing the zero adjustment value for the cycle

1. Press to reach the page

2. Press to highlight the field

3. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

4. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments for the cycle).

5. Press .

Changing the zero adjustment value for the part

1. Press to reach the page

2. Press to highlight the field

– Operator Guide Two simultaneous diameters 141

 3. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

4. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments for the part).

5. Press .

142 Zero Adjustments for Measurements A and B (Option) – Operator Guide

9.6.2.3. Hardware modification of the zero correction (Option)
Functional feature present if it was enabled upon the application configuration stage.
The hardware modification of the zero correction is not admitted:
ƒ in automatic with active cycle
ƒ with non zeroed measurement
ƒ if the “(Static or dynamic) zero shift self-learning” mode (see section 9.2.1.2 on
page 100) is not enabled,

Enter
Function active with the corresponding check-box ON (:).Press to change its
state (:function active / … function not active).

Programming of a zero correction value for single transducer that is added to the zero
correction calculated by a previous zero-setting.

Zero correction for T1 Zero correction for T2

Indication of the
measurement zeroing state:
green = zeroed
red = not zeroed

Act as follows for programming:

ƒ highlight the involved field with , press or to view the desired value,
Enter
and then press to confirm.

– Operator Guide Two simultaneous diameters 143

9.7. Zero Reset for Measurements A and B

This function removes all offsets To reach this page:

generated by the system during the
¾ Select Manual mode, then choose
last electrical zeroing (the
one:
transducers value is shown).
¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to the Menu map on page 94.

It can be selected only in manual mode:

ƒ After mechanical changes to the gauge system.
ƒ When the maximum Zero Adjustment value available has been reached.
Electric Zeroing Reset Procedure:

Note: The reset procedure acts on both measurements, indipendent of

measurement displayed (A or B).
1. Select Part/Cycle (see section 6.1 on page 34).
Enter
2. Press F5 or highlight and press . A “Reset?” question box will appear.

Enter
3. Press to highlight “Yes” and press .

4. Press and to highlight the Mechanical Zeroing page icon.

Mechanical
Zeroing page

The gauge system MUST NOW be Mechanically then Electrically Zeroed (see pages
128 and 131).

144 Zero Reset for Measurements A and B – Operator Guide

9.8. Changing Control Points value Meas. A and B (Automatic
mode)
During the grinding process, it may be necessary to modify the control points value to
reach the optimum cycle.
Note: In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

Note: Changes made to the Control Points affect the current cycle.

To reach this page:

¾ Select Automatic mode, then choose one:

¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to the Menu map on page 92.

Press + to select /Measurement A or / Measurement B.

Enter
1. Press to highlight the control point to be changed and press .

2. Press to highlight the digit that needs changing.

3. Press or to increase or decrease the digit.

4. If more than one digit needs changing, press to highlight the next digit, then
press or to increase or decrease the digit
Enter
5. Press ,
Enter
6. Press to highlight “Apply to measure” and press .

Control point
to be changed

Apply to measure
button

7. The control point value has been changed.

– Operator Guide Two simultaneous diameters 145

146 Changing Control Points value Meas. A and B (Automatic mode) – Operator Guide
10. TWO-DIAMETERS & TAPER
This section covers the measurement application TWO DIAMETERS & TAPER and its
configured options.
In this application two measuring heads are used to perform two different
measurements simultaneously (Measurement A & Measurement B) on a part.
The taper measurement is calculated as difference between Measurement A and
Measurement B:
Taper = (Measurement A) – (Measurement B)

Note: Anyway the measuring application TWO DIAMETERS & TAPER can also be
used as SINGLE DIAMETER (Measurement A) measuring cycle.
This measuring cycle can be combined with Parts/Cycles as long as they match the
machine’s logic programming.

Note: In the rest of the chapter the screen pages relevant to Measurement A will
be reported as an example; the pages relevant to Measurement B are
identical.

10.1. Menu Maps

Operator tasks are performed in both Automatic and Manual modes. Only the menu
map folders with operator functions -Viewing, General Adjustments and Utilities -
are shown on the following pages.

– Operator Guide Two-Diameters & Taper 147

10.1.1. Automatic Mode - Two diameters & Taper Menu Map
Viewings General adjustments
FOLDERS
SUB-FOLDERS

View measure View zeroings View programming Zero adjustment Modify control
(Option) points
PAGES

View measure Zero values Program. values Zero adjustment Modify control
Section 10.3.2 Section 0 (Option) points
+ Æ
Section 10.6.2 Section 10.8
+ Æ
+ Æ
Section 10.2
Use to view

Measure A Measure B
Options Options

Meas.A Meas.B Taper

F5 – Surface
F4 - Control elaboration (only if the
points measuring function for
(Section . 10.2.4) interrupted surfaces is
enabled). (Section 10.2.5)

Options (measure A/measure B) (See the following page ….)

148 Menu Maps – Operator Guide

 Options(measure A/measure B)
Automatic Mode

The optional functions are enabled during the application configuration stage; if the
optional function is not available the corresponding icon function key is not displayed.
There may be two function keys (F6 and F3) for calling out the optional functions (see
section 10.2.1.5)

TIR Ovality
(Section 10.2.6) (Section 10.2.7)

Remspeed cycle
Stock Removal
(Adaptive Cycle)
(Section 10.2.9)
(Section 10.2.8)

Pulsed Feedback BCD Feedback

(measurement (measurement
correction). correction).
Section 10.2.10 Section 10.2.11

Direct coupling-
PP/IP coupling –
Dirac.
Section 10.2.13
Section 10.2.12

Getting around the program

Enter
moves down to the next level.

moves up one level.

moves between folders, sub-folders or pages on the same level..

– Operator Guide Two-Diameters & Taper 149

10.1.2. Manual Mode - Two diameters & Taper Menu Map
Utility
FOLDERS

Measure zeroing Measure setup View

SUB-FOLDERS
PAGES

Meas. A Meas. A Meas. A Meas. A Meas. A Meas. A Meas. A

Meas. B Meas. B Meas. B Meas. B Meas. B Meas. B Meas. B

Mechanical Electrical Zero View measure Surface type View
zeroing zeroing adjustments Sec. 10.3.1 setup (1) Zeroings
Sec. 10.5.2 Sec. 10.5.3 (Option) Sez. 0
Sec. 10.6.1
Taper
View
(1) This page is not seen if the Programming
surface is smooth Sec. 10.2.3

F4 - Control F5 – Surface elaboration

points (only if the measuring function for
(Section . 10.2.4) interrupted surfaces is enabled ).
Section 10.2.5

Options (measure A/measure B) (See the following page ….)

150 Menu Maps – Operator Guide

 Options(measure A/measure B)
Manual Mode

The optional functions are enabled during the application configuration stage; if the
optional function is not available the corresponding icon function key is not displayed.
There may be two function keys (F6 and F3) for calling out the optional functions (see
section 10.2.1.5)

TIR Ovality
(Section 10.2.6) (Section 10.2.7)

Remspeed cycle
Stock Removal
(Adaptive Cycle)
(Section 10.2.9)
(Section 10.2.8)

Pulsed Feedback BCD Feedback

(measurement (measurement
correction). correction).
Section 10.2.10 Section 10.2.11

Direct coupling-
PP/IP coupling –
Dirac.
Section 10.2.13
Section 10.2.12

Getting around the program

Enter
moves down to the next level.

moves up one level.

moves between folders, sub-folders or pages on the same level..

– Operator Guide Two-Diameters & Taper 151

10.2. Viewing the Measurements A, B and Taper Programming

All the programmed values can be viewed in To reach this page:

either Automatic or Manual mode on the
¾ Select Manual or Automatic
”View Programming” page.
mode
Additional pages can be viewed by using the
¾ Refer to the Menu maps on
F3-F6 function keys or highlighting an option
pages 148 and 150
Enter
and pressing .

There are two identical and independent programming pages for measurements A
and B (only the icon of the page that identifies the measurement type is different), and
a page for Taper measurement:

Measurement A (Diameter 1)
Measurement B (Dameter 2)
Taper masurement
For simplicity, from here on we will refer to the page relevant to Measurement A for
both measurements A and B.
Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) and
the measurement (A, B or Taper) to be viewed.
In Automatic mode the Set (Part/Cycle) and the measurement selection is
made by the machine’s logic.

Viewing Programming page in Manual mode

Press to view Measurement A , Measurement B or Taper

Measurement individually and in sequence.
Option

Measurement A Measurement B Taper measurement Taper measurement

control points area controls
(Option)

The data viewed concern the selected Part/Cycle.

152 Viewing the Measurements A, B and Taper Programming – Operator Guide

 Viewing Programming page in Automatic mode

Press + to view Measurement A , Measurement B or Taper

Measurement individually and in sequence.

Option

Measurement A Measurement B Taper measurement Taper measurement

control points area controls
(Option)

The data viewed concern the selected Part/Cycle.

10.2.1. Measurement data

Zero shift data (only with

measuring heads Measuring head sub-page
enabled for “zero shift”)

Measurement equation

Head Number of measuring head (Measurement A ) for the current Set

(part/cycle).

Nominal value Nominal value of measurement (data valid only with measuring
heads enabled for “zero shift”).
Data not valid if the modality “ Static/Dynamic self-learning zero shift” is active (see
chapter 10.2.1.2 “Viewing Zero Shift“ on page 156).

Delay Time passing between the “start cycle” signal supplied by the logic
system and the internal enabling to gauge for starting the measuring cycle.

– Operator Guide Two-Diameters & Taper 153

10.2.1.1. Measuring head sub-page

Use to move the cursor to (highlight) the box before the head number and press
Enter
.

Measuring head sub-page

Presence of virtual
measuring head

Head Measuring head number (Measurement A ) for the current Set

(part/cycle). Data not significant (underlit) if a virtual head is present.

Display resolution for the current set:

• Metric system :1µm / 0,1 µm / 0,01µm
• Imperial/Inches system: 0.00001” / 0.000001” / 0.0000001”

ABS View Measure visualization modality. Non-significant data (underlit) with

measuring heads not enabled for “Zero shift” (measure in relative value).
DISABLED: measure visualization in relative value, with reference to the measure
“zero”.
Nominal Value: measure visualization in absolute value with reference to the
nominal value.
Field Center: measure visualization in absolute value in the whole measurement
range of the head, with reference to the field center value and without change of
scale.
Example

ABS View= DISABLED ABS View= Nominal Value ABS View= Field Center
(40.0000)

Sensor Selection with the check box OFF …, the current set is combined with
the physical measuring head indicated in “Head”.
With the check box ON :, the current set is associated to a virtual or a logical
measuring head. The virtual head is defined by the sensors S# indicated in "T1

154 Viewing the Measurements A, B and Taper Programming – Operator Guide

 Sensor Code" / "T2 Sensor Code", belonging to different physical measuring
heads.
The “Head” data (physical head number) is not significant (underlit).

K Transducer coefficient (with virtual heads only). Value representing a coefficient

of the contribution of each individual sensor to the measurement.

In the different pages a physical head is indicated with a number between 1 and 4 (8
with expansion): the virtual head is indicated with letters X and Y.

Example
Measure B: measurement performed with physical head (2) - sensors T1/T2
Measure A: measurement performed with virtual head (X) – sensors S1/S4

Warnings !!
When checking the retraction of the sensors of a virtual head, if they belong to two
different physical heads, the remaining sensors belonging to the two physical heads
but not used for that virtual head are checked as well.
Example: when a pair of sensors type T1=S1 and T2=S3 is selected, and two sensors
(S1 and S2), are connected to the first little module, it is not possible to control the
retraction of S1 without the one of S2.
In the same way when acquiring (or resetting) the retraction threshold the physical
head is always considered, therefore if S4 and S7 are used in a virtual head also the
retraction thresholds S3 and S8 (if any) are acquired (or reset).

The zero corrections for the part -Part Adj (corrections involving all the cycles that
use the same head and belong to the same part) are not possible with virtual heads
(with physical heads only).

– Operator Guide Two-Diameters & Taper 155

10.2.1.2. Viewing Zero Shift
Only with measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”.
Enter
Use to highlight the box beside the “Nominal Value” data and press : access
to a sub-page where there are displayed the type and values programmed for the
zero shift used.

The state of the Check Boxes defines the type of zero shift used in the cycle:

Internally calculated zero shift

The check boxes relevant to the other zero shift
modalities are OFF … (modalities not active).
Zero shift internally calculated based on the
nominal measurement value programmed
(Nominal Value) and the programmed value of
the Range Center.

Programmed zero shift

Set the corresponding check box to ON :.
For each contact of the measuring head it was
defined its own “Zero shift” value that is used
regardless the nominal measurement value
(Nominal Value) programmed.

Static/Dynamic self-learning zero shift

When the “Nominal Value” data is underlit
(invalid data) it means that the (static or dynamic)
zero shift self-learning mode is active.
Selecting this modality allows zero-setting in the
whole Zero Shift range, regardless the nominal
measurement value (Nominal Value)
programmed.

156 Viewing the Measurements A, B and Taper Programming – Operator Guide

 Note: the modality “ Static/Dynamic self-learning zero shift” is not available in
applications with measure card with DSP (linearization of the measure range /
“Masterless” application).

10.2.1.3. Measurement equation

Indication of how the measurement is determined (the direction and the sign of the
contacts T1 and T2 determine the measurement value).
The following possibilities are available: T1, T2, -T1, -T2, T1+T2, T1-T2, -T1-T2, T2-
T1

10.2.1.4. Measurement Parameters

Controls. The number of control points is set at the configuration

level.
Surface Elaboration. Icon present only if the measurement function
for interrupted surfaces has been enabled.

– Operator Guide Two-Diameters & Taper 157

10.2.1.5. Measurement optional functions (Options)
The optional functions are enabled during the application configuration stage; if the
optional function is available the corresponding function key is displayed.
There may be two function keys (F6 and F3) for calling out the optional functions.

Function keys (F6 and F3) for

measurement optional function

If there are more than two optional functions (more function keys necessary) the F6
and F3 key have dynamic management. The “scroll” icon appears within the
key, beside the associated F# key number, to indicate that there are non-displayed
function keys. Highlight the key and use the and keys to scroll the list of the
measurement optional functions (represented by the relevant icons) available. Select
the optional function by pressing the F6 or F3 function key associated to the icon of
that function.

Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the measurement optional

functions present; an optional function is active when the box to the left of the
corresponding function key is full.
Example:

TIR optional function active

158 Viewing the Measurements A, B and Taper Programming – Operator Guide

10.2.2. Integral measurement

Manual Mode

Type of Enter

integral
measurement
Parameters of the integral measurement

Automatic Mode

Type of Enter

integral
measurement
Parameters of the integral measurement

Type Type of integral measurement. The following modalities represented by the

icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

Processing of the Average value
Processing of the Rolling average

Parameters Access to the sub-page containing the parameters of the integral

Enter
measurement: press to highlight the check-box and press .

– Operator Guide Two-Diameters & Taper 159

10.2.2.1. Parameters of the integral measurement
The sub-page containing the parameters of the integral measurement can also be
called out from the page of “Ovality” measurement, if present (section 10.2.7, page
168) and/or from the page of ”Removal speed control”, if present (section 10.2.8,
page 169).
Manual Mode example.

Ovality Measurement Removal speed control

4
Enter

Enter Enter

Parameters of the integral

measurement

4 With “Type of integral measurement” = , the parameters of the integral

measurement concern just the “Ovality” measurement (if present) and/or the
“Removal speed control” (if present). Should these options be not present,
access to the page of the integral measurement parameters is disabled.

Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside. With
the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of the
workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking the
interval between two clock pulses as time.
The data “Meas. RPM” and “Rev. Percentage” are not valid anymore.
Meas. Rpm Number of revolutions/minute of the workpiece for the integral
measurement processing.

Rev. Percentage (1 to 1000%) percentage of the revolution of the part on

which the integral measurement is performed. Default 100% = 1 revolution of the
part.

Estim. Removal Function for estimating the stock removal trend (measurement
trend) up to the end of the cycle (continuous curve processing).
With the check box enabled, successive measurement samples are processed so
as to display a continuous trend of the measurement itself.

160 Viewing the Measurements A, B and Taper Programming – Operator Guide

10.2.3. Taper Measurement
The taper measurement can be enabled/disabled upon programming.

Taper measurement
: enabled
… disabled
Value of taper measu-
rement control points

10.2.3.1. Area controls for taper measurement (Option)

Option present if it was enabled upon the application configuration stage.

Access to the display of the value of the area controls for the taper
measurement.

Value of the area controls relevant

to taper measurement

For each control it is displayed the taper measurement interval (upper limit / lower
limit) where you want the control to light up (non self-locking controls).

– Operator Guide Two-Diameters & Taper 161

10.2.4. Control points
The gauge is configured with a fixed number of control points, including a zero point.
To change the value or remove a control point see section 10.8 “Changing Control
Points Value Meas. A and B (Automatic mode)” on page 201.

Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) and
the measurement (A or B) to be viewed.
In Automatic mode the Set (Part/Cycle) and the measurement selection is
made by the machine’s logic.

ƒ To view the programmed control points, press F4 or highlight and

Enter
press .

Viewing control points in Manual mode

Viewing control points in Automatic mode

162 Viewing the Measurements A, B and Taper Programming – Operator Guide

10.2.5. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces)
The measurement of interrupted surfaces is electrically damped (filtered) and such a
damping shall be linked both to the type of workpiece and rotation speed. Damping
serves to keep the measurement stable when there are interruptions on the
workpiece.
Upon Programming it is possible to define the features of the measurement
processing for interrupted surfaces.
Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) and
measurement (A or B) to be viewed.
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) and the measurement selection is
made by the machine’s logic.

ƒ To access the data relevant to the measurement of interrupted surfaces

Enter
press F5 or highlight and press .

Surface elaboration type Surface elaboration

coefficient
Integral measurement
type

Sub-page of the
algorithm parameters

Viewing data for Interrupted surfaces in Manual mode

Viewing data for Interrupted surfaces in Automatic mode

The validity of the data appearing on the page depend on the “Surface Elaboration
Type ” selected (see the table below):

– Operator Guide Two-Diameters & Taper 163

 Surface Elaboration Type

Surface elaboration
Fixed at 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes
coefficient
Integral measurement type No No No Yes Yes
Algorithm type No No No Yes Yes
Max. Settling Time No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Estim. Removal No Yes Yes No No

Surface Elaboration Type type of workpiece based on the surface features

(interruptions present or not); it will be used for the execution of the measurement
processing.

Smooth workpiece

Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are simultaneously on the

full section.
Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are NEVER simultaneously
on the full section.
Workpiece with keyway

Inside diameter measurement (also while swinging).

Surface elaboration coefficient Measurement damping filter for interrupted

surfaces. The processing algorithms of the measurement for interrupted surfaces
foresee determined parameters of the filter, selectable with three different pre-
defined coefficients (1, 2, 3).
The higher damping is obtained with “Surface elaboration coefficient” = 3

“Surface Elaboration Type” = or : each one of the three coefficients (1, 2

and 3) is associated with three different damping speeds.

“Surface Elaboration Type” = or : programming the coefficients (1, 2 and 3)

causes the measurement to be held when the contacts are not touching the
workpiece. The measurement is held in different ways for coefficient 1, and for
coefficients 2 and 3 (different “Algorithm type” for measure elaboration).

Algorithm type programmed algorithm type.

THRESHOLD – Sampling memory
Four successive measure samples are elaborated (samples distance: 8 ms):
- If the difference between them is more than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is held.

164 Viewing the Measurements A, B and Taper Programming – Operator Guide

 - If the difference between them is less than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is acquired.
HEAD EXT. SYNC. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside. With
the check box enabled, the measurement processing and the integral
measurement requested are enabled or disabled according to this signal (for
external synchronism ON the measure is performed)
DERIVATE – Derived memory
The measure trailing edge and leading edge are identified. After the leading edge,
a settling time is awaited before acquiring the measure; it can be programmed in
the sub-page of the technical parameters of the algorithm (Latency Time data).
See chapter 10.2.5.1, on page 166.

Integral Measurement Type type of integral measurement for the period of validity
of the measurement itself.
The following modalities represented by the icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

Processing of the Average value

Max. Settling Time Maximum time passing between the moment the start cycle
is given and the moment when the software starts processing the damped
measurement.

Estim. Removal Function for estimating the stock removal trend (measurement
trend) up to the end of the cycle (continuous curve processing).
With the check box enabled, the measurement damping value does not depend
anymore on the “Surface elaboration coefficient” programmed (1, 2 or 3), but is
automatically calculated at each measurement interruption (interruption of the
workpiece).

– Operator Guide Two-Diameters & Taper 165

10.2.5.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters
The presence and validity of the parameters appearing on this sub-page depend on
the programming of the “Surface Elaboration Type” and “Algorithm type” parameters.

B
C

Algorithm’s technical parameters sub-page (example)

Surface elaboration type

Surface elaboration
No Yes Yes Yes Yes
parameters (A)
Measure Times (B) No No No Yes Yes
Filter parameters (C) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

A Parameters of the surface elaboration algorithm defined upon the application

configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical personnel or Marposs’
personnel).

B Measure times
Latency Time Lapse of time during which the measurement is held to
prevent the instability due to over-elongations in the instant in which the
contacts, exiting the hold time, return onto the workpiece.
Measure Time Measurement acquisition time (minimum lapse of time
during which the contacts touch the workpiece).

C Filter parameters for the surface elaboration algorithm. Parameters defined

upon the application configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical
personnel or Marposs’ personnel).

166 Viewing the Measurements A, B and Taper Programming – Operator Guide

10.2.6. TIR (Total Indicator Reading) (Option)
It allows to determine the eccentricity error of the workpiece to the rotation axis by
using just a contact (T1).
The TIR option can be enabled or disabled upon Programming. The option is enabled
when the small box to the left of the icon is filled in.
Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) and
measurement (A or B) to be viewed.
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) and the measurement selection is
made by the machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to view the TIR measurement
data.

Viewing TIR measurement data in Manual mode

Viewing TIR measurement data in Automatic mode

Tir Control Value beyond which the T.I.R. measurement must be considered
out of tolerance.

Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside. With
the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of the
workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking the
interval between two clock pulses as time.
The datum “Tir Rpm” is not valid anymore.

Tir Rpm Rotation speed of the workpiece during T.I.R. check.

Tir Delay Time delay before taking the T.I.R. measurement.

– Operator Guide Two-Diameters & Taper 167

10.2.7. Ovality (Option)
Check of workpiece ovality.
Note: The Ovality measurement is NOT valid with Fenar-L measuring heads
(the ovality check does not make sense at all).
The Ovality option can be enabled or disabled upon Programming. The option is
enabled when the small box to the left of the icon is filled in.
Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) and
measurement (A or B) to be viewed.
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) and the measurement selection is
made by the machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to view the ovality

measurement data.

Parameters of the integral

measurement
Viewing the ovality measurement data in Manual mode

Parameters of the integral

measurement
Viewing the ovality measurement data in Automatic mode

Ovality Control Value beyond which the ovality measurement must be considered
out of tolerance.

Parameters Access to the sub-page containing the parameters of the integral

Enter
measurement: press .
See the meaning of the parameter on chapter 10.2.2.1 "Parameters of the integral
measurement”, page 160.

168 Viewing the Measurements A, B and Taper Programming – Operator Guide

10.2.8. Stock Removal Speed (Adaptive Cycle) (Option)
It monitors the stock removal rate of the workpiece. When the rate falls above or
below the control limits a signal is sent to the machine’s logic system.
The Remspeed option can be enabled or disabled upon Programming. The option is
enabled when the small box to the left of the icon is filled in.
Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) and
measurement (A or B) to be viewed.
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) and the measurement selection is
made by the machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to view the stock removal
speed control (Adaptive Cycle) data.

Parameters of the integral

measurement
Viewing data in Manual mode

Parameters of the integral

measurement
Viewing data in Automatic mode
Remspeed Control 1 lower programmed control.
Remspeed Control 2 upper programmed control.
The gauge gives the machine’s logic information about stock removal in time (µm/s)
through the status (ON/OFF) of Remspeed 1 and Remspeed 2 controls.

Remspeed Cont.1 Remspeed Cont. 2

OFF OFF Excessive removal
ON OFF Removal OK
ON ON Insufficient removal

– Operator Guide Two-Diameters & Taper 169

 Parameters Access to the sub-page containing the parameters of the integral
Enter
measurement: press .
See the meaning of the parameter on chapter 10.2.2.1 "Parameters of the integral
measurement”, page 160.

170 Viewing the Measurements A, B and Taper Programming – Operator Guide

10.2.9. Stock Removal (Option)
It allows to carry out machining cycles in which a predetermined quantity of stock is
removed instead of reaching the zero value.
The “Stock removal” option is enabled or disabled upon Programming, and its type
(ABSOLUTE or PERCENTAGE) is defined. The option is active if the box to the left of
the icon is full.
Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle). (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to view the stock removal data.

Viewing data in Manual mode

Viewing data in Automatic mode

Stock Removal Amount amount of stock to be removed.

Stock Removal Percentage percentage of stock to be removed

Note: Stock removal with input from outside (BCD, Binary or Field Bus). The value
displayed (stock value or percentage) represents the last value received. The stock
value is received in Automatic mode, before the cycle, and concerns the selected set.

– Operator Guide Two-Diameters & Taper 171

10.2.10. Pulsed Feed Back (measurement correction) (option)
We call Pulsed Feedback the measurement correction through “zero” shift determined
by pulses supplied through external logic unit.
Such a shift may be both positive and negative based on the type of pulse.
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the “Pulsed Feedback” option and
define its characteristics. The option is enabled when the small box to the left of the
icon is filled in.

Note: In manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the
pulsed Feedback data.

Viewing pulsed Feedback data in Manual mode

Viewing pulsed Feedback data in Automatic mode

Pulse Weight minimum correction value (0 to 50 µm) performed at each pulse.

172 Viewing the Measurements A, B and Taper Programming – Operator Guide

10.2.11. BCD Feed Back (measurement correction) (option)
Correction of the In-Process measurement based on a determined Post-Process
measurement performed with Marposs gauge. The communication between the two
applications takes place through BCD/Binary interface.
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the “BCD Feedback” option and
define its characteristics. The option is enabled when the small box to the left of the
icon is filled in.

Note: In manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the BCD
Feedback data.

Viewing BCD Feedback data in Manual mode

Viewing BCD Feedback data in Automatic mode

Corr. Code request code associated with the measurement you want to correct
(combination of Post-Process measurement and the current In-Process
measurement).

Interface number identification number of the BCD or Binary interface from which
the correction value comes. The maximum number of BCD/Binary interfaces is
fixed to four (IF#1 – IF#4).

– Operator Guide Two-Diameters & Taper 173

10.2.12. Direct coupling - Dirac (Option)
The Dirac application consists in the execution of the In-Process measurement of a
workpiece (typically an outside diameter) directly coupled with the Pre-Process
measurement of another workpiece (typically an inside diameter – hole).
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the “Dirac” option and define its
characteristics. The option is enabled when the small box to the left of the icon is filled
in.

Note: In manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the Dirac
application data.

Viewing Dirac application data in Manual mode

Viewing Dirac application data in Automatic mode

Correction Source the type of source of the correction values for the Dirac
function may be:

INTERNAL the correction comes from a set of the Post-Process type of the
same In-Process measurement CPU card that must carry out the
Dirac application.

EXTERNAL the correction comes from a Post-Process measurement processed

174 Viewing the Measurements A, B and Taper Programming – Operator Guide

 in a measurement CPU card other than the one that handles the In-
Process cycle (Post-Process measurement CPU card belonging to
a different equipment).

Correction Code request code associated with the measurement on which you want
to carry out the Dirac-type correction.
With INTERNAL-type "Correction source": the "Correction code" of the set of the
In-Process type that must carry out the Dirac correction shall be the same of the
associated set of the Post-Process type that determines the correction value.
With EXTERNAL-type "Correction source": the In-Process set that shall perform
the Dirac correction based on the measurement performed on a Post-Process
control plan shall have the same "Correction Code" number of the Post-Process
measurement associated.

Correction Sign selection of sign (+ or -) for the Dirac correction.

+ sign (default): standard Dirac application (Post-Process measurement Æ inside
diameter / In-Process measurement Æ outside diameter)
- sign: special Dirac application (the sign of the correction is inverted).
Example: Post-Process measurement Æ outside diameter / In-Process
measurement Æ inside diameter.

Interface Numberidentification number of the BCD or Binary interface from which the
Dirac correction comes (with EXTERNAL-type "Correction source" only). The
maximum number of BCD/Binary interfaces is fixed to four (IF#1 – IF#4).
The In-Process set that shall perform the Dirac correction based on the
measurement performed on a Post-Process control plan shall have the same
"Interface Number" of the Post-Process measurement associated.

One correction at a cycle Dirac correction used either only once (for just one
cycle) or more times (for more cycles)
: Dirac correction used for an In-Process cycle only
… Dirac correction used for more In-Process cycles

– Operator Guide Two-Diameters & Taper 175

10.2.13. PP/IP coupling (Option)
Association of an In-Process diameter measurement with one or more Pre/Post-
Process measurements among the following ones:
ƒ T.I.R. cycle
ƒ Simple or double Post-Process diameter cycle
ƒ Passive centering cycle
ƒ Passive positioning cycle
The association between sets is obtained by setting the same coupling code (1 to 31,
necessarily different from 0) in all the sets to be associated.

Note: for the T.I.R. measurement it is not necessary to program a specific coupling
code since it is obtained as a cycle of the same set of the In-Process measurement
(see section 10.2.6 on page 167).

During the execution of the cycle in automatic operating mode this function makes it
possible to monitor the value of the Pre/Post-Process measurements associated to it.
The value of the associated measurements will be visible, in automatic operating
mode, in a single display page (see section 10.3.2.1, page 181).

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to view the page of data.

Viewing data in Manual mode

Viewing data in Automatic mode

Coupling Code code of association between the sets (1 to 31). Code “0” indicates
no association.

176 Viewing the Measurements A, B and Taper Programming – Operator Guide

10.3. Viewing Measurements A and B

The View Measure Bargraph page is where To reach this page:

the size of the workpiece can be monitored
¾ Select Automatic or Manual
during the grinding cycle in both Manual and
mode then choose one:
Automatic modes.
¾ Press
Typically, the View Measure Bargraph page
is defined as the Home page (default ¾ Press then
screen), see section 4.2.3 “Defining the ¾ Refer to Menu maps on pages
HOME key” on page 32. 148 and 150.

“ABS View” data valid: based on its programming (measuring head sub-page
- section 10.2.1.1, page 154) the measure visualization (numerical and
graphical) may be:
i • in relative value, with reference to the measure “zero”
• in absolute value, with reference to the programmed nominal value
• in absolute value in the whole measurement range of the head, with
reference to the field center value and without change of scale.

10.3.1. Viewing the Measurement in Manual Mode

Select the corresponding Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
Current measurement

Electrical Zeroing
Numerical and gra- button (2)
phical representation of
the selected measuring
head (1) Numerical value of
measurement
Retraction
status
Bargraph of
measurement
Selected Part
Type/Cycle

(1) A physical head is indicated with a number between 1 and 4 (8 with expansion): a
virtual or a logical head is indicated with the letters X and Y.
(2) Not present if the “Multiple electric zeroing” function (section 10.5.3.2 on page
191) is enabled.

– Operator Guide Two-Diameters & Taper 177

 To pass from viewing of Measurement A to Measurement B, and the contrary, act
as follows:
Enter
1. Press to access the page.

2. Press to highlight the “Measurement selection” field.

3. Press or to pass from Measurement A to Measurement B or the

contrary.

Measurement
selection field

or

Note: The electric zero-setting from this page through the zeroing button
(see chapter 10.5.3 “Electrical Zeroing ” on page 188), is possible
only with mechanically zeroed measuring head (see chapter 10.5.2
“Mechanical Zeroing ” on page 185).

178 Viewing Measurements A and B – Operator Guide

10.3.2. Viewing the Measurement in Automatic mode

Note: In Automatic mode the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the machine’s
logic.
Measurement diagram with cone
direction viewing

Numerical and graphic Numerical and graphic

representation of representation of
Measurement A Measurement B

Numerical representation
of Taper Measurement
(Measurement A – Current Part/Cycle
Measurement B)

Press to view measurements A, B and Taper individually and in sequence.

View taper measurement control points

View taper area measurement control points

Measurement A Measurement B Taper

(Meas. A – Meas. B)
Numerical and graphical Status of commands: highlighted
representation of the box = command triggered
selected measuring head (1)
Nominal value of the measurement (2)
Measurement zeroing status
(red) not zeroed
(green) zeroed

(1) A physical head is indicated with a number between 1 and 4 (8 with expansion): a
virtual or a logical head is indicated with the letters X and Y.
(2) Not displayed with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning modality”
enabled.

– Operator Guide Two-Diameters & Taper 179

 If optional functions (TIR, Ovality, Remspeed, etc.) are present on one or both
measurements, they can be viewed in sequence by means of key or .
The display sequence is as follows:
Measurement A « Measurement A Options « Measurement B « Measurement
B Options « Taper
Hereafter there are the Measurement A options view pages as an example.

Bargraph of measurement
Numerical value of
measurement
TIR
Control point status:
under limit
over limit
Bargraph of measurement
Numerical value of
measurement
Ovality
Control point status:
under limit
over limit
Note: The Ovality measurement is NOT valid with Fenar-L measuring heads
(the ovality check does not make sense at all).
Bargraph of stock removal
rate
Numerical value of
measurement
Remspeed
Control point status:
under limit
over limit

180 Viewing Measurements A and B – Operator Guide

10.3.2.1. Viewing of associated measurements (Option)
If the “PP/IP coupling” function is enabled it is possible to view a further page showing
the values of the measurements associated to the current measurement.

“PP/IP coupling” enabled Viewing of associated measurements

The measurements displayed refer to the last corresponding cycle performed.
When exiting the automatic mode the measurements associated to the current set are
reset.
The measurements corresponding to non existent sets or not associated to the
current set are displayed with -----------.

– Operator Guide Two-Diameters & Taper 181

10.4. Viewing the Zeroing values of Measurements A and B

The Zero Summary page contains To reach this page:

information about the various zeroing
¾ Select Manual or Automatic
functions of the gauge system and can be
mode then choose one:
viewed in either Manual or Automatic
mode. ¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to Menu maps on pages
148 and 150.

Measurement
selection field

Viewing Zeroing values in Manual and Automatic Modes

Note: this page shows only the zeroing values for the functions active in the current
application.

Zeroing Value Sum of the accumulated zeroing values from electrically zeroing
the gauge system.
Note: if the modality “Self-learning zero shift” (see paragraph 10.2.1.2, page
156) is active, the “Zeroing Value” is not significant anymore, and is
replaced by the following symbols:

(red): system not zeroed

(green): zero-setting performed (system zeroed).

Master Deviation Value programmed to indicate the difference between the size of
the sample part and the final size you want to obtain.

Zero Adjust Sum of the zero corrections given through keyboard during the part
machining.

Dirac correction value of the Dirac correction (it appears if the "Direct
coupling/Dirac" option is enabled). The Dirac correction value is reset for all the
sets provided with the Dirac option in the following cases:
at the electronic unit power on
• in the Automatic/Manual switching

182 Viewing the Zeroing values of Measurements A and B – Operator Guide

 • during zero-setting or zero-setting reset

Measure Feedback Measure correction value (it appears if the "Feed Back –
measure correction" option is enabled). The measure Feedback value is reset
whenever the zero-setting is reset.

10.4.1. Viewing the Zeroing values in Manual mode

Select the Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).

10.4.2. Viewing the Zeroing values in Automatic mode

Note: In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the

machine’s logic.

– Operator Guide Two-Diameters & Taper 183

10.5. Zeroing Measurements A and B
10.5.1. Introduction
Zeroing is the process of setting up and adjusting the gauge and a measuring head to
a master workpiece to assure that post-process inspection of the workpiece yields the
desired final dimensions.
Types of Zeroing:
Mechanical Zeroing – physically adjusts the fingers/contacts so that they are within
the foreseen measurement range (see section 10.5.2 on page 185).
Electrical Zeroing – adjustment operation to be performed periodically to obtain the
maximum accuracy and reliability of measurements on the workpiece (see section
10.5.3 on page 188).
• Electric zero-setting shared by the sets – operation to be performed in
case of “Masterless” application (linearization of the measurement range).
(see section 10.5.3.1 on page 190).
• Multiple Electrical Zeroing – this functional feature is present if it was
enabled upon the configuration stage of the application (see section 10.5.3.2,
on page 191).
Zero Adjustments – Corrections made when after a post-process inspection of the
workpieces small differences in size are found (see section 10.6 on page 193).
Zero Resets – removes the offsets generated by the system during the last electrical
zeroing (see section 10.7 on page 200).
Zeroing Conditions
Static – The master workpiece is NOT rotating.
Dynamic – The master workpiece is rotating and wet by the coolant.

When to zero the gauge system?

TYPE OF ZEROING CONDITIONS
Mechanical Zeroing
followed by At initial setup
Electrical Zeroing
At grinder start up
Electrical Zeroing At the beginning of each work shift
After changing Part Type
Zero Adjust When the workpiece size changes

When the zeroing range of the measuring head

Zero Reset
has been exceeded.
followed by After replacement of any measuring head
Mechanical Zeroing & component (head, contacts, fingers, etc.)
Electrical Zeroing After any mechanical changes are made to the
gauge system.

184 Zeroing Measurements A and B – Operator Guide

10.5.2. Mechanical Zeroing
Mechanical zeroing MUST be done to a master workpiece:
ƒ At initial set up of the gauge system.
ƒ If the allowed zero adjustment range has been exceeded.
ƒ After any mechanical or electrical changes to the gauge system (fingers, contacts,
...).
Mechanical zeroing must be performed only in Manual mode and statically.
Note: Each measuring head that has been defined MUST be Mechanically
Zeroed.

Mechanical Zeroing of a measuring head:

1. Gauge in Manual Mode.
2. Select the Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) relevant to the head to
be zeroed.
3. Eliminate any zeroing offsets:

- press then ;
Enter
- press F5 or highlight the Zero Reset button and press .

- a question box appears asking to Reset: press to highlight “Yes” and press
Enter
.
Note:Zero reset is performed both for Measurement A and Measurement B.

4. Press then to highlight the Mechanical Zeroing page icon.

The mechanical zeroing page relevant to Measurement A is viewed.

– Operator Guide Two-Diameters & Taper 185

 Indication of measurement

Numerical and graphic

view of measurement
value of the second
Numerical and graphic
transducer:
view of measurement
-T2: physical head
value of the first
-S#: virtual head
transducer:
-T1: physical head
-S#: virtual head
Numerical and graphic
representation of current
measuring head (1)

(1) A physical head is indicated with a number between 1 and 4 (8 with

expansion): a virtual or a logical head is indicated with the letters X and Y.
5. Place the master workpiece into the machine.
6. Adjust the finger/contact assemblies of the measuring head 1 so they can be
inserted into gauging position safely.
The adjustment mode of the finger/contact assemblies depends on the
adjustment method used (with adjustable guides or with contacts).
(pls. see Chapter 22 “Measuring head Mechanical zero-setting” on page 535).

Finger/contact assembly – T1
Cable

Measuring Contacts
head support Measuring DO NOT
head touch
master

Slide adapter
Finger/contact assembly – T2
Slide

7. Bring the measuring head to gauging position.

8. Adjust the upper finger/contact assembly (T1) making the contact touch the
master until the measurement value on the upper digital display of the
Mechanical Zeroing page is next to zero (± 10 µ).

186 Zeroing Measurements A and B – Operator Guide

 Measurement value
next to zero.

9. Adjust the lower finger/contact assembly (T2) making the contact touch the
master until the measurement value on the upper digital display of the
Mechanical Zeroing page is next to zero (± 10 µ).

Measurement value
next to zero.

This completes the mechanical setup of Measurement A; now perform the

mechanical setup of Measurement B.
Enter
ƒ Press to highlight the “Measurement selection” field.

ƒ Press or to pass from Measurement A to Measurement B.

Measurement
selection field

Repeat the operations described for measuring head-Measurement A, from step 6 to

step 9, for measuring head– Measurement B.

This completes the mechanical setup of measuring heads; now perform an Electric
Zeroing (see section 10.5.3 on page 188).

– Operator Guide Two-Diameters & Taper 187

10.5.3. Electrical Zeroing
Electrical Zeroing MUST be done:
ƒ In manual mode on a master workpiece.
ƒ Dynamically, i.e. with the master workpiece rotating and wet by coolant.
ƒ Regularly, usually at the beginning of each work shift and/or when the grinding
wheel is switched on.
Note: Each measuring head that has been defined MUST be electrically zeroed
for each work cycle in which it is used.
It is possible to zero-set either each individual measurement separately or
both of them simultaneously

Electrical Zeroing Procedure:

1. Gauge in manual mode.
2. Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
3. Position the master workpiece in machine (master workpiece rotating and wet by
coolant).
4. Bring the measuring head(s) to measurement position

5. Bring up the electric zeroing page: press and then . Measurement A is

displayed.
Press or with the “Measurement selection” field highlighted to switch
from Measure A to Measure B and back.
Zeroing value (1)

Electric zeroing
button
Master deviation
Nominal value of the Measurement value
measurement (2)

Measurement selection field

Current measurement

(2) Not displayed with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning modality”
enabled.
Enter
6. Press F4 or use to highlight the key and press .

188 Zeroing Measurements A and B – Operator Guide

 Cancel Cancels the electric zero-setting procedure

Ø Ø Electric zero-setting of both measures (A and B)

Ø Electric zero-setting of one measure only (current measurement

brought up in the measure selection field).

Enter
7. Select the desired option and press .

One measure only or both measurements have been electrically zero-set.

If no error messages are displayed the electric zero-setting procedure has been
correctly performed.
The Gauge can be switched to Automatic operating mode.

Note: Electric zero-setting with integral measurement.

Once completed the electric zero-setting procedure the measurement is
still displayed (graphic and numerical display) dynamically (viewing of the
measurement variation during the part rotation).

(1)Note: if the modality “Self-learning zero shift” (see paragraph 10.2.1.2, page
156) is active, the “Zeroing Value” is not significant anymore, and is
replaced by the following symbols:

(red): system not zeroed

(green): zero-setting performed (system zeroed).

– Operator Guide Two-Diameters & Taper 189

10.5.3.1. Shared Electric zero-setting (“Masterless” function)
In case of application with “Masterless” function (linearization of the measurement
range / measurement card with DSP-Digital Signal Processing), carry out a
simultaneous zero-setting of all the sets that use the selected measuring head
(shared electric zero-setting).

Measuring head in use

Mechanical Zeroing
Page Measurement value
of the first contact

Measurement value of 1
the second contact
Measurement selection field

1 Data present only with measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”.

Execution of electric zero-setting shared by the sets

Aborts the electric zero-setting shared by the sets

Zero-setting procedure
• Position the measuring heads (contacts T1 / T2) and fasten them onto the special
mechanical support, in the most suitable range based on the available sample
workpiece.
• Bring the measuring heads to measuring position on the sample workpiece.

• Press or with the “Measurement selection” field highlighted to switch

from Measure A to Measure B and back.

• Press the key to carry out zero-setting. In this way all the sets that use the
measuring head are perfectly zeroed (shared zero-setting).

Note: if a new set is defined, combined with this measuring head, it is necessary
to repeat the zero-setting procedure.

190 Zeroing Measurements A and B – Operator Guide

10.5.3.2. Multiple Electrical Zeroing (Option)
This functional feature is present if it was enabled upon the configuration stage of the
application.
This functional feature allows using up to 32 different zeroing indexes for each set;
this means that it is possible to zero-set on different masters without having to change
the set (all the other programming data being equal). Afterwards it is possible to work
with the corresponding parts by calling out the different zeroing indexes.

Measurement zeroing status

Zeroing index no. (red) not zeroed
(1 to 32)
(green) zeroed

Electric zeroing button

Measurement nominal
value (1)

(1) Not displayed with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning” modality
enabled.

To select the index no. act as follows:

ƒ use to move the cursor to the index number, or to view the desired
Enter
value, then press to confirm.

This functional feature is optimized for the use with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic)
self-learning” modality (see section 10.2.1.2, page 156), but can also be used if such
a modality has not been enabled
“Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning” modality, enabled
After the execution of the mechanical zeroing it is possible, by exploiting the different
zeroing indexes (1 to 32), to carry out an electric zeroing on masters that do not differ
more than the maximum zeroing range without changing the measurement nominal
value (maximum zeroing range: maximum value of the zero shift range +
programmed value of the head zero range).
Changing the measurement nominal value does not cause a reset of the current
zeroing index.

“Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning” modality NOT enabled

After the execution of an electric zeroing with a determined index, if you want to zero-
set with another index it is necessary to:
• change the zeroing index
• change the measurement nominal value

– Operator Guide Two-Diameters & Taper 191

 • zero-set.
This procedure is necessary because changing the nominal value causes a reset of
the current zeroing index.
If you change the Field Center value, the current zeroing index is always reset, unlike
the other indexes.
The zero adjust that was set remains valid until you switch between the zeroed
indexes, while it is reset when switching to a index that was not zeroed.

192 Zeroing Measurements A and B – Operator Guide

10.6. Zero Adjustments for Measurements A and B (Option)

Zero adjustments are made when a post- To reach this page:

process inspection of the workpiece shows
¾ Select Manual or Automatic
an incorrect size.
mode then choose one:

¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to the Menu maps on
pages 148 and 150.

Example:
The workpiece is undersize: enter a zero adjustment with the same value but with
opposite sign.
APPLICATION PART TOO SMALL PART TOO BIG
OUTSIDE diameter Add Subtract
INSIDE diameter Subtract Add
This can be done in either Manual or Automatic mode.

There are identical and independent pages for zero adjustment programming for
Measurement A and for Measurement B:
Measurement selection field
Current measurement

Measurement A Measurement B
To select Measurement A or Measurement B:

1. Press to reach the page.

2. Use to highlight the “Measurement selection” field .

3. Press or to select Measurement A or Measurement B.

For simplicity we will always refer to the page relevant to Measurement A from here
on.

– Operator Guide Two-Diameters & Taper 193

10.6.1. Zero Adjustment in Manual mode

Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) and press .
Note: Zero adjustments in manual mode affect the next cycle.

Bargraph of sum of zero

adjustments

Part drawing
Sum of zero
adjustments

Single/double zero
adjustment Bargraph and numerical
display of measurement
value

Value of zero adjustment

value entered

Zero Adjustment Reset key

Changing Zero Adjustment value

1. Press to highlight the field

2. Press or to increase or decrease the value

3. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments).

Single/double zero adjustment

Possibility of inserting a zero adjustment value either for the single measurement or
for both measurements simultaneously.

To select the desired mode, press the F2 key or highlight the key and press
until the corresponding icon is selected.

194 Zero Adjustments for Measurements A and B (Option) – Operator Guide

 The selected icon (key) indicates:

Zero adjustment on the single measurement A or B selected

Zero adjustment on both measurements simultaneously

Resetting Zero Adjustments

Enter
1. Press F5 or highlight and press . A “Reset?” question box will appear.

Zero
adjustments reset

Enter
2. Press to highlight “Yes” and press . The zero adjustments are reset
for both measurements.

10.6.2. Zero Adjustments in automatic mode

Note: Zero adjustments in automatic mode are made while grinding and affect
the current cycle.

10.6.2.1. Zero adjustment for the current Set (part/cycle)

Bargraph of sum of zero

adjustments

Part drawing Sum of zero adjustments

Single/double zero Bargraph and numerical

adjustment display of measurement
value

Zero adjustment
value entered

– Operator Guide Two-Diameters & Taper 195

 Changing the zero adjustment value

1. Press to reach the page

2. Press to highlight the field

3. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

4. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments for the cycle).

Single/double zero adjustment

Possibility of inserting a zero adjustment value either for the single measurement or
for both measurements simultaneously.

To select the desired mode, press the F2 key or highlight the key and press
until the corresponding icon is selected.
The selected icon (key) indicates:

Zero adjustment on the single measurement A or B selected

Zero adjustment on both measurements simultaneously

196 Zero Adjustments for Measurements A and B (Option) – Operator Guide

10.6.2.2. Zero adjustment with Set (Part/Cycle) selection

Bargraph of Σ value for the

selected cycle

Sum of zero adjustments

Part drawing (Σ) for the selected cycle

Sum of zero adjustments

(Σ) for the selected Part

Zero adjustment value

entered for the selected cycle Number of selected Part

Zero adjustment value entered

for the selected Part

The zero adjustments entered for the selected Part concern all the cycles using the
same head and belong to the same part. The common correction value is subtracted
in the same way following an electric zero-setting.

Selecting the Set (Part/Cycle)

1. Holding down press to highlight the Part/Cycle selection box below.

Current Part Type

Part Number Cycle Number

2. Press or to view the selected Part/Cycle, otherwise press or to

change the Cycle number and or to change the Part number.

3. Press to confirm the Part/Cycle selection made. The program automatically

exits the selection box and returns to the page.

– Operator Guide Two-Diameters & Taper 197

 Changing the zero adjustment value for the cycle

1. Press to reach the page

2. Press to highlight the field

3. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

4. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments for the cycle).

5. Press .

Changing the zero adjustment value for the part

1. Press to reach the page

2. Press to highlight the field

3. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

4. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments for the part).

5. Press .

198 Zero Adjustments for Measurements A and B (Option) – Operator Guide

10.6.2.3. Hardware modification of the zero correction (Option)
Functional feature present if it was enabled upon the application configuration stage.
The hardware modification of the zero correction is not admitted:
ƒ in automatic with active cycle
ƒ with non zeroed measurement
ƒ if the “(Static or dynamic) zero shift self-learning” mode (see section 10.2.1.2 on
page 156) is not enabled,
Enter
Function active with the corresponding check-box ON (:).Press to change its
state (:function active / … function not active).

Programming of a zero correction value for single transducer that is added to the zero
correction calculated by a previous zero-setting.

Zero correction for T1 Zero correction for T2

Indication of the
measurement zeroing state:
green = zeroed
red = not zeroed

Act as follows for programming:

ƒ highlight the involved field with , press or to view the desired value,
Enter
and then press to confirm.

– Operator Guide Two-Diameters & Taper 199

10.7. Zero Reset for Measurements A and B

This function removes all offsets generated To reach this page:

by the system during the last electrical
¾ Select Manual mode, then
zeroing (the transducers value is shown).
choose one:

¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to the Menu map on page
148.

It can be selected only in manual mode:

ƒ After mechanical changes to the gauge system.
ƒ When the maximum Zero Adjustment value available has been reached.
Electric Zeroing Reset Procedure:

Note: The reset procedure acts on both measurements, indipendent of

measurement displayed (A or B).
1. Select Part/Cycle (see section 6.1 on page 34).
Enter
2. Press F5 or highlight and press . A “Reset?” question box will appear.

Enter
3. Press to highlight “Yes” and press .

4. Press and to highlight the Mechanical Zeroing page icon.

Mechanical
Zeroing page

The gauge system MUST NOW be Mechanically then Electrically Zeroed.

200 Zero Reset for Measurements A and B – Operator Guide

10.8. Changing Control Points Value Meas. A and B (Automatic
mode)
During the grinding process, it may be necessary to modify the control points value to
reach the optimum cycle.
Note: In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

Note: Changes made to the Control Points affect the current cycle.

To reach this page:

¾ Select Automatic mode, then choose
one:

¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to the Menu map on pages 148.

Press or to select Measurement A or Measurement B .

Enter
1. Press to highlight the control point to be changed and press .

2. Press to highlight the digit that needs changing.

3. Press or to increase or decrease the digit.

4. If more than one digit needs changing, press to highlight the next digit, then
press or to increase or decrease the digit
Enter
5. Press ,
Enter
6. Press to highlight “Apply to measure” and press .

Control point
to be changed

Apply to measure
button

7. The control point value has been changed.

– Operator Guide Two-Diameters & Taper 201

202 Changing Control Points Value Meas. A and B (Automatic mode) – Operator Guide
11. PASSIVE POSITIONING
This section covers the PASSIVE POSITIONING application and its configured options.
For this guide section the Passive Positioning application has been programmed as
Part 1 and Cycle 1.
The passive positioning cycle can be defined with Parts/Cycles matching the
machine’s logic programming.
11.1. Menu Maps
Operator tasks are performed in both Automatic and Manual modes. Only the menu
map folders with operator functions - Viewing, General Adjustments and Utilities –
are shown on the following pages.

– Operator Guide Passive Positioning 203

11.1.1. Automatic Mode – Passive Position Menu Map

Viewings General adjustments

FOLDERS
SUB-FOLDERS

View measure View zeroings View programming

PAGES

View measure Zero values Programmed Zero adjustments (Option)

Section 11.3.2. Section 11.4.2 values Section 11.6.2
Section 11.2

PP/IP coupling (Option)

Section 11.2.5

F5 – Surface elaboration (only if

the measuring function for interrupted
surfaces is enabled)
Section 11.2.4

204 Menu Maps – Operator Guide

11.1.2. Manual Mode – Passive Position Menu Map

Utilities
FOLDERS

Measure zeroing Measure set up View

SUB-FOLDERS
PAGES

Mechanical Electrical Zero View Surface type View Programmed

Zeroing Zeroing adjustments measure setup (1) Zeroings values
Sec. 11.5.2 Sec. 11.5.3 (Option) Sec. 11.3.1 Sec. 11.2
Sec. 11.4.1
Sec. 11.6.1

(1) This page is not seen if the surface is

smooth.

PP/IP coupling (Option)

Section 11.2.5

F5 – Surface elaboration
(only if the measuring function for
Getting around the program interrupted surfaces is enabled
(Section 11.2.4)
Enter
moves down to the next level.

moves up one level.

moves between folders, sub-folders

or pages on the same level.

– Operator Guide Passive Positioning 205

11.2. Viewing the Passive Position Programming

All the programmed values can be viewed in To reach this page:

either Automatic or Manual mode on the
¾ Select Manual or Automatic
”View Programming” page.
mode
Additional pages can be viewed by using the
¾ Refer to the Menu maps on
F4-F5 function keys or highlighting an option
pages 204 and 205.
Enter
and pressing .

Passive position Overrange Measurements Parameters

limits

Measurement data

Integral measurement
type data

Automatic Mode Manual Mode

Note: In manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.
11.2.1. Measurement data
Zero shift data (only with
measuring heads enabled Measuring head sub-page
for “zero shift”)

Head Number of measuring head combined with the part/cycle selected.

Nominal value Nominal value of measurement (data valid only with measuring
heads enabled for “zero shift”).
Data not valid if the modality “ Static/Dynamic self-learning zero shift” is active (see
chapter 11.2.1.2 “Zero shift display” on page 208).

206 Viewing the Passive Position Programming – Operator Guide

 Measure Sign Selection of measurement sign (+ = normal measurement,
− = inverted measurement).
Delay Time passing between the “start cycle” signal supplied by the logic
system and the internal enabling sent to gauge for starting the measuring cycle.

11.2.1.1. Measuring head sub-page

Use to move the cursor to (highlight) the box before the head number and press
Enter
.

Measuring head sub-page

Head Number of measuring head combined with the part/cycle selected.

Display resolution for the current set:

• Metric system :1µm / 0,1 µm / 0,01µm
• Imperial/Inches system: 0.00001” / 0.000001” / 0.0000001”

Sensor Choice Symbol indicates the sensor (S#) used in the positioning cycle
for the current set.

ABS View Measure visualization modality. Non-significant data (underlit) with

measuring heads not enabled for “Zero shift” (measure in relative value).
DISABLED: measure visualization in relative value, with reference to the measure
“zero”.
Nominal Value: measure visualization in absolute value with reference to the
nominal value.
Field Center: measure visualization in absolute value in the whole measurement
range of the head, with reference to the field center value and without change of
scale.
Example

ABS View= DISABLED ABS View= Nominal Value ABS View= Field Center
(40.0000)

– Operator Guide Passive Positioning 207

11.2.1.2. Zero shift display
Only with measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”.
Enter
Use to highlight the box beside the “Nominal Value” data and press : access
to a sub-page where there are displayed the type and values programmed for the
zero shift used.

The state of the Check Boxes defines the type of zero shift used in the cycle:

Internally calculated zero shift

The check boxes relevant to the other zero shift
modalities are OFF … (modalities not active).
Zero shift internally calculated based on the
nominal measurement value programmed
(Nominal Value) and the programmed value of
the Range Center.

Programmed zero shift

Set the corresponding check box to ON :.
For each contact of the measuring head it was
defined its own “Zero shift” value that is used
regardless the nominal measurement value
(Nominal Value) programmed.

Static/Dynamic self-learning zero shift

When the “Nominal Value” data is underlit
(invalid data) it means that the (static or dynamic)
zero shift self-learning mode is active.
Selecting this modality allows zero-setting in the
whole Zero Shift range, regardless the nominal
measurement value (Nominal Value)
programmed.
Note: the modality “Static/Dynamic self-learning zero shift” is not available in
applications with measure card with DSP (linearization of the measure range /
“Masterless” application).

208 Viewing the Passive Position Programming – Operator Guide

11.2.2. Integral measurement

Manual Mode

Type of Enter

integral
measurement
Parameters of the integral measurement

Automatic Mode

Type of Enter

integral
measurement
Parameters of the integral measurement

Type Type of integral measurement. The following modalities represented by the

icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

Processing of the Average value
Processing of the Rolling average

Parameters Access to the sub-page containing the parameters of the integral

Enter
measurement: press to highlight the check-box and press .

With “Type of integral measurement” = , access to the page of the integral

measurement parameters is disabled.

– Operator Guide Passive Positioning 209

11.2.2.1. Parameters of the integral measurement
Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside. With
the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of the
workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking the
interval between two clock pulses as time.
The data “Meas. RPM” and “Rev. Percentage” are not valid anymore.

Meas. Rpm Number of revolutions/minute of the workpiece for the integral

measurement processing.

Rev. Percentage (1 to 1000%) percentage of the revolution of the part on

which the integral measurement is performed. Default 100% = 1 revolution of the
part.

11.2.3. Positioning Over Range values

Range where a Passive Positioning cycle can be performed. The programmed values
must be within the working range of the measuring head.
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the overrange limits and program
the threshold values.

: Overrange enabled

… Overrange disabled

+OVR Positive threshold beyond which the measurement is overrange.

-OVR Negative threshold beyond which the measurement is overrange.

210 Viewing the Passive Position Programming – Operator Guide

11.2.4. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces)
The measurement of interrupted surfaces is electrically damped (filtered) and such a
damping shall be linked both to the type of workpiece and rotation speed. Damping
serves to keep the measurement stable when there are interruptions on the
workpiece.
Upon Programming it is possible to define the features of the measurement
processing for interrupted surfaces.
Note: In manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ To view the data relevant to interrupted surfaces measurement press F5 or

Enter
highlight and press .

Surface elaboration
Surface elaboration type coefficient

Integral measurement
type

Sub-page of the
algorithm parameters

Viewing data for interrupted surfaces in Manual mode

Viewing data for interrupted surfaces in Automatic mode

The validity of the data appearing on the page depend on the “Surface Elaboration
Type ” selected (see the table below):

– Operator Guide Passive Positioning 211

 Surface Elaboration Type

Surface elaboration
Fixed at 1 Yes Yes Yes
coefficient
Integral measurement type No No No Yes
Algorithm type No No No Yes
Max. Settling Time No Yes Yes Yes

Surface Elaboration Type type of workpiece based on the surface features

(interruptions present or not); it will be used for the execution of the measurement
processing.

Smooth workpiece

Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are simultaneously on the

full section.
Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are NEVER simultaneously
on the full section.
Workpiece with keyway

Surface elaboration coefficient Measurement damping filter for interrupted

surfaces. The processing algorithms of the measurement for interrupted surfaces
foresee determined parameters of the filter, selectable with three different pre-
defined coefficients (1, 2, 3).
The higher damping is obtained with “Surface elaboration coefficient” = 3

“Surface Elaboration Type” = or : each one of the three coefficients (1, 2

and 3) is associated with three different damping speeds.

“Surface Elaboration Type” = : programming the coefficients (1, 2 and 3) causes

the measurement to be held when the contacts are not touching the workpiece.
The measurement is held in different ways for coefficient 1, and for coefficients 2
and 3 (different “Algorithm type” for measure elaboration).

Algorithm type programmed algorithm type.

THRESHOLD – Sampling memory
Four successive measure samples are elaborated (samples distance: 8 ms):
- If the difference between them is more than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is held.
- If the difference between them is less than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is acquired.
HEAD EXT. SYNC. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside. With
the check box enabled, the measurement processing and the integral

212 Viewing the Passive Position Programming – Operator Guide

 measurement requested are enabled or disabled according to this signal (for
external synchronism ON the measure is performed)
DERIVATE – Derived memory
The measure trailing edge and leading edge are identified. After the leading edge,
a settling time is awaited before acquiring the measure; it can be programmed in
the sub-page of the technical parameters of the algorithm (Latency Time data).
See chapter 11.2.4.1, on page 213.

Integral Measurement Type type of integral measurement for the period of validity
of the measurement itself.
The following modalities represented by the icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

Processing of the Average value

Max. Settling Time Maximum time passing between the moment the start cycle
is given and the moment when the software starts processing the damped
measurement.

11.2.4.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters

The presence and validity of the parameters appearing on this sub-page depend on
the programming of the “Surface Elaboration Type” and “Algorithm type” parameters.

B
C

Algorithm’s technical parameters sub-page (example)

Surface elaboration type

Surface elaboration parameters (A) No Yes Yes Yes

Measure Times (B) No No No Yes
Filter parameters (C) Yes Yes Yes Yes

– Operator Guide Passive Positioning 213

 A Parameters of the surface elaboration algorithm defined upon the application
configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical personnel or Marposs’
personnel).

B Measure times
Latency Time Lapse of time during which the measurement is held to
prevent the instability due to over-elongations in the instant in which the
contacts, exiting the hold time, return onto the workpiece.
Measure Time Measurement acquisition time (minimum lapse of time
during which the contacts touch the workpiece).

C Filter parameters for the surface elaboration algorithm. Parameters defined

upon the application configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical
personnel or Marposs’ personnel).

214 Viewing the Passive Position Programming – Operator Guide

11.2.5. PP/IP coupling (Option)
Association of the Passive Positioning measurement with an In-Process diameter
measurement (either simple or double).
The association between sets is obtained by setting the same coupling code (1 to 31,
necessarily different from 0) in all the sets to be associated.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to view the page of data.

Viewing data in Manual mode

Viewing data in Automatic mode

Coupling Code code of association between the sets (1 to 31). Code “0” indicates
no association.

– Operator Guide Passive Positioning 215

11.3. Viewing Passive Position Measurement

The View Passive Positioning Measurement To reach this page:

is available in both Manual and Automatic
¾ Select Automatic or Manual
modes.
mode then choose one:

Typically, the View Measure Bargraph page ¾ Press

is defined as the Home page (default
screen), see section 4.2.3 “Defining the ¾ Press then
HOME key” on page 32. ¾ Refer to Menu maps on pages
204 and 205..

“ABS View” data valid: based on its programming (measuring head sub-page
- section 11.2.1.1, page 207) the measure visualization (numerical and
graphical) may be:
i • in relative value, with reference to the measure “zero”
• in absolute value, with reference to the programmed nominal value
• in absolute value in the whole measurement range of the head, with
reference to the field center value and without change of scale.

11.3.1. Viewing the Measurement in Manual mode

ƒ Select the corresponding Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
Electrical Zeroing
Numerical and button (1)
graphical
representation of
measuring head
Numerical value of
measurement
Retraction status

Bargraph of
measurement
Selected Part/Cycle

(1) Not present if the “Multiple electric zeroing” function (section 11.5.3.2 on page
225) is enabled.

Note: Electrical zero from this page, by means of the Zeroing button , is
possible only after a mechanical zeroing has been performed.

216 Viewing Passive Position Measurement – Operator Guide

11.3.2. Viewing the Measurement in Automatic Mode

Note: In Automatic mode the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the machine’s
logic.

Numerical and graphical

representation of measuring
head

Measurement zeroing status

(red) not zeroed
Bargraph of
(green) zeroed measurement

Numerical value of
Nominal value of the
measurement
measurement (1)

Selected Part/Cycle

(1) Not displayed with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning” modality,
enabled.

– Operator Guide Passive Positioning 217

11.4. Viewing the Passive Position Zeroing values

The Zero Summary page contains To reach this page:

information about the various zeroing
¾ Select Manual or Automatic
functions of the gauge system and can be
mode then choose one:
viewed in either Manual or Automatic
mode. ¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to Menu maps on pages
204 and 205.

Viewing zeroing summary values in Manual and Automatic modes

Zeroing Value Sum of the accumulated zeroing values from electrically zeroing
the gauge system.
Note: if the modality “ Static/Dynamic self-learning zero shift” (see paragraph
11.2.1.2, page 208) is active, the “Zeroing Value” is not significant
anymore, and is replaced by the following symbols:

(red): system not zeroed

(green): zero-setting performed (system zeroed).

Zero Adjust Sum of the zero adjustments entered during the workpiece
machining.

11.4.1. Viewing the Zeroing values in Manual mode

ƒ Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).

11.4.2. Viewing the Zeroing values in Automatic mode

Note: In Automatic mode the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the machine’s
logic.

218 Viewing the Passive Position Zeroing values – Operator Guide

11.5. Passive Position Zeroing
11.5.1. Introduction
Zeroing is the process of setting up and adjusting a gauge and a measuring head to a
reference master workpiece.
Types of Zeroing:
Mechanical Zeroing – physically adjusts the fingers/contacts so that they are within
the foreseen measurement range (see section 11.5.2, on page 220).
Electrical Zeroing – adjusting operation to be performed periodically to obtain
maximum accuracy and reliability of the measurements (see section 11.5.3, on
page 222).
• Electric zero-setting shared by the sets – operation to be performed in case
of “Masterless” application (linearization of the measurement range). (see
section 11.5.3.1, on page 224).
• Multiple Electrical Zeroing – this functional feature is present if it was
enabled upon the configuration stage of the application (see section 11.5.3.2,
on page 225).
Zero adjustments – compensations to be done after a post-process inspection of
machined workpieces shows an incorrect size (see section 11.6, on page 227).
Zero Reset – removes the offsets generated by the system during the last electrical
zeroing (see section 11.7, on page 231).
Zeroing Conditions
Static – the master workpiece is NOT rotating.
Dynamic – the master workpiece is rotating and wet by coolant.

When to zero the gauge system?

TYPE OF ZEROING CONDITIONS
Mechanical Zeroing
At initial setup
followed by
Electrical Zeroing
At grinder start up
Electrical Zeroing At the beginning of each work shift
After changing Part Type

Zero Adjust When the workpiece size changes

When the zeroing range of the measuring head

Zero Reset has been exceeded.
followed by After replacement of any measuring head
Mechanical Zeroing & component (head, contacts, fingers, etc.)
Electrical Zeroing After any mechanical changes are made to the
gauge system.

– Operator Guide Passive Positioning 219

11.5.2. Mechanical Zeroing of Passive Position
Mechanical zeroing MUST be done to a master workpiece:
ƒ At initial set up of the gauge system.
ƒ After any mechanical or electrical changes to the gauge system (fingers, contacts,
etc. ...).
ƒ If the allowed zero adjustment range has been exceeded.
Mechanical zeroing must be performed only in Manual mode and statically.

Note: Each measuring head that has been defined MUST be mechanically
zeroed.

Mechanical Zeroing Procedure:

1. Gauge in Manual mode.
2. Select the Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) relevant to be head that
needs zeroing.
3. Eliminate the zeroing offsets, if any:

- press then ;
Enter
- press F5 or highlight the Zero Reset button and press

- A question box appears asking to Reset:: press to highlight “Yes” and

Enter
press

4. Press and to highlight the Mechanical Zeroing page icon.

Numerical and graphic

representation of
Numerical and graphic measuring head
representation of
measurement value

220 Passive Position Zeroing – Operator Guide

 5. Position the master workpiece in machine.
6. Adjust the finger/contact assemblies of the measuring head so they can be
inserted into gauging position safely.
The adjustment mode of the finger/contact assemblies depends on the
adjustment method used (with adjustable guides or with contacts).
(pls. see Chapter 22 “Measuring head Mechanical zero-setting” on page 535).

Overhead view
Cable

Measuring Contact does not

head Measuring head touch the master
support

Finger/contact assembly

7. Bring the measuring head to gauging position.

8. Adjust the finger/contact assembly making the contact touch the master until the
measurement value on the upper digital display of the Mechanical Zeroing page
is next to zero.

Measurement value
next to zero

This completes the mechanical setup of the measuring head; now perform an Electric
Zeroing (see section 11.5.3 on page 222).

– Operator Guide Passive Positioning 221

11.5.3. Electrical Zeroing of Passive Position
Electrical Zeroing MUST be done:
ƒ In manual mode on a master workpiece.
ƒ Dynamically, i.e. with the master workpiece rotating and wet by coolant.
ƒ Regularly, usually at the beginning of each work shift and/or when the grinding
wheel is switched on.
Note: Each measuring head that has been defined MUST be electrically zeroed
for each work cycle in which it is used.

Electrical Zeroing Procedure:

1. Gauge in manual mode.
2. Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
3. Position the master workpiece in machine (master rotating and wet by coolant).
4. Bring the head to gauging position

5. Bring up the electric zeroing page: press and then . The electric zero-
setting button is highlighted.

Zeroing value (1)

Electric zeroing
button

Nominal value of the Measurement value

measurement (2)

(2) Not displayed with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning modality”
enabled.

Enter
6. Press F4 or .

222 Passive Position Zeroing – Operator Guide

 7. A question box appears asking to Zeroing: press to highlight “Yes” and
Enter
press .
If no error messages are displayed the electric zero-setting procedure has been
correctly performed.
The Gauge can be switched to Automatic operating mode.

Note: Electric zero-setting with integral measurement.

Once completed the electric zero-setting procedure the measurement is
still displayed (graphic and numerical display) dynamically (viewing of the
measurement variation during the part rotation).

(1)Note: if the modality “ Static/Dynamic self-learning zero shift” (see paragraph

11.2.1.2, page 208) is active, the “Zeroing Value” is not significant
anymore, and is replaced by the following symbols:

(red): system not zeroed

(green): zero-setting performed (system zeroed).

– Operator Guide Passive Positioning 223

11.5.3.1. Shared Electric zero-setting (“Masterless” function)
In case of application with “Masterless” function (linearization of the measurement
range / measurement card with DSP-Digital Signal Processing), carry out a
simultaneous zero-setting of all the sets that use the selected measuring head
(shared electric zero-setting).

Mechanical Zeroing
Page Measurement value 1
of the first contact

Measuring head in use

1 Data present only with measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”.

Execution of electric zero-setting shared by the sets

Aborts the electric zero-setting shared by the sets

Zero-setting procedure
• Position the measuring heads (contact T1) and fasten them onto the special
mechanical support, in the most suitable range based on the available sample
workpiece.
• Bring the measuring heads to measuring position on the sample workpiece.

• Press the key to carry out zero-setting. In this way all the sets that use the
measuring head are perfectly zeroed (shared zero-setting).

Note: if a new set is defined, combined with this measuring head, it is necessary
to repeat the zero-setting procedure.

224 Passive Position Zeroing – Operator Guide

11.5.3.2. Multiple Electrical Zeroing (Option)
This functional feature is present if it was enabled upon the configuration stage of the
application.
This functional feature allows using up to 32 different zeroing indexes for each set;
this means that it is possible to zero-set on different masters without having to change
the set (all the other programming data being equal). Afterwards it is possible to work
with the corresponding parts by calling out the different zeroing indexes.

Measurement zeroing status

Zeroing index no. (red) not zeroed
(1 to 32)
(green) zeroed

Electric zeroing button

Measurement nominal
value (1)

(2) Not displayed with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning modality”
enabled.

To select the index no. act as follows:

ƒ use to move the cursor to the index number, or to view the desired
Enter
value, then press to confirm.

This functional feature is optimized for the use with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic)
self-learning” modality (see section 11.2.1.2, page 208), but can also be used if such
a modality has not been enabled
“Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning” modality, enabled
After the execution of the mechanical zeroing it is possible, by exploiting the different
zeroing indexes (1 to 32), to carry out an electric zeroing on masters that do not differ
more than the maximum zeroing range without changing the measurement nominal
value (maximum zeroing range: maximum value of the zero shift range +
programmed value of the head zero range).
Changing the measurement nominal value does not cause a reset of the current
zeroing index.

“Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning” modality, NOT enabled

After the execution of an electric zeroing with a determined index, if you want to zero-
set with another index it is necessary to:
• change the zeroing index
• change the measurement nominal value

– Operator Guide Passive Positioning 225

 • zero-set.
This procedure is necessary because changing the nominal value causes a reset of
the current zeroing index.
If you change the Field Center value, the current zeroing index is always reset, unlike
the other indexes.
The zero adjust that was set remains valid until you switch between the zeroed
indexes, while it is reset when switching to a index that was not zeroed.

226 Passive Position Zeroing – Operator Guide

11.6. Zero Adjustments for Passive Position (Option)

Zero adjustments are made when a post- To reach this page:

process inspection of the workpiece shows
¾ Select Manual or Automatic
an incorrect size.
mode then choose one:

¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to the Menu maps on
pages 204 and 205.

Example:
The workpiece is undersize: enter a zero adjustment with the same value but with
opposite sign.

This can be done in either Manual or Automatic mode.

11.6.1. Zero Adjustment in Manual mode
Enter
Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section see section 6.1 on page 34) and press .
Note: Zero adjustments in manual mode affect the next cycle.

Bargraph of Σ value

Part drawing Sum of zero

adjustments (Σ)

Bargraph and numerical

display of measurement
value

Value of zero adjustment

value entered
Zero Adjustment Reset key

Changing Zero Adjustment value

1. Press to highlight the field

2. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

Enter
3. Press .

– Operator Guide Passive Positioning 227

 4. The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the top of the
page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments).

Resetting Zero Adjustments

Enter
1. Press F5 or highlight and press . A “Reset?” question box will appear.
Zero Adjustment Reset
key

Enter
2. Press to highlight “Yes” and press . The zero adjustments are reset.

11.6.2. Zero Adjustments in automatic mode

Note: Zero adjustments in automatic mode are made while grinding and affect
the current cycle.

11.6.2.1. Zero adjustment for the current Set (part/cycle)

Bargraph of Σ value

Part drawing Sum of zero adjustments

(Σ)

Bargraph and numerical

display of measurement
value

Zero adjustment
value entered

Changing the zero adjustment value

1. Press to reach the page

228 Zero Adjustments for Passive Position (Option) – Operator Guide

 2. Press to highlight the field

3. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

4. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments for the cycle).

11.6.2.2. Zero adjustment with Set (Part/Cycle) selection

Bargraph of Σ value for the

selected cycle
Sum of zero adjustments
(Σ) for the selected cycle
Part drawing

Sum of zero adjustments

(Σ) for the selected Part

Zero adjustment value Number of selected Part

entered for the selected cycle

Zero adjustment value entered

for the selected Part

The zero adjustments entered for the selected Part concern all the cycles using the
same head and belong to the same part. The common correction value is subtracted
in the same way following an electric zero-setting.

Selecting the Set (Part/Cycle)

1. Holding down press to highlight the Part/Cycle selection box below.

Current Part Type

Part Number Cycle Number

– Operator Guide Passive Positioning 229

 2. Press or to view the selected Part/Cycle, otherwise press or to
change the Cycle number and or to change the Part number.

3. Press to confirm the Part/Cycle selection made. The program automatically

exits the selection box and returns to the page.
Changing the zero adjustment value for the cycle

1. Press to reach the page

2. Press to highlight the field

3. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

4. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments for the cycle).

5. Press

Changing the zero adjustment value for the part

1. Press to reach the page

2. Press to highlight the field

3. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

4. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments for the part and summation of zero adjustments for the cycle).

5. Press .

230 Zero Adjustments for Passive Position (Option) – Operator Guide

11.7. Zero Reset for Passive Position

This function removes all offsets generated To reach this page:

by the system during the last electrical
¾ Select Manual mode, then
zeroing (the transducers value is shown).
choose one:

¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to the Menu map on page
205.

It can be selected only in manual mode:

ƒ After mechanical changes to the gauge system.
ƒ When the maximum Zero Adjustment value available has been reached.
Electric Zeroing Reset Procedure:
1. Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
Enter
2. Press F5 or highlight and press . A “Reset?” question box will appear.

Reset button

Enter
3. Press to highlight “Yes” and press .

4. Press then to highlight the Mechanical Zeroing page icon.

Mechanical
Zeroing page

The gauge system MUST NOW be Mechanically then Electrically Zeroed (see page
219).

– Operator Guide Passive Positioning 231

232 Zero Reset for Passive Position – Operator Guide
12. PASSIVE CENTERING
This section covers the PASSIVE CENTERING application and its configured options.
For this guide section the Passive Centering application has been programmed as
Part 1 and Cycle 1.
The passive centering cycle can be defined with Parts/Cycles matching the machine’s
logic programming.

12.1. Menu Maps

Operator tasks are performed in both Automatic and Manual modes. Only the menu
map folders with operator functions - Viewing, General Adjustments and Utilities –
are shown on the following pages.

– Operator Guide Passive Centering 233

12.1.1. Automatic Mode – Passive Centering Menu Map

Viewings General adjustments

FOLDERS
SUB-FOLDERS

View measure View zeroings View programming

PAGES

View measure Zero values Programmed Zero adjustments (Option)

Section 12.3.2 Section 12.4. values Section 12.6.2
Section 12.2

PP/IP coupling (Option)

Section 12.2.5

F5 – Surface elaboration (only if

the measuring function for interrupted
surfaces 12.2.4

234 Menu Maps – Operator Guide

12.1.2. Manual Mode – Passive Centering Menu Map

Utilities
FOLDERS

Measure zeroing Measure set up View

SUB-FOLDERS
PAGES

Mechanical Electrical Zero View Surface type View Programmed

Zeroing Zeroing adjustments measure setup (1) Zeroings values
Sec. 12.5.2 Sec. 12.5.3 (Option) Sec. 12.3.1 Sec. 12.4 Sec. 12.2
Sec. 12.6.1

(1) This page is not seen if the surface is

smooth.

PP/IP coupling (Option)

Section 12.2.5

F5 – Surface elaboration
(only if the measuring function for
Getting around the program interrupted surfaces is enabled
(Section 12.2.4)
Enter
moves down to the next level.

moves up one level.

moves between folders, sub-folders

or pages on the same level.

– Operator Guide Passive Centering 235

12.2. Viewing the Passive Centering Programming

All the programmed values can be viewed in To reach this page:

either Automatic or Manual mode on the
¾ Select Manual or Automatic
”View Programming” page.
mode
Additional pages can be viewed by using the
¾ Refer to the Menu maps on
F4-F5 function keys or highlighting an option
pages 234 and 235..
Enter
and pressing .

Passive centering Over

range limits

Measurement data

Integral measurement
type data

Automatic Mode Manual Mode

Note: In manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

12.2.1. Measurement data

Zero shift data
measurement (only with
measuring heads enabled Measuring head sub-page
for “zero shift”).

Head Number of measuring head combined with the part/cycle selected.

Nominal value Nominal value of measurement (data valid only with measuring
heads enabled for “zero shift”).
Data not valid if the modality “Static/Dynamic self-learnt zero shift” is active (see
chapter 12.2.1.2 “Zero shift display” on page 238).

236 Viewing the Passive Centering Programming – Operator Guide

 Measure Sign Selection of measurement sign (+ = normal measurement,
− = inverted measurement).

Delay Time passing between the “start cycle” signal supplied by the logic
system and the internal enabling sent to gauge for starting the measuring cycle.

12.2.1.1. Measuring head sub-page

Use to move the cursor to (highlight) the box before the head number and press
Enter
.

Measuring head sub-page

Head Number of measuring head combined with the part/cycle (set) selected.

Display resolution for the current set:

• Metric system :1µm / 0,1 µm / 0,01µm
• Imperial/Inches system: 0.00001” / 0.000001” / 0.0000001”

ABS View Measure visualization modality. Non-significant data (underlit) with

measuring heads not enabled for “Zero shift” (measure in relative value).
DISABLED: measure visualization in relative value, with reference to the measure
“zero”.
Nominal Value: measure visualization in absolute value with reference to the
nominal value.
Field Center: measure visualization in absolute value in the whole measurement
range of the head, with reference to the field center value and without change of
scale.
Example

ABS View= DISABLED ABS View= Nominal Value ABS View= Field Center
(40.0000)

– Operator Guide Passive Centering 237

12.2.1.2. Zero shift display
Only with measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”.
Enter
Use to highlight the box beside the “Nominal Value” data and press : access
to a sub-page where there are displayed the type and values programmed for the
zero shift used.

The state of the Check Boxes defines the type of zero shift used in the cycle:

Internally calculated zero shift

The check boxes relevant to the other zero shift
modalities are OFF … (modalities not active).
Zero shift internally calculated based on the
nominal measurement value programmed
(Nominal Value) and the programmed value of
the Range Center.

Programmed zero shift

Set the corresponding check box to ON :.
For each contact of the measuring head it was
defined its own “Zero shift” value that is used
regardless the nominal measurement value
(Nominal Value) programmed.

Static/Dynamic self-learning zero shift

When the “Nominal Value” data is underlit
(invalid data) it means that the (static or dynamic)
zero shift self-learning mode is active.
Selecting this modality allows zero-setting in the
whole Zero Shift range, regardless the nominal
measurement value (Nominal Value)
programmed.

Note: the modality “Static/Dynamic self-learning zero shift” is not available in

applications with measure card with DSP (linearization of the measure range /
“Masterless” application).

238 Viewing the Passive Centering Programming – Operator Guide

12.2.2. Integral measurement

Manual Mode

Type of Enter

integral
measurement
Parameters of the integral measurement

Automatic Mode

Type of Enter

integral
measurement
Parameters of the integral measurement

Type Type of integral measurement. The following modalities represented by the

icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

Processing of the Average value
Processing of the Rolling average

Parameters Access to the sub-page containing the parameters of the integral

Enter
measurement: press to highlight the check-box and press .

With “Type of integral measurement” = , access to the page of the integral

measurement parameters is disabled.

– Operator Guide Passive Centering 239

12.2.2.1. Parameters of the integral measurement

Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside. With
the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of the
workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking the
interval between two clock pulses as time.
The data “Meas. RPM” and “Rev. Percentage” are not valid anymore.

Meas. Rpm Number of revolutions/minute of the workpiece for the integral

measurement processing.

Rev. Percentage (1 to 1000%) percentage of the revolution of the part on

which the integral measurement is performed. Default 100% = 1 revolution of the
part.

12.2.3. Centering Over Range values

Range where a Passive Centering cycle can be performed. The programmed values
must be within the working range of the measuring head.
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the overrange limits and program
the threshold values.

: Overrange enabled

… Overrange disabled

+OVR Positive threshold beyond which the measurement is overrange.

-OVR Negative threshold beyond which the measurement is overrange.

240 Viewing the Passive Centering Programming – Operator Guide

12.2.4. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces)
The measurement of interrupted surfaces is electrically damped (filtered) and such a
damping shall be linked both to the type of workpiece and rotation speed. Damping
serves to keep the measurement stable when there are interruptions on the
workpiece.
Upon Programming it is possible to define the features of the measurement
processing for interrupted surfaces.
Note: In manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ To view the data relevant to interrupted surfaces measurement press F5 or

Enter
highlight and press .

Surface elaboration
Surface elaboration type coefficient

Integral measurement
type

Sub-page of the
algorithm parameters

Viewing data for interrupted surfaces in Manual mode

Viewing data for interrupted surfaces in Automatic mode

The validity of the data appearing on the page depend on the “Surface Elaboration
Type ” selected (see the table below):

– Operator Guide Passive Centering 241

 Surface Elaboration Type

Surface elaboration
Fixed at 1 Yes Yes Yes
coefficient
Integral measurement type No No No Yes
Algorithm type No No No Yes
Max. Settling Time No Yes Yes Yes

Surface Elaboration Type type of workpiece based on the surface features

(interruptions present or not); it will be used for the execution of the measurement
processing.

Smooth workpiece

Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are simultaneously on the

full section.
Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are NEVER simultaneously
on the full section.
Workpiece with keyway

Surface elaboration coefficient Measurement damping filter for interrupted

surfaces. The processing algorithms of the measurement for interrupted surfaces
foresee determined parameters of the filter, selectable with three different pre-
defined coefficients (1, 2, 3).
The higher damping is obtained with “Surface elaboration coefficient” = 3

“Surface Elaboration Type” = or : each one of the three coefficients (1, 2

and 3) is associated with three different damping speeds.

“Surface Elaboration Type” = : programming the coefficients (1, 2 and 3) causes

the measurement to be held when the contacts are not touching the workpiece.
The measurement is held in different ways for coefficient 1, and for coefficients 2
and 3 (different “Algorithm type” for measure elaboration).

Algorithm type programmed algorithm type.

THRESHOLD – Sampling memory
Four successive measure samples are elaborated (samples distance: 8 ms):
- If the difference between them is more than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is held.
- If the difference between them is less than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is acquired.
HEAD EXT. SYNC. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside. With
the check box enabled, the measurement processing and the integral

242 Viewing the Passive Centering Programming – Operator Guide

 measurement requested are enabled or disabled according to this signal (for
external synchronism ON the measure is performed)
DERIVATE – Derived memory
The measure trailing edge and leading edge are identified. After the leading edge,
a settling time is awaited before acquiring the measure; it can be programmed in
the sub-page of the technical parameters of the algorithm (Latency Time data).
See chapter 12.2.4.1, on page 243.

Integral Measurement Type type of integral measurement for the period of validity
of the measurement itself.
The following modalities represented by the icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

Processing of the Average value

Max. Settling Time Maximum time passing between the moment the start cycle
is given and the moment when the software starts processing the damped
measurement.

12.2.4.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters

The presence and validity of the parameters appearing on this sub-page depend on
the programming of the “Surface Elaboration Type” and “Algorithm type” parameters.

B
C

Algorithm’s technical parameters sub-page (example)

Surface elaboration type

Surface elaboration parameters (A) No Yes Yes Yes

Measure Times (B) No No No Yes
Filter parameters (C) Yes Yes Yes Yes

– Operator Guide Passive Centering 243

 A Parameters of the surface elaboration algorithm defined upon the application
configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical personnel or Marposs’
personnel).

B Measure times
Latency Time Lapse of time during which the measurement is held to
prevent the instability due to over-elongations in the instant in which the
contacts, exiting the hold time, return onto the workpiece.
Measure Time Measurement acquisition time (minimum lapse of time
during which the contacts touch the workpiece).

C Filter parameters for the surface elaboration algorithm. Parameters defined

upon the application configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical
personnel or Marposs’ personnel).

244 Viewing the Passive Centering Programming – Operator Guide

12.2.5. PP/IP coupling (Option)
Association of the Passive Centering measurement with an In-Process diameter
measurement (either simple or double).
The association between sets is obtained by setting the same coupling code (1 to 31,
necessarily different from 0) in all the sets to be associated.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to view the page of data.

Viewing data in Manual mode

Viewing data in Automatic mode

Coupling Code code of association between the sets (1 to 31). Code “0” indicates
no association.

– Operator Guide Passive Centering 245

12.3. Viewing Passive Centering Measurement

The View Passive Centering Measurement To reach this page:

is available in both Manual and Automatic
¾ Select Automatic or Manual
modes..
mode then choose one:

Typically, the View Measure Bargraph page ¾ Press

is defined as the Home page (default
screen), see section 4.2.3 “Defining the ¾ Press then
HOME key” on page 32. ¾ Refer to Menu maps on pages
234 and 235.

“ABS View” data valid: based on its programming (measuring head sub-page
- section 12.2.1.1, page 237) the measure visualization (numerical and
graphical) may be:
i • in relative value, with reference to the measure “zero”
• in absolute value, with reference to the programmed nominal value
• in absolute value in the whole measurement range of the head, with
reference to the field center value and without change of scale.

12.3.1. Viewing the Measurement in Manual mode

ƒ Select the corresponding Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).

Electrical Zeroing
Numerical and button (1)
graphical
representation of
measuring head
Numerical value of
measurement
Retraction status

Bargraph of
measurement

Selected Part/Cycle

(1) Not present if the “Multiple electric zeroing” function (section 12.5.3.2 on page
255) is enabled.

Note: Electrical zero from this page, by means of the Zeroing button , is
possible only after a mechanical zeroing has been performed.

246 Viewing Passive Centering Measurement – Operator Guide

12.3.2. Viewing the Measurement in Automatic Mode

Note: In Automatic mode the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the machine’s
logic.

Numerical and graphical

representation of measuring head
Measurement zeroing status
(red) not zeroed Bargraph of
(green) zeroed measurement

Nominal value of the Numerical value of

measurement (1) measurement

Selected Part/Cycle

(1) Not displayed with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning” modality,
enabled.

– Operator Guide Passive Centering 247

12.4. Viewing the Passive Centering Zeroing values

The Zero Summary page contains To reach this page:

information about the various zeroing
¾ Select Manual or Automatic
functions of the gauge system and can be
mode then choose one:
viewed in either Manual or Automatic
mode. ¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to Menu maps on pages
234 and 235.

Viewing zeroing summary values in Manual and Automatic modes

Zeroing Value Sum of the accumulated zeroing values from electrically zeroing
the gauge system.
Note: if the modality “static/Dynamic self-learning zero shift” (see paragraph
12.2.1.2, page 238) is active, the “Zeroing Value” is not significant
anymore, and is replaced by the following symbols:

(red): system not zeroed

(green): zero-setting performed (system zeroed).

Zero Adjust Sum of the zero adjustments entered during the workpiece
machining.

12.4.1. Viewing the Zeroing values in Manual mode

ƒ Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).

12.4.2. Viewing the Zeroing values in Automatic mode

Note: In Automatic mode the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the machine’s
logic.

248 Viewing the Passive Centering Zeroing values – Operator Guide

12.5. Passive Centering Zeroing
12.5.1. Introduction
Zeroing is the process of setting up and adjusting a gauge and a measuring head to a
reference master workpiece.
Types of Zeroing:
Mechanical Zeroing – physically adjusts the fingers/contacts so that they are within
the foreseen measurement range (see section 12.5.2, on page 250).
Electrical Zeroing – adjusting operation to be performed periodically to obtain
maximum accuracy and reliability of the measurements (see section 12.5.3, on
page 252).
• Electric zero-setting shared by the sets – operation to be performed in case
of “Masterless” application (linearization of the measurement range). (see
section 12.5.3.1, on page 254).
• Multiple Electrical Zeroing – this functional feature is present if it was
enabled upon the configuration stage of the application (see section 12.5.3.2,
on page 255).
Zero adjustments – compensations to be done after a post-process inspection of
machined workpieces shows an incorrect size (see section 12.6, on page 257).
Zero Reset – removes the offsets generated by the system during the last electrical
zeroing (see section 12.7, on page 262).
Zeroing Conditions
Static – the master workpiece is NOT rotating.
Dynamic – the master workpiece is rotating and wet by coolant.

When to zero the gauge system?

TYPE OF ZEROING CONDITIONS
Mechanical Zeroing
At initial setup
followed by
Electrical Zeroing
At grinder start up
Electrical Zeroing At the beginning of each work shift
After changing Part Type
Zero Adjust When the workpiece size changes
When the zeroing range of the measuring head
Zero Reset has been exceeded.
followed by After replacement of any measuring head
Mechanical Zeroing & component (head, contacts, fingers, etc.)
Electrical Zeroing After any mechanical changes are made to the
gauge system.

– Operator Guide Passive Centering 249

12.5.2. Mechanical Zeroing of Passive Centering
Mechanical zeroing MUST be done to a master workpiece:
ƒ At initial set up of the gauge system.
ƒ After any mechanical or electrical changes to the gauge system (fingers, contacts,
etc. ...).
ƒ If the allowed zero adjustment range has been exceeded.
Mechanical zeroing must be performed only in Manual mode and statically.

Note: Each measuring head that has been defined MUST be mechanically
zeroed.

Mechanical Zeroing Procedure:

1. Gauge in Manual mode.
2. Select the Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) relevant to be head that
needs zeroing.
3. Eliminate the zeroing offsets, if any:

- press then ;
Enter
- press F5 or highlight the Zero Reset button and press

- A question box appears asking to Reset:: press to highlight “Yes” and

Enter
press

4. Press and to highlight the Mechanical Zeroing page icon.

Numerical and graphic

view of measurement
Numerical and graphic value of the second
view of measurement transducer -T2
value of the first
transducer -T1

5. Place the master workpiece into the machine.

250 Passive Centering Zeroing – Operator Guide

 6. Adjust the finger/contact assemblies of the measuring head so they can be
inserted into gauging position safely.
The adjustment mode of the finger/contact assemblies depends on the
adjustment method used (with adjustable guides or with contacts).
(pls. see Chapter 22 “Measuring head Mechanical zero-setting” on page 535).

Over head view Finger/contact assembly-T1

Measuring head

Contacts
Cable MASTER DO NOT
touch
master
Measuring
head Measuring head
support

Finger/contact assembly –T2

7. Bring the measuring head to gauging position.

8. Adjust the finger/contact assembly (T1) making the contact touch the master
until the measurement value on the upper digital display of the Mechanical
Zeroing page is next to zero (± 10 µ).

Measurement value
next to zero

9. Adjust the finger/contact assembly (T2) making the contact touch the master
until the measurement value on the upper digital display of the Mechanical
Zeroing page is next to zero (± 10 µ).

Measurement value
next to zero

This completes the mechanical setup of the measuring head; now perform an Electric
Zeroing (see section 12.5.3 on page 252).

– Operator Guide Passive Centering 251

12.5.3. Electrical Zeroing of Passive Centering
Electrical Zeroing MUST be done:
ƒ In manual mode on a master workpiece.
ƒ Dynamically, i.e. with the master workpiece rotating and wet by coolant.
ƒ Regularly, usually at the beginning of each work shift and/or when the grinding
wheel is switched on.
Note: Each measuring head that has been defined MUST be electrically zeroed
for each work cycle in which it is used.

Electrical Zeroing Procedure:

1. Gauge in manual mode.
2. Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
3. Position the master workpiece in machine (master rotating and wet by coolant).
4. Bring the head to gauging position.

5. Bring up the electric zeroing page: press and then . The electric zero-
setting button is highlighted

Zeroing value (1)

Electric zeroing
button

Measurement nominal Measurement value

value (2)

(2) Not displayed with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning” modality
enabled.

Enter
6. Press F4 or .

252 Passive Centering Zeroing – Operator Guide

 7. A question box appears asking to Zeroing: press to highlight “Yes” and
Enter
press . Electrical zeroing is completed.

If no error messages are displayed the electric zero-setting procedure has been
correctly performed.
The Gauge can be switched to Automatic operating mode.
Note: Electric zero-setting with integral measurement.
Once completed the electric zero-setting procedure the measurement is
still displayed (graphic and numerical display) dynamically (viewing of the
measurement variation during the part rotation).

(1)Note: if the modality “Self-learning zero shift” (see paragraph 12.2.1.2, page
238) is active, the “Zeroing Value” is not significant anymore, and is
replaced by the following symbols:

(red): system not zeroed

(green): zero-setting performed (system zeroed).

– Operator Guide Passive Centering 253

12.5.3.1. Shared Electric zero-setting (“Masterless” function)
In case of application with “Masterless” function (linearization of the measurement
range / measurement card with DSP-Digital Signal Processing), carry out a
simultaneous zero-setting of all the sets that use the selected measuring head
(shared electric zero-setting).

Mechanical Zeroing
Page Measurement value 1
of the first contact

Measurement value of
the second contact
Measuring head in use

1 Data present only with measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”.

Execution of electric zero-setting shared by the sets

Aborts the electric zero-setting shared by the sets

Zero-setting procedure
• Position the measuring heads (contacts T1 / T2) and fasten them onto the special
mechanical support, in the most suitable range based on the available sample
workpiece.
• Bring the measuring heads to measuring position on the sample workpiece.

• Press the key to carry out zero-setting. In this way all the sets that use the
measuring head are perfectly zeroed (shared zero-setting).

Note: if a new set is defined, combined with this measuring head, it is necessary
to repeat the zero-setting procedure.

254 Passive Centering Zeroing – Operator Guide

12.5.3.2. Multiple Electrical Zeroing (Option)
This functional feature is present if it was enabled upon the configuration stage of the
application.
This functional feature allows using up to 32 different zeroing indexes for each set;
this means that it is possible to zero-set on different masters without having to change
the set (all the other programming data being equal). Afterwards it is possible to work
with the corresponding parts by calling out the different zeroing indexes.

Measurement zeroing status

Zeroing index no. (red) not zeroed
(1 to 32)
(green) zeroed

Electric zeroing button

Measurement nominal
value (1)

(3) Not displayed with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning modality”
enabled.

To select the index no. act as follows:

ƒ use to move the cursor to the index number, or to view the desired
Enter
value, then press to confirm.

This functional feature is optimized for the use with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic)
self-learning” modality (see section 12.2.1.2, page 238), but can also be used if such
a modality has not been enabled
“Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning” modality, enabled
After the execution of the mechanical zeroing it is possible, by exploiting the different
zeroing indexes (1 to 32), to carry out an electric zeroing on masters that do not differ
more than the maximum zeroing range without changing the measurement nominal
value (maximum zeroing range: maximum value of the zero shift range +
programmed value of the head zero range).
Changing the measurement nominal value does not cause a reset of the current
zeroing index.

“Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning” modality, NOT enabled

After the execution of an electric zeroing with a determined index, if you want to zero-
set with another index it is necessary to:
• change the zeroing index
• change the measurement nominal value

– Operator Guide Passive Centering 255

 • zero-set.
This procedure is necessary because changing the nominal value causes a reset of
the current zeroing index.
If you change the Field Center value, the current zeroing index is always reset, unlike
the other indexes.
The zero adjust that was set remains valid until you switch between the zeroed
indexes, while it is reset when switching to a index that was not zeroed.

256 Passive Centering Zeroing – Operator Guide

12.6. Zero Adjustments for Passive Centering (Option)

Zero adjustments are made when a post- To reach this page:

process inspection of the workpiece shows
¾ Select Manual or Automatic
an incorrect size.
mode then choose one:

¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to the Menu maps on
pages 234 and 235.

Example:
The workpiece is undersize: enter a zero adjustment with the same value but with
opposite sign.

This can be done in either Manual or Automatic mode.

12.6.1. Zero Adjustment in Manual mode
Enter
Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) and press .
Note: Zero adjustments in manual mode affect the next cycle.

Bargraph of Σ value

Part drawing Sum of zero

adjustments (Σ)

Bargraph and numerical

display of measurement
value

Value of zero adjustment

value entered

Zero Adjustment Reset key

Changing Zero Adjustment value

1. Press to highlight the field

2. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

Enter
3. Press .

– Operator Guide Passive Centering 257

 4. The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the top of the
page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments).

Resetting Zero Adjustments

Enter
1. Press F5 or highlight and press . A “Reset?” question box will appear.
Zero Adjustment Reset
key

Enter
2. Press to highlight “Yes” and press . The zero adjustments are reset.

12.6.2. Zero Adjustments in automatic mode

Note: Zero adjustments in automatic mode are made while grinding and affect
the current cycle.

12.6.2.1. Zero adjustment for the current Set (part/cycle)

Bargraph of Σ value

Part drawing Sum of zero adjustments

(Σ)

Bargraph and numerical

display of measurement
value

Zero adjustment
value entered

Changing the zero adjustment value

1. Press to reach the page

258 Zero Adjustments for Passive Centering (Option) – Operator Guide

 2. Press to highlight the field

3. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

4. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments for the cycle).

12.6.2.2. Zero adjustment with Set (Part/Cycle) selection

Bargraph of Σ value for the

selected cycle
Sum of zero adjustments
(Σ) for the selected cycle
Part drawing

Sum of zero adjustments

(Σ) for the selected Part

Zero adjustment value

entered for the selected cycle Number of selected Part

Zero adjustment value entered

for the selected Part

The zero adjustments entered for the selected Part concern all the cycles using the
same head and belong to the same part. The common correction value is subtracted
in the same way following an electric zero-setting.

– Operator Guide Passive Centering 259

 Selecting the Set (Part/Cycle)

1. Holding down press to highlight the Part/Cycle selection box below.

Current Part Type

Part Number Cycle Number

2. Press or to view the selected Part/Cycle, otherwise press or to

change the Cycle number and or to change the Part number.

3. Press to confirm the Part/Cycle selection made. The program automatically

exits the selection box and returns to the page.
Changing the zero adjustment value for the cycle

1. Press to reach the page

2. Press to highlight the field

3. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

4. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments for the cycle).

5. Press

Changing the zero adjustment value for the part

1. Press to reach the page

2. Press to highlight the field

3. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

260 Zero Adjustments for Passive Centering (Option) – Operator Guide

 4. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments for the part and summation of zero adjustments for the cycle).

5. Press .

– Operator Guide Passive Centering 261

12.7. Zero Reset for Passive Centering

This function removes all offsets To reach this page:

generated by the system during the
¾ Select Manual mode, then choose
last electrical zeroing (the
one:
transducers value is shown).
¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to the Menu map on page 235.

It can be selected only in manual mode:

ƒ After mechanical changes to the gauge system.
ƒ When the maximum Zero Adjustment value available has been reached.
Electric Zeroing Reset Procedure:
1. Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
Enter
2. Press F5 or highlight and press . A “Reset?” question box will appear.

Reset button

Enter
3. Press to highlight “Yes” and press .

4. Press then to highlight the Mechanical Zeroing page icon.

Mechanical
Zeroing page

The gauge system MUST NOW be Mechanically then Electrically Zeroed (see page
249).

262 Zero Reset for Passive Centering – Operator Guide

13. ACTIVE POSITIONING
This section covers the ACTIVE POSITIONING application and its configured options.
For this guide section the Active Positioning application has been programmed as
Part 1, Cycle 1.
The active positioning cycle can be defined with Parts/Cycles matching the machine’s
logic programming.

13.1. Menu Maps

Operator tasks are performed in both Automatic and Manual modes. Only the menu
map folders with operator functions - Viewing, General Adjustments and Utilities –
are shown on the following pages.

– Operator Guide Active Positioning 263

13.1.1. Automatic Mode – Active Position Menu Map

Viewings General Adjustments

FOLDERS
SUB-FOLDERS

View Measure View zeroings View programming Zero adjustments Modify control
(Option) points
PAGES

Self-locking Zero values Programmed Self-locking

controls Section 13.4.2. values controls
Section 13.2.

Selection controls Zero adjustments Selection controls

(Option)
View measure Modify control
Section 13.6.2.
Section 13.3 points.
Section 13.8

F4 - Self-locking F4 - Selection
controls (2) controls (2)
Section 13.2.2 Section 13.2.2

F5 – Surface elaboration (only if

the measuring function for interrupted
surfaces is enabled)
(Section13.2.3)

(2) The control points type depends on the application configuration

264 Menu Maps – Operator Guide

13.1.2. Manual Mode – Active Position Menu Map

Utilities
FOLDERS

Measure zeroing Measure setup View

SUB-FOLDERS
PAGES

Mechanical Electrical Zero View Surface type View View.

zeroing zeroing adjustments measure setup (1) Zeroings Programming
Sec. 13.5.2 Sec. 13.5.3. (Option) Sec. 13.3.1. Sec. 13.4.1. Sec. 13.2..
Sec. 13.6.1

F4 - Self-locking F4 - Selection
controls (2) controls (2)
Section 13.2.2 Section 13.2.2

F5 – Surface elaboration
Getting around the program (only if the measuring function for
interrupted surfaces is enabled
Enter (Section 13.2.3)
moves down to the next level.

moves up one level.

(1) This page is not seen if the surface is
moves between folders, sub-folders smooth.
or pages on the same level.

(2) The control points type depends on the application configuration

– Operator Guide Active Positioning 265

13.2. Viewing the Active Position Programming

All the programmed values can be viewed in To reach this page:

either Automatic or Manual mode on the
¾ Select Manual or Automatic
”View Programming” page.
mode
Additional pages can be viewed by using the
¾ Refer to the Menu maps on
F4-F5 function keys or highlighting an option
pages 264 and 265.
Enter
and pressing .

Measurement Parameters

Measurement
data

Automatic Mode Manual Mode

The viewed data concern the selected Part/Cycle.

Note: In manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

13.2.1. Measurement data

Zero shift data

measurement (only with
Measuring head sub-page
measuring heads enabled
for “zero shift”).

Head Number of measuring head combined with the part/cycle selected.

Nominal value Nominal value of measurement (data valid only with measuring
heads enabled for “zero shift”).

266 Viewing the Active Position Programming – Operator Guide

 Data not valid if the modality “Static self-learning zero shift” is active (see chapter
13.2.1.2 “Zero shift display“ on page 268).

Positioning Mode Contact positioning movement (Release = the workpiece

moves far from the contact; Press = the workpiece moves towards the contact).
Delay Time passing between the “start cycle” signal supplied by the logic
system and the internal enabling sent to gauge for starting the measuring cycle.

13.2.1.1. Measuring head sub-page

Use to move the cursor to (highlight) the box before the head number and press
Enter
.

Measuring head sub-page

Head Number of measuring head combined with the part/cycle selected.

Display resolution for the current set:

• Metric system :1µm / 0,1 µm / 0,01µm
• Imperial/Inches system: 0.00001” / 0.000001” / 0.0000001”

Sensor Choice Symbol indicates the sensor (S#) used in the positioning cycle
for the current set.

ABS View Measure visualization modality. Non-significant data (underlit) with

measuring heads not enabled for “Zero shift” (measure in relative value).
DISABLED: measure visualization in relative value, with reference to the measure
“zero”.
Nominal Value: measure visualization in absolute value with reference to the
nominal value.
Field Center: measure visualization in absolute value in the whole measurement
range of the head, with reference to the field center value and without change of
scale.
Example

ABS View= DISABLED ABS View= Nominal Value ABS View= Field Center
(40.0000)

– Operator Guide Active Positioning 267

13.2.1.2. Zero shift display
Only with measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”.
Enter
Use to highlight the box beside the “Nominal Value” data and press : access
to a sub-page where there are displayed the type and values programmed for the
zero shift used.

The state of the Check Boxes defines the type of zero shift used in the cycle:

Internally calculated zero shift

The check boxes relevant to the other zero shift
modalities are OFF … (modalities not active).
Zero shift internally calculated based on the
nominal measurement value programmed
(Nominal Value) and the programmed value of
the Range Center.

Programmed zero shift

Set the corresponding check box to ON :.
For each contact of the measuring head it was
defined its own “Zero shift” value that is used
regardless the nominal measurement value
(Nominal Value) programmed.

Static self-learning zero shift

When the “Nominal Value” data is underlit
(invalid data) it means that the (static or dynamic)
zero shift self-learning mode is active.
Selecting this modality allows zero-setting in the
whole Zero Shift range, regardless the nominal
measurement value (Nominal Value)
programmed.
Note: the modality “Static self-learning zero shift” is not available in applications with
measure card with DSP (linearization of the measure range / “Masterless”
application).

268 Viewing the Active Position Programming – Operator Guide

13.2.1.3. Measurement parameters
Controls. The controls may be of either “self-locking” or “selection”
(non self-locking) type: type and number of controls for the application
in use are chosen while configuring the application.
Elaboration of Interrupted surfaces – icon present only of the
measurement function for interrupted surfaces has been enabled.

– Operator Guide Active Positioning 269

13.2.2. Controls
The controls may be of either “self-locking” or “selection” (non self-locking) type:
type and number of controls for the application in use are chosen while configuring
the application.
The gauge is configured with a fixed number of positioning controls, including a zero
control (the number of controls is defined while configuring the application).
To change the value or remove a control point see section 13.8 “Changing Control
Points Value (Automatic mode)" on page 291.

Note: In manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ To view the programmed control points, press F4 or highlight and

Enter
press .

Self-locking
controls

Selection
Viewing the control points in controls
Manual Mode

Self-locking
controls

Selection
Viewing the control points in controls
Automatic Mode

270 Viewing the Active Position Programming – Operator Guide

13.2.3. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces)
The measurement of interrupted surfaces is electrically damped (filtered) and such a
damping shall be linked both to the type of workpiece and rotation speed. Damping
serves to keep the measurement stable when there are interruptions on the
workpiece.
Upon Programming it is possible to define the features of the measurement
processing for interrupted surfaces.
Note: In manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ To view the data relevant to interrupted surfaces measurement press F5 or

Enter
highlight and press .

Surface elaboration
Surface elaboration type
coefficient

Integral measurement
type

Sub-page of the
algorithm parameters

Viewing data for Interrupted Surfaces in Manual mode

Viewing data for Interrupted Surfaces in Automatic mode

The validity of the data appearing on the page depend on the “Surface Elaboration
Type ” selected (see the table below):

– Operator Guide Active Positioning 271

 Surface Elaboration Type

Surface elaboration
Fixed at 1 Yes Yes Yes
coefficient
Integral measurement type No No No Yes
Algorithm type No No No Yes
Max. Settling Time No Yes Yes Yes

Surface Elaboration Type type of workpiece based on the surface features

(interruptions present or not); it will be used for the execution of the measurement
processing.

Smooth workpiece

Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are simultaneously on the

full section.
Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are NEVER simultaneously
on the full section.
Workpiece with keyway

Surface elaboration coefficient Measurement damping filter for interrupted

surfaces. The processing algorithms of the measurement for interrupted surfaces
foresee determined parameters of the filter, selectable with three different pre-
defined coefficients (1, 2, 3).
The higher damping is obtained with “Surface elaboration coefficient” = 3

“Surface Elaboration Type” = or : each one of the three coefficients (1, 2

and 3) is associated with three different damping speeds.

“Surface Elaboration Type” = : programming the coefficients (1, 2 and 3) causes

the measurement to be held when the contacts are not touching the workpiece.
The measurement is held in different ways for coefficient 1, and for coefficients 2
and 3 (different “Algorithm type” for measure elaboration).

Algorithm type programmed algorithm type.

THRESHOLD – Sampling memory
Four successive measure samples are elaborated (samples distance: 8 ms):
- If the difference between them is more than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is held.
- If the difference between them is less than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is acquired.
HEAD EXT. SYNC. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside. With
the check box enabled, the measurement processing and the integral

272 Viewing the Active Position Programming – Operator Guide

 measurement requested are enabled or disabled according to this signal (for
external synchronism ON the measure is performed)
DERIVATE – Derived memory
The measure trailing edge and leading edge are identified. After the leading edge,
a settling time is awaited before acquiring the measure; it can be programmed in
the sub-page of the technical parameters of the algorithm (Latency Time data).
See chapter 13.2.3.1, on page 273.

Integral Measurement Type type of integral measurement for the period of validity
of the measurement itself.
The following modalities represented by the icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

Processing of the Average value

Max. Settling Time Maximum time passing between the moment the start cycle
is given and the moment when the software starts processing the damped
measurement.

13.2.3.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters

The presence and validity of the parameters appearing on this sub-page depend on
the programming of the “Surface Elaboration Type” and “Algorithm type” parameters.

B
C

Algorithm’s technical parameters sub-page (example)

Surface elaboration type

Surface elaboration parameters (A) No Yes Yes Yes

Measure Times (B) No No No Yes
Filter parameters (C) Yes Yes Yes Yes

– Operator Guide Active Positioning 273

 A Parameters of the surface elaboration algorithm defined upon the application
configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical personnel or Marposs’
personnel).

B Measure times
Latency Time Lapse of time during which the measurement is held to
prevent the instability due to over-elongations in the instant in which the
contacts, exiting the hold time, return onto the workpiece.
Measure Time Measurement acquisition time (minimum lapse of time
during which the contacts touch the workpiece).

C Filter parameters for the surface elaboration algorithm. Parameters defined

upon the application configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical
personnel or Marposs’ personnel).

274 Viewing the Active Position Programming – Operator Guide

13.3. Viewing Active Position Measurement

The View Active Positioning Measurement is To reach this page:

available in both Manual and Automatic
¾ Select Automatic or Manual
modes.
mode then choose one:

Typically, the View Measure Bargraph page ¾ Press

is defined as the Home page (default
screen), see section 4.2.3 “Defining the ¾ Press then
HOME key” on page 32. ¾ Refer to Menu maps on pages
264 and 265.

“ABS View” data valid: based on its programming (measuring head sub-page
- section 13.2.1.1, page 267) the measure visualization (numerical and
graphical) may be:
i • in relative value, with reference to the measure “zero”
• in absolute value, with reference to the programmed nominal value
• in absolute value in the whole measurement range of the head, with
reference to the field center value and without change of scale.

13.3.1. Viewing the Measurement in Manual mode

ƒ Select the corresponding Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).

Electrical Zeroing
Numerical and button (1)
graphical
representation of
measuring head
Numerical value of
measurement
Retraction status
Bargraph of
measurement

Selected Part/Cycle

(1) Not present if the “Multiple electric zeroing” function (section 13.5.3.2” on page
283) is enabled.

Note: Electrical zero from this page, by means of the Zeroing button , is
possible only after a mechanical zeroing has been performed.

– Operator Guide Active Positioning 275

13.3.2. Viewing the Measurement in Automatic Mode

Note: In Automatic mode the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the machine’s
logic.

Self-locking controls
Bargraph of
Measurement zeroing status measurement
(red) not zeroed
(green) zeroed
Numerical value of
measurement
Nominal value of the
measurement (1)
Status of commands:
highlighted box =
Selected Part/Cycle command triggered

Selection controls
Bargraph of
Measurement zeroing status measurement
(red) not zeroed
(green) zeroed

Numerical value of
measurement
Nominal value of the
measurement (1)

Selected Part/Cycle

press

Status of commands:
highlighted box =
command triggered

(1) Not displayed with the “Static self-learning zero shift ” modality, enabled.

276 Viewing Active Position Measurement – Operator Guide

13.4. Viewing the Active Position Zeroing values

The Zero Summary page contains To reach this page:

information about the various zeroing
¾ Select Manual or Automatic
functions of the gauge system and can be
mode then choose one:
viewed in either Manual or Automatic
mode. ¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to Menu maps on pages
264 and 265.

Viewing zeroing summary values in Manual and Automatic modes

Zeroing Value Sum of the accumulated zeroing values from electrically zeroing
the gauge system.
Note: if the modality “Static self-learning zero shift” (see paragraph 13.2.1.2,
page 268) is active, the “Zeroing Value” is not significant anymore, and is
replaced by the following symbols:

(red): system not zeroed

(green): zero-setting performed (system zeroed).

Zero Adjust Sum of the zero adjustments entered during the workpiece
machining.

13.4.1. Viewing the Zeroing values in Manual mode

ƒ Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).

13.4.2. Viewing the Zeroing values in Automatic mode

Note: In Automatic mode the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the machine’s
logic.

– Operator Guide Active Positioning 277

13.5. Active Position Zeroing
13.5.1. Introduction
Zeroing is the process of setting up and adjusting a gauge and a measuring head to a
reference master workpiece.
Types of Zeroing:
Mechanical Zeroing – physically adjusts the fingers/contacts so that they are within
the foreseen measurement range (see section 13.5.2, on page 279).
Electrical Zeroing – adjusting operation to be performed periodically to obtain
maximum accuracy and reliability of the measurements (see section 13.5.3, on
page 280).
• Electric zero-setting shared by the sets – operation to be performed in case
of “Masterless” application (linearization of the measurement range). (see
section 13.5.3.1, on page 282).
• Multiple Electrical Zeroing – this functional feature is present if it was
enabled upon the configuration stage of the application (see section 13.5.3.2,
on page 283).
Zero adjustments – compensations to be done after a post-process inspection of
machined workpieces shows an incorrect size (see section 13.6, on page 285).
Zero Reset – removes the offsets generated by the system during the last electrical
zeroing (see section 13.7, on page 290).
Zeroing Conditions
Static – the master workpiece is NOT rotating.
Dynamic – the master workpiece is rotating and wet by coolant.

When to zero the gauge system?

TYPE OF ZEROING CONDITIONS
Mechanical Zeroing
followed by At initial setup
Electrical Zeroing
At grinder start up
Electrical Zeroing At the beginning of each work shift
After changing Part Type
Zero Adjust When the workpiece size changes
When the zeroing range of the measuring head
Zero Reset has been exceeded.
followed by After replacement of any measuring head
Mechanical Zeroing & component (head, contacts, fingers, etc.)
Electrical Zeroing After any mechanical changes are made to the
gauge system.

278 Active Position Zeroing – Operator Guide

13.5.2. Mechanical Zeroing of Active Position
Mechanical zeroing MUST be done to a master workpiece:
ƒ At initial set up of the gauge system.
ƒ After any mechanical or electrical changes to the gauge system (fingers, contacts,
etc. ...).
ƒ If the allowed zero adjustment range has been exceeded.
Mechanical zeroing must be performed only in Manual mode and statically.

Note: Each measuring head that has been defined MUST be mechanically
zeroed.

Mechanical Zeroing Procedure:

1. Gauge in Manual mode.
2. Select the Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) relevant to be head that
needs zeroing.
3. Eliminate the zeroing offsets, if any:

- press then ;
Enter
- press F5 or highlight the Zero Reset button and press

- A question box appears asking to Reset:: press to highlight “Yes” and

Enter
press

4. Press and to highlight the Mechanical Zeroing page icon.

Numerical and graphic

representation of
Numerical and graphic measuring head
representation of
measurement value

– Operator Guide Active Positioning 279

 5. Position the master workpiece in machine.
6. Adjust the finger/contact assemblies of the measuring head so they can be
inserted into gauging position safely.
The adjustment mode of the finger/contact assemblies depends on the
adjustment method used (with adjustable guides or with contacts).
(pls. see Chapter 22 “Measuring head Mechanical zero-setting” on page 535).

Overhead view
Cable

Measuring Contact does not

head Measuring head touch the master
support

Finger/contact assembly

7. Bring the measuring head to gauging position.

8. Adjust the finger/contact assembly making the contact touch the master until the
measurement value on the upper digital display of the Mechanical Zeroing page
is next to zero.

Measurement value
next to zero

This completes the mechanical setup of the measuring head; now perform an Electric
Zeroing (see section 13.5.3 on page 280).

13.5.3. Electrical Zeroing of Active Position

Electrical Zeroing MUST be done:
ƒ In manual mode on a master workpiece.
ƒ Dynamically, i.e. with the master workpiece rotating and wet by coolant.
ƒ Regularly, usually at the beginning of each work shift and/or when the grinding
wheel is switched on.
Note: Each measuring head that has been defined MUST be electrically zeroed
for each work cycle in which it is used.
Electrical Zeroing Procedure:
1. Gauge in manual mode.

280 Active Position Zeroing – Operator Guide

 2. Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
3. Position the master workpiece in machine (master rotating and wet by coolant).
4. Bring the head to gauging position.

5. Bring up the electric zeroing page: press and then . The electric zero-
setting button is highlighted.

Zeroing value (1)

Electric zeroing
button

Nominal value of the

measurement (2) Measurement value

(2) Not displayed with the “Static self-learning zero shift “ modality enabled.

Enter
6. Press F4 or .

7. A question box appears asking to Zeroing: press to highlight “Yes” and

Enter
press . This completes the Electrical Zeroing.
If no error messages are displayed the electric zero-setting procedure has been
correctly performed.
The Gauge can be switched to Automatic operating mode.

(1)Note: if the modality “Static self-learning zero shift” (see paragraph 13.2.1.2,
page 268) is active, the “Zeroing Value” is not significant anymore, and is
replaced by the following symbols:

(red): system not zeroed

(green): zero-setting performed (system zeroed).

– Operator Guide Active Positioning 281

13.5.3.1. Shared Electric zero-setting (“Masterless” function)
In case of application with “Masterless” function (linearization of the measurement
range / measurement card with DSP-Digital Signal Processing), carry out a
simultaneous zero-setting of all the sets that use the selected measuring head
(shared electric zero-setting).

Mechanical Zeroing
Page Measurement value 1
of the first contact

Measuring head in use

1 Data present only with measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”.

Execution of electric zero-setting shared by the sets

Aborts the electric zero-setting shared by the sets

Zero-setting procedure
• Position the measuring heads (contact T1) and fasten them onto the special
mechanical support, in the most suitable range based on the available sample
workpiece.
• Bring the measuring heads to measuring position on the sample workpiece.

• Press the key to carry out zero-setting. In this way all the sets that use the
measuring head are perfectly zeroed (shared zero-setting).

Note: if a new set is defined, combined with this measuring head, it is necessary
to repeat the zero-setting procedure.

282 Active Position Zeroing – Operator Guide

13.5.3.2. Multiple Electrical Zeroing (Option)
This functional feature is present if it was enabled upon the configuration stage of the
application.
This functional feature allows using up to 32 different zeroing indexes for each set;
this means that it is possible to zero-set on different masters without having to change
the set (all the other programming data being equal). Afterwards it is possible to work
with the corresponding parts by calling out the different zeroing indexes.

Measurement zeroing status

Zeroing index no. (red) not zeroed
(1 to 32)
(green) zeroed

Electric zeroing button

Measurement nominal
value (1)

(1) Not displayed with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning modality”
enabled.

To select the index no. act as follows:

• use to move the cursor to the index number, or to view the desired
Enter
value, then press to confirm.

This functional feature is optimized for the use with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic)
self-learning” modality (see section 13.2.1.2, page 268), but can also be used if such
a modality has not been enabled
“Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning” modality, enabled
After the execution of the mechanical zeroing it is possible, by exploiting the different
zeroing indexes (1 to 32), to carry out an electric zeroing on masters that do not differ
more than the maximum zeroing range without changing the measurement nominal
value (maximum zeroing range: maximum value of the zero shift range +
programmed value of the head zero range).
Changing the measurement nominal value does not cause a reset of the current
zeroing index.

“Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning” modality, NOT enabled

After the execution of an electric zeroing with a determined index, if you want to zero-
set with another index it is necessary to:
• change the zeroing index
• change the measurement nominal value

– Operator Guide Active Positioning 283

 • zero-set.
This procedure is necessary because changing the nominal value causes a reset of
the current zeroing index.
If you change the Field Center value, the current zeroing index is always reset, unlike
the other indexes.
The zero adjust that was set remains valid until you switch between the zeroed
indexes, while it is reset when switching to a index that was not zeroed.

284 Active Position Zeroing – Operator Guide

13.6. Zero Adjustments for Active Position (Option)

Zero adjustments are made when a post- To reach this page:

process inspection of the workpiece shows
¾ Select Manual or Automatic
an incorrect size.
mode then choose one:

¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to the Menu maps on
pages 264 and 265.

Example:
The workpiece is undersize: enter a zero adjustment with the same value but with
opposite sign.

This can be done in either Manual or Automatic mode.

13.6.1. Zero Adjustment in Manual mode
Enter
Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) and press .
Note: Zero adjustments in manual mode affect the next cycle.

Bargraph of Σ value

Part drawing Sum of zero

adjustments (Σ)

Bargraph and numerical

display of measurement
value

Value of zero adjustment

value entered

Zero Adjustment Reset key

Changing Zero Adjustment value

1. Press to highlight the field

2. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

Enter
3. Press .

– Operator Guide Active Positioning 285

 4. The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the top of the
page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments).

Resetting Zero Adjustments

Enter
1. Press F5 or highlight and press . A “Reset?” question box will appear.
Zero Adjustment Reset
key

Enter
2. Press to highlight “Yes” and press . The zero adjustments are reset.

13.6.2. Zero Adjustments in automatic mode

Note: Zero adjustments in automatic mode are made while grinding and affect
the current cycle.

13.6.2.1. Zero adjustment for the current Set (part/cycle)

Bargraph of Σ value

Part drawing Sum of zero adjustments

(Σ)

Bargraph and numerical

display of measurement
value

Zero adjustment
value entered

286 Zero Adjustments for Active Position (Option) – Operator Guide

 Changing the zero adjustment value

1. Press to reach the page

2. Press to highlight the field

3. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

4. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments for the cycle).

13.6.2.2. Zero adjustment with Set (Part/Cycle) selection

Bargraph of Σ value for the

selected cycle
Sum of zero adjustments
(Σ) for the selected cycle
Part drawing

Sum of zero adjustments

(Σ) for the selected Part

Zero adjustment value

entered for the selected cycle Number of selected Part

Zero adjustment value entered

for the selected Part

The zero adjustments entered for the selected Part concern all the cycles using the
same head and belong to the same part. The common correction value is subtracted
in the same way following an electric zero-setting.

– Operator Guide Active Positioning 287

 Selecting the Set (Part/Cycle)

1. Holding down press to highlight the Part/Cycle selection box below.

Current Part Type

Part Number Cycle Number

2. Press or to view the selected Part/Cycle, otherwise press or to

change the Cycle number and or to change the Part number.

3. Press to confirm the Part/Cycle selection made. The program automatically

exits the selection box and returns to the page.

Changing the zero adjustment value for the cycle

1. Press to reach the page

2. Press to highlight the field

3. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

4. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments for the cycle).

5. Press .

Changing the zero adjustment value for the part

1. Press to reach the page

2. Press to highlight the field

288 Zero Adjustments for Active Position (Option) – Operator Guide

 3. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

4. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments for the part and summation of zero adjustments for the cycle).

5. Press .

– Operator Guide Active Positioning 289

13.7. Zero Reset for Active Position

This function removes all offsets generated To reach this page:

by the system during the last electrical
¾ Select Manual mode, then
zeroing (the transducers value is shown).
choose one:

¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to the Menu map on page
265.

It can be selected only in manual mode:

ƒ After mechanical changes to the gauge system.
ƒ When the maximum Zero Adjustment value available has been reached.
Electric Zeroing Reset Procedure:
1. Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
Enter
2. Press F5 or highlight and press . A “Reset?” question box will appear.

Zero Reset

Enter
3. Press to highlight “Yes” and press .

4. Press then to highlight the Mechanical Zeroing page icon.

Mechanical
Zeroing page

The gauge system MUST NOW be Mechanically then Electrically Zeroed (see page
280).

290 Zero Reset for Active Position – Operator Guide

13.8. Changing Control Points Value (Automatic mode)
During the grinding process, it may be necessary to modify the control points value to
reach the optimum cycle.
Note: In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

Note: Changes made to the Control Points affect the current cycle.

To reach this page:

¾ Select Automatic mode, then choose one:

¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to the Menu map on pages 264.

Self-locking controls Selection controls

Enter
1. Press to highlight the control point to be changed and press .

2. Press to highlight the digit that needs changing.

3. Press or to increase or decrease the digit.

4. If more than one digit needs changing, press to highlight the next digit, then
press or to increase or decrease the digit
Enter
5. Press ,
Enter
6. Press to highlight “Apply to measure” and press .
7. The control point value has been changed.

– Operator Guide Active Positioning 291

292 Changing Control Points Value (Automatic mode) – Operator Guide
14. ACTIVE CENTERING
This section covers the ACTIVE CENTERING application and its configured options.
For this guide section the Active Centering application has been programmed as Part
1, Cycle 3.
The active centering cycle can be defined with Parts/Cycles matching the machine’s
logic programming.

14.1. Menu Maps

Operator tasks are performed in both Automatic and Manual modes. Only the menu
map folders with operator functions - Viewing, General Adjustments and Utilities –
are shown on the following pages.

– Operator Guide Active Centering 293

14.1.1. Automatic Mode – Active Centering Menu Map

Viewings General Adjustments

FOLDERS
SUB-FOLDERS

View Measure View zeroings View programming Zero adjustments Modify control
(Option) points
PAGES

Self-locking Zero values Programmed Self-locking

controls Section 14.4.2. values controls
Section 14.2

Zero adjustments
Selection controls (Option) Selection controls
Section 14.6.2
View measure Modify control
Section 14.3 points
Section 14.8

F4 - Self- F4 - Selection
locking controls (2) controls (2)
Section 14.2.2 Section 14.2.2

F5 – Surface elaboration (only if

the measuring function for interrupted
surfaces is enabled
(Section 14.2.3)

(2) The control points type depends on the application configuration

294 Menu Maps – Operator Guide

14.1.2. Manual Mode – Active Centering Menu Map

Utilities
FOLDERS

Measure zeroing Measure setup View

SUB-FOLDERS
PAGES

Mechanical Electrical Zero View Surface type View View.

zeroing zeroing adjustments measure setup (1) Zeroings Programming
Sec. 14.5.2. Sec. 14.5.3 (Option) Sec. 14.3.1 Sec. 14.4.1 Sec. 14.2.
Sec. 14.6.1

F4 - Self- F4 - Selection
locking controls (2) controls (2)
Section 14.2.2 Section 14.2.2

F5 – Surface elaboration
Getting around the program (only if the measuring function for
interrupted surfaces is enabled
Enter (Section 14.2.3)
moves down to the next level.

moves up one level.

(1) This page is not seen if the surface is
moves between folders, sub-folders smooth.
or pages on the same level.

(2) The control points type depends on the application configuration

– Operator Guide Active Centering 295

14.2. Viewing the Active Centering Programming

All the programmed values can be viewed in To reach this page:

either Automatic or Manual mode on the
¾ Select Manual or Automatic
”View Programming” page.
mode
Additional pages can be viewed by using the
¾ Refer to the Menu maps on
F4-F5 function keys or highlighting an option
pages 294 and 295.
Enter
and pressing .

Measurement Parameters

Measurement
data

Automatic Mode Manual Mode

The viewed data concern the selected Part/Cycle.

Note: In manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

14.2.1. Measurement data

Zero shift data

measurement (only with
Measuring head sub-page
measuring heads enabled
for “zero shift”).

Head Number of measuring head combined with the part/cycle selected.

296 Viewing the Active Centering Programming – Operator Guide

 Nominal value Nominal value of measurement (data valid only with measuring
heads enabled for “zero shift”).
Data not valid if the modality “Static self-learning zero shift” is active (see chapter
14.2.1.2 “Zero shift display” on page 298).

Centering Mode Contact centering movement (Release = the workpiece moves far
from the contact; Press = the workpiece moves towards the contact).

Delay Time passing between the “start cycle” signal supplied by the logic
system and the internal enabling sent to gauge for starting the measuring cycle.

14.2.1.1. Measuring head sub-page

Use to move the cursor to (highlight) the box before the head number and press
Enter
.

Measuring head sub-page

Head Number of measuring head combined with the part/cycle selected.

Display resolution for the current set:

• Metric system :1µm / 0,1 µm / 0,01µm
• Imperial/Inches system: 0.00001” / 0.000001” / 0.0000001”

ABS View Measure visualization modality. Non-significant data (underlit) with

measuring heads not enabled for “Zero shift” (measure in relative value).
DISABLED: measure visualization in relative value, with reference to the measure
“zero”.
Nominal Value: measure visualization in absolute value with reference to the
nominal value.
Field Center: measure visualization in absolute value in the whole measurement
range of the head, with reference to the field center value and without change of
scale.
Example

ABS View= DISABLED ABS View= Nominal Value ABS View= Field Center
(40.0000)

– Operator Guide Active Centering 297

14.2.1.2. Zero shift display
Only with measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”.
Enter
Use to highlight the box beside the “Nominal Value” data and press : access
to a sub-page where there are displayed the type and values programmed for the
zero shift used.

The state of the Check Boxes defines the type of zero shift used in the cycle:

Internally calculated zero shift

The check boxes relevant to the other zero shift
modalities are OFF … (modalities not active).
Zero shift internally calculated based on the
nominal measurement value programmed
(Nominal Value) and the programmed value of
the Range Center.

Programmed zero shift

Set the corresponding check box to ON :.
For each contact of the measuring head it was
defined its own “Zero shift” value that is used
regardless the nominal measurement value
(Nominal Value) programmed.

Static self-learning zero shift

When the “Nominal Value” data is underlit
(invalid data) it means that the (static or dynamic)
zero shift self-learning mode is active.
Selecting this modality allows zero-setting in the
whole Zero Shift range, regardless the nominal
measurement value (Nominal Value)
programmed.

Note: the modality “Static self-learning zero shift” is not available in applications with
measure card with DSP (linearization of the measure range / “Masterless”
application).

298 Viewing the Active Centering Programming – Operator Guide

14.2.1.3. Measurement parameters

Controls. The controls may be of either “self-locking” or “selection” (non

self-locking) type: type and number of controls for the application in use
are chosen while configuring the application.
Elaboration of Interrupted surfaces. Icon present only of the
measurement function for interrupted surfaces has been enabled.

– Operator Guide Active Centering 299

14.2.2. Controls
The controls may be of either “self-locking” or “selection” (non self-locking) type:
type and number of controls for the application in use are chosen while configuring
the application.
The gauge is configured with a fixed number of centering controls, including a zero
control (the number of controls is defined while configuring the application).
To change the value or remove a control point see section 14.8 “Changing Control
Points Value (Automatic mode)" on page 321.

Note: In manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ To view the programmed control points, press F4 or highlight and

Enter
press .

Self-locking
controls

Selection
Viewing the control points in controls
Manual Mode

Self-locking
controls

Selection
Viewing the control points in controls
Automatic Mode

300 Viewing the Active Centering Programming – Operator Guide

14.2.3. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces)
The measurement of interrupted surfaces is electrically damped (filtered) and such a
damping shall be linked both to the type of workpiece and rotation speed. Damping
serves to keep the measurement stable when there are interruptions on the
workpiece.
Upon Programming it is possible to define the features of the measurement
processing for interrupted surfaces.
Note: In manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ To view the data relevant to interrupted surfaces measurement press F5 or

Enter
highlight and press .

Surface elaboration
Surface elaboration type coefficient
Integral measurement
type

Sub-page of the
algorithm parameters

Viewing data for interrupted surfaces in Manual mode

Viewing data for interrupted surfaces in Automatic mode

The validity of the data appearing on the page depend on the “Surface Elaboration
Type ” selected (see the table below):

– Operator Guide Active Centering 301

 Surface Elaboration Type

Surface elaboration
Fixed at 1 Yes Yes Yes
coefficient
Integral measurement type No No No Yes
Algorithm type No No No Yes
Max. Settling Time No Yes Yes Yes

Surface Elaboration Type type of workpiece based on the surface features

(interruptions present or not); it will be used for the execution of the measurement
processing.

Smooth workpiece

Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are simultaneously on the

full section.
Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are NEVER simultaneously
on the full section.
Workpiece with keyway

Surface elaboration coefficient Measurement damping filter for interrupted

surfaces. The processing algorithms of the measurement for interrupted surfaces
foresee determined parameters of the filter, selectable with three different pre-
defined coefficients (1, 2, 3).
The higher damping is obtained with “Surface elaboration coefficient” = 3

“Surface Elaboration Type” = or : each one of the three coefficients (1, 2

and 3) is associated with three different damping speeds.

“Surface Elaboration Type” = : programming the coefficients (1, 2 and 3) causes

the measurement to be held when the contacts are not touching the workpiece.
The measurement is held in different ways for coefficient 1, and for coefficients 2
and 3 (different “Algorithm type” for measure elaboration).

Algorithm type programmed algorithm type.

THRESHOLD – Sampling memory
Four successive measure samples are elaborated (samples distance: 8 ms):
- If the difference between them is more than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is held.
- If the difference between them is less than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is acquired.
HEAD EXT. SYNC. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside. With
the check box enabled, the measurement processing and the integral

302 Viewing the Active Centering Programming – Operator Guide

 measurement requested are enabled or disabled according to this signal (for
external synchronism ON the measure is performed)
DERIVATE – Derived memory
The measure trailing edge and leading edge are identified. After the leading edge,
a settling time is awaited before acquiring the measure; it can be programmed in
the sub-page of the technical parameters of the algorithm (Latency Time data).
See chapter 14.2.3.1, on page 303.

Integral Measurement Type type of integral measurement for the period of validity
of the measurement itself.
The following modalities represented by the icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

Processing of the Average value

Max. Settling Time Maximum time passing between the moment the start cycle
is given and the moment when the software starts processing the damped
measurement.

14.2.3.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters

The presence and validity of the parameters appearing on this sub-page depend on
the programming of the “Surface Elaboration Type” and “Algorithm type” parameters.

B
C

Algorithm’s technical parameters sub-page (example)

Surface elaboration type

Surface elaboration parameters (A) No Yes Yes Yes

Measure Times (B) No No No Yes
Filter parameters (C) Yes Yes Yes Yes

– Operator Guide Active Centering 303

 A Parameters of the surface elaboration algorithm defined upon the application
configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical personnel or Marposs’
personnel).

B Measure times
Latency Time Lapse of time during which the measurement is held to
prevent the instability due to over-elongations in the instant in which the
contacts, exiting the hold time, return onto the workpiece.
Measure Time Measurement acquisition time (minimum lapse of time
during which the contacts touch the workpiece).

C Filter parameters for the surface elaboration algorithm. Parameters defined

upon the application configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical
personnel or Marposs’ personnel).

304 Viewing the Active Centering Programming – Operator Guide

14.3. Viewing Active Centering Measurement

The View Active Centering Measurement is To reach this page:

available in both Manual and Automatic
¾ Select Automatic or Manual
modes.
mode then choose one:

Typically, the View Measure Bargraph page ¾ Press

is defined as the Home page (default
screen), see section 4.2.3 “Defining the ¾ Press then
HOME key” on page 32. ¾ Refer to Menu maps on pages
294 and 295

“ABS View” data valid: based on its programming (measuring head sub-page
- section 14.2.1.1, page 297) the measure visualization (numerical and
graphical) may be:
i • in relative value, with reference to the measure “zero”
• in absolute value, with reference to the programmed nominal value
• in absolute value in the whole measurement range of the head, with
reference to the field center value and without change of scale.

14.3.1. Viewing the Measurement in Manual mode

ƒ Select the corresponding Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).

Numerical and graphical Electrical Zeroing

representation of button (1)
measuring head

Retraction status Numerical value of

measurement

Bargraph of
measurement

Selected Part/Cycle

(1) Not present if the “Multiple electric zeroing” function (section 14.5.3.2 on page
314) is enabled.

Note: Electrical zero from this page, by means of the Zeroing button , is
possible only after a mechanical zeroing has been performed.

– Operator Guide Active Centering 305

14.3.2. Viewing the Measurement in Automatic Mode

Note: In Automatic mode the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the machine’s
logic.

Self-locking controls
Bargraph of
measurement
Measurement zeroing status
(red) not zeroed
(green) zeroed
Numerical value of
measurement
Nominal value of the
measurement (1)
Status of commands:
highlighted box =
Selected Part/Cycle command triggered

Selection controls
Bargraph of
measurement
Measurement zeroing status
(red) not zeroed
(green) zeroed
Numerical value of
measurement
Nominal value of the
measurement (1)

Selected Part/Cycle

press

Status of commands:
highlighted box =
command triggered

(1) Not displayed with the “Static self-learning zero shift” modality, enabled.

306 Viewing Active Centering Measurement – Operator Guide

14.4. Viewing the Active Centering Zeroing values

The Zero Summary page contains To reach this page:

information about the various zeroing
¾ Select Manual or Automatic
functions of the gauge system and can be
mode then choose one:
viewed in either Manual or Automatic
mode. ¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to Menu maps on pages
294 and 295.

Viewing Zeroing Summary values in Manual and Automatic Modes

Zeroing Value Sum of the accumulated zeroing values from electrically zeroing
the gauge system.
Note: if the modality “ Static self-learning zero shift” (see paragraph 14.2.1.2,
page 298) is active, the “Zeroing Value” is not significant anymore, and is
replaced by the following symbols:

(red): system not zeroed

(green): zero-setting performed (system zeroed).

Zero Adjust Sum of the zero adjustments entered during the workpiece
machining.

14.4.1. Viewing the Zeroing values in Manual mode

ƒ Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).

14.4.2. Viewing the Zeroing values in Automatic mode

Note: In Automatic mode the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the machine’s
logic.

– Operator Guide Active Centering 307

14.5. Active Centering Zeroing
14.5.1. Introduction
Zeroing is the process of setting up and adjusting a gauge and a measuring head to a
reference master workpiece.
Types of Zeroing:
Mechanical Zeroing – physically adjusts the fingers/contacts so that they are within
the foreseen measurement range (see section 14.5.2, on page 309).
Electrical Zeroing – adjusting operation to be performed periodically to obtain
maximum accuracy and reliability of the measurements (see section 14.5.3, on
page 311).
• Electric zero-setting shared by the sets – operation to be performed in case
of “Masterless” application (linearization of the measurement range). (see
section 14.5.3.1, on page 313).
• Multiple Electrical Zeroing – this functional feature is present if it was
enabled upon the configuration stage of the application (see section 14.5.3.2,
on page 314).
Zero adjustments – compensations to be done after a post-process inspection of
machined workpieces shows an incorrect size (see section 14.6, on page 316).
Zero Reset – removes the offsets generated by the system during the last electrical
zeroing (see section 14.7, on page 320).
Zeroing Conditions
Static – the master workpiece is NOT rotating.
Dynamic – the master workpiece is rotating and wet by coolant.

When to zero the gauge system?

TYPE OF ZEROING CONDITIONS
Mechanical Zeroing
followed by At initial setup
Electrical Zeroing
At grinder start up
Electrical Zeroing At the beginning of each work shift
After changing Part Type
Zero Adjust When the workpiece size changes
When the zeroing range of the measuring head
Zero Reset has been exceeded.
followed by After replacement of any measuring head
Mechanical Zeroing & component (head, contacts, fingers, etc.)
Electrical Zeroing After any mechanical changes are made to the
gauge system.

308 Active Centering Zeroing – Operator Guide

14.5.2. Mechanical Zeroing of Active Centering
Mechanical zeroing MUST be done to a master workpiece:
ƒ At initial set up of the gauge system.
ƒ After any mechanical or electrical changes to the gauge system (fingers, contacts,
etc. ...).
ƒ If the allowed zero adjustment range has been exceeded.
Mechanical zeroing must be performed only in Manual mode and statically.

Note: Each measuring head that has been defined MUST be mechanically
zeroed.

Mechanical Zeroing Procedure:

1. Gauge in Manual mode.
2. Select the Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) relevant to be head that
needs zeroing.
3. Eliminate the zeroing offsets, if any:

- press then ;
Enter
- press F5 or highlight the Zero Reset button and press
Zero Reset

- A question box appears asking to Reset: press to highlight “Yes” and

Enter
press

4. Press and to highlight the Mechanical Zeroing page icon.

Numerical and graphic

view of measurement
value of the second
Numerical and graphic transducer -T2
view of measurement
value of the first
transducer -T1

5. Place the master workpiece into the machine.

– Operator Guide Active Centering 309

 6. Adjust the finger/contact assemblies of the measuring head so they can be
inserted into gauging position safely.
The adjustment mode of the finger/contact assemblies depends on the
adjustment method used (with adjustable guides or with contacts).
(pls. see Chapter 22 “Measuring head Mechanical zero-setting” on page 535).

Over head view Finger/contact assembly-T1

Measuring
head
Contacts
Cable MASTER DO NOT
touch
master
Measuring Measuring
head head
support

Finger/contact assembly –T2

7. Bring the measuring head to gauging position.

8. Adjust the finger/contact assembly (T1) making the contact touch the master
until the measurement value on the upper digital display of the Mechanical
Zeroing page is next to zero (± 10 µ).

Measurement value
next to zero

9. Adjust the finger/contact assembly (T2) making the contact touch the master
until the measurement value on the upper digital display of the Mechanical
Zeroing page is next to zero (± 10 µ).

Measurement value
next to zero

This completes the mechanical setup of the measuring head; now perform an Electric
Zeroing (see section 14.5.3 on page 311).

310 Active Centering Zeroing – Operator Guide

14.5.3. Electrical Zeroing of Active Centering
Electrical Zeroing MUST be done:
ƒ In manual mode on a master workpiece.
ƒ Dynamically, i.e. with the master workpiece rotating and wet by coolant.
ƒ Regularly, usually at the beginning of each work shift and/or when the grinding
wheel is switched on.
Note: Each measuring head that has been defined MUST be electrically zeroed
for each work cycle in which it is used.
Electrical Zeroing Procedure:
1. Gauge in manual mode.
2. Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
3. Position the master workpiece in machine (master rotating and wet by coolant).
4. Bring the head to gauging position

5. Bring up the electric zeroing page: press and then . The electric zero-
setting button is highlighted.

Zeroing value (1)

Electric zeroing
button
Nominal value of the
Measurement value
measurement (2)

(2) Not displayed with the “ Static self-learning zero shift” modality, enabled.

Enter
6. Press F4 or .

7. A question box appears asking to Zeroing: press to highlight “Yes” and

Enter
press . This completes the Electrical Zeroing.

– Operator Guide Active Centering 311

 If no error messages are displayed the electric zero-setting procedure has been
correctly performed.
The Gauge can be switched to Automatic operating mode.

(1)Note: if the modality “Static self-learning zero shift” (see paragraph 14.2.1.2,
page 298) is active, the “Zeroing Value” is not significant anymore, and is
replaced by the following symbols:

(red): system not zeroed

(green): zero-setting performed (system zeroed ).

312 Active Centering Zeroing – Operator Guide

14.5.3.1. Shared Electric zero-setting (“Masterless” function)
In case of application with “Masterless” function (linearization of the measurement
range / measurement card with DSP-Digital Signal Processing), carry out a
simultaneous zero-setting of all the sets that use the selected measuring head
(shared electric zero-setting).

Mechanical Zeroing
Page Measurement value 1
of the first contact

Measuring head in use

1 Data present only with measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”.

Execution of electric zero-setting shared by the sets

Aborts the electric zero-setting shared by the sets

Zero-setting procedure
• Position the measuring heads (contacts T1 / T2) and fasten them onto the special
mechanical support, in the most suitable range based on the available sample
workpiece.
• Bring the measuring heads to measuring position on the sample workpiece.

• Press the key to carry out zero-setting. In this way all the sets that use the
measuring head are perfectly zeroed (shared zero-setting).

Note: if a new set is defined, combined with this measuring head, it is necessary
to repeat the zero-setting procedure.

– Operator Guide Active Centering 313

14.5.3.2. Multiple Electrical Zeroing (Option)
This functional feature is present if it was enabled upon the configuration stage of the
application.
This functional feature allows using up to 32 different zeroing indexes for each set;
this means that it is possible to zero-set on different masters without having to change
the set (all the other programming data being equal). Afterwards it is possible to work
with the corresponding parts by calling out the different zeroing indexes.

Measurement zeroing status

Zeroing index no. (red) not zeroed
(1 to 32)
(green) zeroed

Electric zeroing button

Measurement nominal
value (1)

(1) Not displayed with the “Static zero shift self-learning” modality enabled.

To select the index no. act as follows:

ƒ use to move the cursor to the index number, or to view the desired
Enter
value, then press to confirm.

This functional feature is optimized for the use with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic)
self-learning” modality (see section 14.2.1.2, page 298), but can also be used if such
a modality has not been enabled
“Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning” modality, enabled
After the execution of the mechanical zeroing it is possible, by exploiting the different
zeroing indexes (1 to 32), to carry out an electric zeroing on masters that do not differ
more than the maximum zeroing range without changing the measurement nominal
value (maximum zeroing range: maximum value of the zero shift range +
programmed value of the head zero range).
Changing the measurement nominal value does not cause a reset of the current
zeroing index.

“Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning” modality, NOT enabled

After the execution of an electric zeroing with a determined index, if you want to zero-
set with another index it is necessary to:
• change the zeroing index
• change the measurement nominal value
• zero-set.

314 Active Centering Zeroing – Operator Guide

 This procedure is necessary because changing the nominal value causes a reset of
the current zeroing index.
If you change the Field Center value, the current zeroing index is always reset, unlike
the other indexes.
The zero adjust that was set remains valid until you switch between the zeroed
indexes, while it is reset when switching to a index that was not zeroed.

– Operator Guide Active Centering 315

14.6. Zero Adjustments for Active Centering (Option)

Zero adjustments are made when a post- To reach this page:

process inspection of the workpiece shows
¾ Select Manual or Automatic
an incorrect size.
mode then choose one:

¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to the Menu maps on
pages 294and 295.

Example:
The workpiece is undersize: enter a zero adjustment with the same value but with
opposite sign.

This can be done in either Manual or Automatic mode.

14.6.1. Zero Adjustment in Manual mode
Enter
Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) and press .
Note: Zero adjustments in manual mode affect the next cycle.

Bargraph of Σ value

Part drawing Sum of zero

adjustments (Σ)

Bargraph and numerical

display of measurement
value

Value of zero adjustment

value entered

Zero Adjustment Reset key

Changing Zero Adjustment value

1. Press to highlight the field

2. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

316 Zero Adjustments for Active Centering (Option) – Operator Guide

 Enter
3. Press .
4. The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the top of the
page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments).

Resetting Zero Adjustments

Enter
1. Press F5 or highlight and press . A “Reset?” question box will appear.
Zero Adjustment Reset
key

Enter
2. Press to highlight “Yes” and press . The zero adjustments are reset.

14.6.2. Zero Adjustments in automatic mode

Note: Zero adjustments in automatic mode are made while grinding and affect
the current cycle.

14.6.2.1. Zero adjustment for the current Set (part/cycle)

Bargraph of Σ value

Sum of zero adjustments

(Σ)

Part drawing

Bargraph and numerical

display of measurement
value

Zero adjustment
value entered

– Operator Guide Active Centering 317

 Changing the zero adjustment value

1. Press to reach the page

2. Press to highlight the field

3. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

4. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments for the cycle).

14.6.2.2. Zero adjustment with Set (Part/Cycle) selection

Bargraph of Σ value for the

selected cycle
Sum of zero adjustments
(Σ) for the selected cycle

Sum of zero adjustments

Part drawing
(Σ) for the selected Part

Zero adjustment value

entered for the selected cycle Number of selected Part

Zero adjustment value entered

for the selected Part

The zero adjustments entered for the selected Part concern all the cycles using the
same head and belong to the same part. The common correction value is subtracted
in the same way following an electric zero-setting.

Selecting the Set (Part/Cycle)

1. Holding down press to highlight the Set (Part/Cycle) selection box

below.

318 Zero Adjustments for Active Centering (Option) – Operator Guide

 Current Part Type

Part Number Cycle Number

2. Press or to view the selected Part/Cycle, otherwise press or to

change the Cycle number and or to change the Part number.

3. Press to confirm the Part/Cycle selection made. The program automatically

exits the selection box and returns to the page.
Changing the zero adjustment value for the cycle

1. Press to reach the page

2. Press to highlight the field

3. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

4. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments for the cycle).

5. Press .
Changing the zero adjustment value for the part

1. Press to reach the page

2. Press to highlight the field

3. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

4. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments for the part and summation of zero adjustments for the cycle).

5. Press .

– Operator Guide Active Centering 319

14.7. Zero Reset for Active Centering

This function removes all offsets generated To reach this page:

by the system during the last electrical
¾ Select Manual mode, then
zeroing (the transducers value is shown).
choose one:

¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to the Menu map on page
295.

It can be selected only in manual mode:

ƒ After mechanical changes to the gauge system.
ƒ When the maximum Zero Adjustment value available has been reached.
Electric Zeroing Reset Procedure:
1. Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
Enter
2. Press F5 or highlight and press . A “Reset?” question box will appear.

Enter
3. Press to highlight “Yes” and press .

4. Press then to highlight the Mechanical Zeroing page icon.

Mechanical
Zeroing page

The gauge system MUST NOW be Mechanically then Electrically Zeroed (see page
308).

320 Zero Reset for Active Centering – Operator Guide

14.8. Changing Control Points Value (Automatic mode)
During the grinding process, it may be necessary to modify the control points value to
reach the optimum cycle.
Note: In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

Note: Changes made to the Control Points affect the current cycle.

To reach this page:

¾ Select Automatic mode, then choose one:

¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to the Menu map on pages 294.

Self-locking controls Selection controls

Enter
1. Press to highlight the control point to be changed and press .

2. Press to highlight the digit that needs changing.

3. Press or to increase or decrease the digit.

4. If more than one digit needs changing, press to highlight the next digit, then
press or to increase or decrease the digit
Enter
5. Press ,
Enter
6. Press to highlight “Apply to measure” and press .
7. The control point value has been changed.

– Operator Guide Active Centering 321

322 Changing Control Points Value (Automatic mode) – Operator Guide
15. LENGTH (THICKNESS)
This section covers the measurement application of LENGTH and its configured
options.
For this section of the guide, the length has been programmed as Part Type 1, Cycle
2 and Head 1. This gauging cycle can be defined with different Part Types and Cycle
numbers as long as they match the machine’s logic programming.

15.1. Menu Maps

Operator tasks are performed in both Automatic and Manual modes. Only the menu
map folders with operator functions -Viewing, General Adjustments and Utilities -
are shown on the following pages.

– Operator Guide Length (Thickness) 323

15.1.1. Automatic Mode - Length (Thickness) Menu Map

Viewings General adjustment

FOLDERS
SUB-FOLDERS

View measure View zeroings View programming Zero adjustment Modify controls
(Option)
PAGES

View measure Zero values Programmed Modify controls

Section 15.3.2 Section 15.4 values Section 15.8
Section 15.2

Zero adjustment
(Option)
Section 15.6.2

F5 – Surface elaboration
F4 - Control
(only if the measuring function for
points
interrupted surfaces is enabled
(Section 15.2.3)
(Section 15.2.4)

Options (See the following page ….)

324 Menu Maps – Operator Guide

 Options
Automatic Mode

The optional functions are enabled during the application configuration stage; if the
optional function is available the corresponding icon function key is displayed.
There may be two function keys (F6 and F3) for calling out the optional functions (see
section 15.2.1.5)

TIR - Stock Removal

(Section 15.2.5) (Section 15.2.6)

Pulsed Feedback BCD Feedback

(measurement (measurement
correction). Section 15.2.7 correction). Section 15.2.8

Direct coupling-
Dirac.
Section 15.2.9

Getting around the program

Enter
moves down to the next level.

moves up one level.

moves between folders, sub-folders or pages on the same level..

– Operator Guide Length (Thickness) 325

15.1.2. Manual Mode - Length (Thickness) Menu Map

Utilities
FOLDERS

Measure zeroings Measure Setup View sub-folder

SUB-FOLDERS
PAGIES

Mechanical Electrical Zero View Surface type View View

zeroing zeroing adjustments measure setup(1) zeroings programming
Sec. 15.5.2 Sec. 15.5.3 (Option) Sec. 15.3.1 Sec. 15.4 Sec. 15.2
Sec. 15.6.1

(1) This page is not seen if the surface

is smooth.

F4 - Controls F5 – Surface elaboration

point (only if the measuring function for
(Section 15.2.3) interrupted surfaces is enabled)
(Section 15.2.4)

Options (See the following page ….)

326 Menu Maps – Operator Guide

 Options
Manual Mode

The optional functions are enabled during the application configuration stage; if the
optional function is available the corresponding icon function key is displayed.
There may be two function keys (F6 and F3) for calling out the optional functions (see
section 15.2.1.5)

TIR - Stock Removal

(Section 15.2.5) (Section 15.2.6)

Pulsed Feedback BCD Feedback

(measurement (measurement
correction). Section 15.2.7 correction). Section 15.2.8

Direct coupling-
Dirac.
Section 15.2.9

Getting around the program

Enter
moves down to the next level.

moves up one level.

moves between folders, sub-folders or pages on the same level..

– Operator Guide Length (Thickness) 327

15.2. Viewing the Length (Thickness) Programming

All the programmed values can be viewed in To reach this page:

either Automatic or Manual mode on the
¾ Select Manual or Automatic
”View Programming” page.
mode
Additional pages can be viewed by using the
¾ Refer to the Menu maps on
F3-F6 function keys or highlighting an option
pages 324 and 326.
Enter
and pressing .

Measurement
data

Measurement
type (integral)
data

Automatic mode Manual mode

The data viewed concern the selected Part/Cycle.

Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the machine’s
logic.

15.2.1. Measurement data

Zero shift data (only

with measuring heads
Measuring head sub-page
enabled for “zero
shift”).

Measurement equation
Head Number of measuring head combined with the part/cycle selected.

328 Viewing the Length (Thickness) Programming – Operator Guide

 Nominal value Nominal value of measurement (data valid only with measuring
heads enabled for “zero shift”).
Data not valid if the modality “Static/Dynamic self-learning zero shift” is active (see
chapter 15.2.1.2 “Zero shift display” on page 330).

Master deviation The difference between the nominal value of master and the
gauged measurement of the workpiece used as such.

Delay Time passing between the “start cycle” signal supplied by the logic
system and the internal enabling to gauge for starting the measuring cycle.

15.2.1.1. Measuring head sub-page

Use to move the cursor to (highlight) the box before the head number and press
Enter
.

Measuring head sub-page

Head Number of measuring head combined with the part/cycle selected.

Display resolution for the current set:

• Metric system :1µm / 0,1 µm / 0,01µm
• Imperial/Inches system: 0.00001” / 0.000001” / 0.0000001”

ABS View Measure visualization modality. Non-significant data (underlit) with

measuring heads not enabled for “Zero shift” (measure in relative value).
DISABLED: measure visualization in relative value, with reference to the measure
“zero”.
Nominal Value: measure visualization in absolute value with reference to the
nominal value.
Field Center: measure visualization in absolute value in the whole measurement
range of the head, with reference to the field center value and without change of
scale.
Example

ABS View= DISABLED ABS View= Nominal Value ABS View= Field Center
(40.0000)

– Operator Guide Length (Thickness) 329

15.2.1.2. Zero shift display
Only with measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”.
Enter
Use to highlight the box beside the “Nominal Value” data and press : access
to a sub-page where there are displayed the type and values programmed for the
zero shift used.

The state of the Check Boxes defines the type of zero shift used in the cycle:

Internally calculated zero shift

The check boxes relevant to the other zero shift
modalities are OFF … (modalities not active).
Zero shift internally calculated based on the
nominal measurement value programmed
(Nominal Value) and the programmed value of
the Range Center.

Programmed zero shift

Set the corresponding check box to ON :.
For each contact of the measuring head it was
defined its own “Zero shift” value that is used
regardless the nominal measurement value
(Nominal Value) programmed.

Static/Dynamic self-learning zero shift

When the “Nominal Value” data is underlit
(invalid data) it means that the (static or dynamic)
zero shift self-learning mode is active.
Selecting this modality allows zero-setting in the
whole Zero Shift range, regardless the nominal
measurement value (Nominal Value)
programmed.
Note: the modality “Self-learning zero shift” is not available in applications with
measure card with DSP (linearization of the measure range / “Masterless”
application).

330 Viewing the Length (Thickness) Programming – Operator Guide

15.2.1.3. Measurement equation

Indication of how the measurement is determined (the direction and the sign of the
contacts T1 and T2 determine the measurement value).
T1 «transducer 1 ; T2 « transducer 2.
The following possibilities are available: T1, T1+T2, T1-T2, -T1-T2, T2-T1

15.2.1.4. Measurement Parameters

Controls. The number of control points is set at the configuration
level.
Surface Elaboration. Icon present only if the measurement function
for interrupted surfaces has been enabled.

– Operator Guide Length (Thickness) 331

15.2.1.5. Measurement optional functions (Options)
The optional functions are enabled during the application configuration stage; if the
optional function is available the corresponding function key is displayed.
There may be two function keys (F6 and F3) for calling out the optional functions.

Function keys (F6 and F3) for

measurement optional function

If there are more than two optional functions (more function keys necessary) the F6
and F3 key have dynamic management. The “scroll” icon appears within the
key, beside the associated F# key number, to indicate that there are non-displayed
function keys. Highlight the key and use the and keys to scroll the list of the
measurement optional functions (represented by the relevant icons) available. Select
the optional function by pressing the F6 or F3 function key associated to the icon of
that function.

Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the measurement optional

functions present; an optional function is active when the box to the left of the
corresponding function key is full.
Example:

TIR optional function active

332 Viewing the Length (Thickness) Programming – Operator Guide

15.2.2. Integral measurement

Manual Mode

Type of Enter

integral
measurement
Parameters of the integral measurement

Automatic Mode

Type of Enter

integral
measurement
Parameters of the integral measurement

Type Type of integral measurement. The following modalities represented by the

icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

Processing of the Average value
Processing of the Rolling average

Parameters Access to the sub-page containing the parameters of the integral

Enter
measurement: press to highlight the check-box and press .

With “Type of integral measurement” = , access to the page of the integral

measurement parameters is disabled.

– Operator Guide Length (Thickness) 333

15.2.2.1. Parameters of the integral measurement
Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside. With
the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of the
workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking the
interval between two clock pulses as time.
The data “Meas. RPM” and “Rev. Percentage” are not valid anymore.
Meas. Rpm Number of revolutions/minute of the workpiece for the integral
measurement processing.

Rev. Percentage (1 to 1000%) percentage of the revolution of the part on

which the integral measurement is performed. Default 100% = 1 revolution of the
part.

Estim. Removal Function for estimating the stock removal trend (measurement
trend) up to the end of the cycle (continuous curve processing).
With the check box enabled, successive measurement samples are processed so
as to display a continuous trend of the measurement itself.

334 Viewing the Length (Thickness) Programming – Operator Guide

15.2.3. Control points
The gauge is configured with a fixed number of control points, including a zero point.
To change the value or remove a control point see section 15.8 “Changing Control
Points Value (Automatic mode) " on page 363.
Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the machine’s
logic.

ƒ To view the programmed control points, press F4 or highlight and

Enter
press .

Viewing control points in Manual mode

Viewing control points in Automatic mode

– Operator Guide Length (Thickness) 335

15.2.4. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces)
The measurement of interrupted surfaces is electrically damped (filtered) and such a
damping shall be linked both to the type of workpiece and rotation speed. Damping
serves to keep the measurement stable when there are interruptions on the
workpiece.
Upon Programming it is possible to define the features of the measurement
processing for interrupted surfaces.
Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ To view the data relevant to interrupted surfaces measurement press F5 or

Enter
highlight and press .

Surface elaboration
Surface elaboration type coefficient
Integral measurement
type

Sub-page of the
algorithm parameters

Viewing data for Interrupted Surfaces in Manual mode

Viewing data for Interrupted Surfaces in Automatic mode

The validity of the data appearing on the page depend on the “Surface Elaboration
Type ” selected (see the table below):

336 Viewing the Length (Thickness) Programming – Operator Guide

 Surface Elaboration Type

Surface elaboration
Fixed at 1 Yes Yes Yes
coefficient
Integral measurement type No No No Yes
Algorithm type No No No Yes
Max. Settling Time No Yes Yes Yes
Estim. Removal No Yes Yes No

Surface Elaboration Type type of workpiece based on the surface features

(interruptions present or not); it will be used for the execution of the measurement
processing.

Smooth workpiece

Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are simultaneously on the

full section.
Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are NEVER simultaneously
on the full section.
Workpiece with keyway

Surface elaboration coefficient Measurement damping filter for interrupted

surfaces. The processing algorithms of the measurement for interrupted surfaces
foresee determined parameters of the filter, selectable with three different pre-
defined coefficients (1, 2, 3).
The higher damping is obtained with “Surface elaboration coefficient” = 3

“Surface Elaboration Type” = or : each one of the three coefficients (1, 2

and 3) is associated with three different damping speeds.

“Surface Elaboration Type” = : programming the coefficients (1, 2 and 3) causes

the measurement to be held when the contacts are not touching the workpiece.
The measurement is held in different ways for coefficient 1, and for coefficients 2
and 3 (different “Algorithm type” for measure elaboration).

Algorithm type programmed algorithm type.

THRESHOLD – Sampling memory
Four successive measure samples are elaborated (samples distance: 8 ms):
- If the difference between them is more than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is held.
- If the difference between them is less than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is acquired.

– Operator Guide Length (Thickness) 337

 HEAD EXT. SYNC. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside. With
the check box enabled, the measurement processing and the integral
measurement requested are enabled or disabled according to this signal (for
external synchronism ON the measure is performed)
DERIVATE – Derived memory
The measure trailing edge and leading edge are identified. After the leading edge,
a settling time is awaited before acquiring the measure; it can be programmed in
the sub-page of the technical parameters of the algorithm (Latency Time data).
See chapter 15.2.4.1, on page 338.

Integral Measurement Type type of integral measurement for the period of validity
of the measurement itself.
The following modalities represented by the icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

Processing of the Average value

Max. Settling Time Maximum time passing between the moment the start cycle
is given and the moment when the software starts processing the damped
measurement.

Estim. Removal Function for estimating the stock removal trend (measurement
trend) up to the end of the cycle (continuous curve processing).
With the check box enabled, the measurement damping value does not depend
anymore on the “Surface elaboration coefficient” programmed (1, 2 or 3), but is
automatically calculated at each measurement interruption (interruption of the
workpiece).

15.2.4.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters

The presence and validity of the parameters appearing on this sub-page depend on
the programming of the “Surface Elaboration Type” and “Algorithm type” parameters.

B
C

Algorithm’s technical parameters sub-page (example)

338 Viewing the Length (Thickness) Programming – Operator Guide

 Surface elaboration type

Surface elaboration
No Yes Yes Yes
parameters (A)
Measure Times (B) No No No Yes
Filter parameters (C) Yes Yes Yes Yes

A Parameters of the surface elaboration algorithm defined upon the application

configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical personnel or Marposs’
personnel).

B Measure times
Latency Time Lapse of time during which the measurement is held to
prevent the instability due to over-elongations in the instant in which the
contacts, exiting the hold time, return onto the workpiece.
Measure Time Measurement acquisition time (minimum lapse of time
during which the contacts touch the workpiece).

C Filter parameters for the surface elaboration algorithm. Parameters defined

upon the application configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical
personnel or Marposs’ personnel).

– Operator Guide Length (Thickness) 339

15.2.5. TIR (Total Indicator Reading) (Option)
It allows to determine the eccentricity error of the workpiece to the rotation axis by
using just a contact (T1).
The TIR option can be enabled or disabled upon Programming. The option is enabled
when the small box to the left of the icon is filled in.
Note: In manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to view the TIR measurement
data.

Viewing TIR measurement data in Manual mode

Viewing TIR measurement data in Automatic mode

Tir Control Value beyond which the T.I.R. measurement must be considered
out of tolerance.

Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside. With
the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of the
workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking the
interval between two clock pulses as time.
The datum “Tir Rpm” is not valid anymore.

Tir Rpm Rotation speed of the workpiece during T.I.R. check.

Tir Delay Time delay before taking the T.I.R. measurement.

340 Viewing the Length (Thickness) Programming – Operator Guide

15.2.6. Stock Removal (Option)
It allows to carry out machining cycles in which a predetermined quantity of stock is
removed instead of reaching the zero value.
The “Stock removal” option is enabled or disabled upon Programming, and its type
(ABSOLUTE or PERCENTAGE) is defined. The option is active if the box to the left of
the icon is full.
Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to view the stock removal data.

Viewing data in Manual mode

Viewing data in Automatic mode

Stock Removal Amount amount of stock to be removed.

Stock Removal Percentage percentage of stock to be removed

Note: Stock removal with input from outside (BCD, Binary or Field Bus). The value
displayed (stock value or percentage) represents the last value received. The stock
value is received in Automatic mode, before the cycle, and concerns the selected set.

– Operator Guide Length (Thickness) 341

15.2.7. Pulsed Feed Back (measurement correction) (option)
We call Pulsed Feedback the measurement correction through “zero” shift determined
by pulses supplied through external logic unit.
Such a shift may be both positive and negative based on the type of pulse.
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the “Pulsed Feedback” option and
define its characteristics. The option is enabled when the small box to the left of the
icon is filled in.

Note: In manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the
pulsed Feedback data.

Viewing pulsed Feedback data in Manual mode

Viewing pulsed Feedback data in Automatic mode

Pulse Weight minimum correction value (0 to 50 µm) performed at each pulse.

342 Viewing the Length (Thickness) Programming – Operator Guide

15.2.8. BCD Feed Back (measurement correction) (option)
Correction of the In-Process measurement based on a determined Post-Process
measurement performed with Marposs gauge. The communication between the two
applications takes place through BCD/Binary interface.
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the “BCD Feedback” option and
define its characteristics. The option is enabled when the small box to the left of the
icon is filled in.

Note: In manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the BCD
Feedback data.

Viewing BCD Feedback data in Manual mode

Viewing BCD Feedback data in Automatic mode

Corr. Code request code associated with the measurement you want to correct
(combination of Post-Process measurement and the current In-Process
measurement).

Interface number identification number of the BCD or Binary interface from which
the correction value comes. The maximum number of BCD/Binary interfaces is
fixed to four (IF#1 – IF#4).

– Operator Guide Length (Thickness) 343

15.2.9. Direct coupling - Dirac (Option)
The Dirac application consists in the execution of the In-Process measurement of a
workpiece (typically an outside diameter) directly coupled with the Pre-Process
measurement of another workpiece (typically an inside diameter – hole).
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the “Dirac” option and define its
characteristics. The option is enabled when the small box to the left of the icon is filled
in.

Note: In manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the Dirac
application data.

Viewing Dirac application data in Manual mode

Viewing Dirac application data in Automatic mode

Correction Source the type of source of the correction values for the Dirac
function may be:

INTERNAL the correction comes from a set of the Post-Process type of the
same In-Process measurement CPU card that must carry out the
Dirac application.

EXTERNAL the correction comes from a Post-Process measurement processed

344 Viewing the Length (Thickness) Programming – Operator Guide

 in a measurement CPU card other than the one that handles the In-
Process cycle (Post-Process measurement CPU card belonging to
a different equipment).

Correction Code request code associated with the measurement on which you want
to carry out the Dirac-type correction.
With INTERNAL-type "Correction source": the "Correction code" of the set of the
In-Process type that must carry out the Dirac correction shall be the same of the
associated set of the Post-Process type that determines the correction value.
With EXTERNAL-type "Correction source": the In-Process set that shall perform
the Dirac correction based on the measurement performed on a Post-Process
control plan shall have the same "Correction Code" number of the Post-Process
measurement associated.

Correction Sign selection of sign (+ or -) for the Dirac correction.

+ sign (default): standard Dirac application (Post-Process measurement Æ inside
diameter / In-Process measurement Æ outside diameter)
- sign: special Dirac application (the sign of the correction is inverted).
Example: Post-Process measurement Æ outside diameter / In-Process
measurement Æ inside diameter.

Interface Numberidentification number of the BCD or Binary interface from which the
Dirac correction comes (with EXTERNAL-type "Correction source" only). The
maximum number of BCD/Binary interfaces is fixed to four (IF#1 – IF#4).
The In-Process set that shall perform the Dirac correction based on the
measurement performed on a Post-Process control plan shall have the same
"Interface Number" of the Post-Process measurement associated.

One correction at a cycle Dirac correction used either only once (for just one
cycle) or more times (for more cycles)
: Dirac correction used for an In-Process cycle only
… Dirac correction used for more In-Process cycles

– Operator Guide Length (Thickness) 345

15.3. Viewing Length (Thickness) Measurement

The View Measure Bargraph page is where To reach this page:

the size of the workpiece can be monitored
¾ Select Automatic or Manual
during the grinding cycle in both Manual and
mode then choose one:
Automatic modes.
¾ Press
Typically, the View Measure Bargraph page
is defined as the Home page (default ¾ Press then
screen), see section 4.2.3 “Defining the ¾ Refer to Menu maps on pages
HOME key” on page 32. 324 and 326.

“ABS View” data valid: based on its programming (measuring head sub-page
- section 15.2.1.1, page 329) the measure visualization (numerical and
graphical) may be:
i • in relative value, with reference to the measure “zero”
• in absolute value, with reference to the programmed nominal value
• in absolute value in the whole measurement range of the head, with
reference to the field center value and without change of scale.

15.3.1. Viewing the Measurement in Manual Mode

ƒ Select the corresponding Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).

Electrical Zeroing
Numerical and button (1)
graphical
representation of
measuring head
Numerical value of
measurement
Retraction status
Bargraph of
measurement

Selected Part/Cycle

(1) Not present if the “Multiple electric zeroing” function (section 8.5.3.2 on page 81)
is enabled.

Note: Electrical zero from this page, by means of the Zeroing button , is
possible only after a mechanical zeroing has been performed.

346 Viewing Length (Thickness) Measurement – Operator Guide

15.3.2. Viewing the Measurement in Automatic mode

Note: In Automatic mode the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the machine’s
logic.

Numerical and graphic

representation of
Bargraph of
current measuring
measurement
head

Measurement zeroing status

(red) not zeroed
Numerical value of
(green) zeroed measurement

Nominal value of the

measurement (1) Status of commands:
highlighted box =
command triggered
Current Set (Part/Cycle)

(1) Not displayed with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning” modality,
enabled.

When TIR option is installed, this tab has an additional icon.

Icon indicating additional pages.

Press or to reach the other pages.

Bargraph of measurement
Numerical value of
measurement
TIR
Control point status:
under limit
over limit

– Operator Guide Length (Thickness) 347

15.4. Viewing the Length (Thickness) Zeroing values

The Zero Summary page contains To reach this page:

information about the various zeroing
¾ Select Manual or Automatic
functions of the gauge system and can be
mode then choose one:
viewed in either Manual or Automatic
mode. ¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to Menu maps on pages
324 and 326.

Viewing Zeroing values in Manual and Automatic Modes

Zeroing Value Sum of the accumulated zeroing values from electrically zeroing
the gauge system.
Note: if the modality “Self-learning zero shift” (see chapter 15.2.1.2 “Zero shift
display” on page 330) is active, the “Zeroing Value” is not significant
anymore, and is replaced by the following symbols:

(red): system not zeroed

(green): zero-setting performed (system zeroed).

Master Deviation Value programmed to indicate the difference between the size of
the sample part and the final size you want to obtain.

Zero Adjust Sum of the zero corrections given through keyboard during the part
machining.

Dirac correction value of the Dirac correction (it appears if the "Direct
coupling/Dirac" option is enabled). The Dirac correction value is reset for all the
sets provided with the Dirac option in the following cases:
at the electronic unit power on
• in the Automatic/Manual switching
• during zero-setting or zero-setting reset

Measure Feedback Measure correction value (it appears if the "Feed Back –
measure correction" option is enabled). The measure Feedback value is reset
whenever the zero-setting is reset.

348 Viewing the Length (Thickness) Zeroing values – Operator Guide

15.4.1. Viewing the Zeroing values in Manual mode
ƒ Select the Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).

15.4.2. Viewing the Zeroing values in Automatic mode

Note: In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the

machine’s logic.

– Operator Guide Length (Thickness) 349

15.5. Zeroing length (Thickness)
15.5.1. Introduction
Zeroing is the process of setting up and adjusting the gauge and a measuring head to
a master workpiece to assure that post-process inspection of the workpiece yields the
desired final dimensions.
Types of Zeroing:
Mechanical Zeroing – physically adjusts the fingers/contacts so that they are within
the foreseen measurement range (see section 15.5.2 on page 351).
Electrical Zeroing – adjustment operation to be performed periodically to obtain the
maximum accuracy and reliability of measurements on the workpiece (see section
15.5.3 on page 353).
• Electric zero-setting shared by the sets – operation to be performed in
case of “Masterless” application (linearization of the measurement range).
(see section 15.5.3.1 on page 355).
• Multiple Electrical Zeroing – this functional feature is present if it was
enabled upon the configuration stage of the application (see section 15.5.3.2,
on page 356).
Zero Adjustments – Corrections made when after a post-process inspection of the
workpieces small differences in size are found (see section 15.6 on page 358).
Zero Resets – removes the offsets generated by the system during the last electrical
zeroing (see section 15.7 on page 362).
Zeroing Conditions
Static – The master workpiece is NOT rotating.
Dynamic – The master workpiece is rotating and wet by the coolant.

When to zero the gauge system?

TYPE OF ZEROING CONDITIONS
Mechanical Zeroing
followed by At initial setup
Electrical Zeroing
At grinder start up
Electrical Zeroing At the beginning of each work shift
After changing Part Type

Zero Adjust When the workpiece size changes

When the zeroing range of the measuring head
Zero Reset has been exceeded.
followed by After replacement of any measuring head
Mechanical Zeroing & component (head, contacts, fingers, etc.)
Electrical Zeroing After any mechanical changes are made to the
gauge system.

350 Zeroing length (Thickness) – Operator Guide

15.5.2. Mechanical Zeroing of Length
Mechanical zeroing MUST be done to a master workpiece:
ƒ At initial set up of the gauge system.
ƒ If the allowed zero adjustment range has been exceeded.
ƒ After any mechanical or electrical changes to the gauge system (fingers, contacts,
...).
Mechanical zeroing must be performed only in Manual mode and statically.
Note: Each measuring head that has been defined MUST be Mechanically
Zeroed.
Mechanical Zeroing of a measuring head:
1. Gauge in Manual Mode.
2. Select the Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) relevant to the head to
be zeroed.
3. Eliminate any zeroing offsets:

- press then ;
Enter
- press F5 or highlight the Zero Reset button and press .

- a question box appears asking to Reset: press to highlight “Yes” and press
Enter
.

4. Press then to highlight the Mechanical Zeroing page icon.

Numerical and graphic

Numerical and graphic view of measurement
view of measurement value of the second
value of the first transducer -T2
transducer -T1

5. Place the master workpiece into the machine.

6. Adjust the finger/contact assemblies of the measuring head so they can be
inserted into gauging position safely.

– Operator Guide Length (Thickness) 351

 The adjustment mode of the finger/contact assemblies depends on the
adjustment method used (with adjustable guides or with contacts).
(pls. see Chapter 22 “Measuring head Mechanical zero-setting” on page 535).

Finger/contact assembly – T1

Measuring head

Contacts
Cable DO NOT
touch master

Measuring Measuring head

head support
Finger/contact assembly – T2

7. Bring the measuring head to gauging position.

8. Adjust the finger/contact assembly (T1) making the contact touch the master
until the measurement value on the upper digital display of the Mechanical
Zeroing page is next to zero (± 10 µ).

Measurement value
next to zero.

9. Adjust the finger/contact assembly (T2) making the contact touch the master
until the measurement value on the upper digital display of the Mechanical
Zeroing page is next to zero (± 10 µ).

Measurement value
next to zero

This completes the mechanical setup of the measuring head; now perform an Electric
Zeroing (see section 15.5.3 on page 353).

352 Zeroing length (Thickness) – Operator Guide

15.5.3. Electrical Zeroing of Length
Electrical Zeroing MUST be done:
ƒ In manual mode on a master workpiece.
ƒ Dynamically, i.e. with the master workpiece rotating and wet by coolant.
ƒ Regularly, usually at the beginning of each work shift and/or when the grinding
wheel is switched on.
Note: Each measuring head that has been defined MUST be electrically zeroed
for each work cycle in which it is used.

Electrical Zeroing Procedure:

1. Gauge in manual mode.
2. Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
3. Position the master workpiece in machine (master workpiece rotating and wet by
coolant).
4. Bring the head to gauging position.

5. Bring up the electric zeroing page: press and then . The electric zero-
setting button is highlighted.

Zeroing value (1)

Electric zeroing
button
Master deviation
Nominal value of the Measurement value
measurement (2)

(2) Not displayed with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning modality”
enabled.

Enter
6. Press F4 or . A question box appears for zeroing confirmation.

– Operator Guide Length (Thickness) 353

 Enter
7. Press to highlight “Yes” and press .Electrical zeroing is completed.
If no error messages are displayed the electric zero-setting procedure has been
correctly performed.
The Gauge can be switched to Automatic operating mode.

Note: Electric zero-setting with integral measurement.

Once completed the electric zero-setting procedure the measurement is
still displayed (graphic and numerical display) dynamically (viewing of the
measurement variation during the part rotation).

(1)Note: if the modality “Self-learning zero shift” (see chapter 15.2.1.2 “Zero shift
display” on page 330) is active, the “Zeroing Value” is not significant
anymore, and is replaced by the following symbols:

(red): system not zeroed

(green): zero-setting performed (system zeroed).

354 Zeroing length (Thickness) – Operator Guide

15.5.3.1. Shared Electric zero-setting (“Masterless” function)
In case of application with “Masterless” function (linearization of the measurement
range / measurement card with DSP-Digital Signal Processing), carry out a
simultaneous zero-setting of all the sets that use the selected measuring head
(shared electric zero-setting).

Mechanical Zeroing
Page Measurement value 1
of the first contact

Measurement value of
the second contact
Measuring head in use

1 Data present only with measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”.

Execution of electric zero-setting shared by the sets

Aborts the electric zero-setting shared by the sets

Zero-setting procedure
• Position the measuring heads (contacts T1 / T2) and fasten them onto the special
mechanical support, in the most suitable range based on the available sample
workpiece.
• Bring the measuring heads to measuring position on the sample workpiece.

• Press the key to carry out zero-setting. In this way all the sets that use the
measuring head are perfectly zeroed (shared zero-setting).

Note: if a new set is defined, combined with this measuring head, it is necessary
to repeat the zero-setting procedure.

– Operator Guide Length (Thickness) 355

15.5.3.2. Multiple Electrical Zeroing (Option)
This functional feature is present if it was enabled upon the configuration stage of the
application.
This functional feature allows using up to 32 different zeroing indexes for each set;
this means that it is possible to zero-set on different masters without having to change
the set (all the other programming data being equal). Afterwards it is possible to work
with the corresponding parts by calling out the different zeroing indexes.

Measurement zeroing status

Zeroing index no. (red) not zeroed
(1 to 32)
(green) zeroed

Electric zeroing button

Measurement nominal
value (1)

(1) Not displayed with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning” modality,
enabled.

To select the index no. act as follows:

ƒ use to move the cursor to the index number, or to view the desired
Enter
value, then press to confirm.

This functional feature is optimized for the use with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic)
self-learning” modality (see section 15.2.1.2, page 330), but can also be used if such
a modality has not been enabled
“Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning” modality, enabled
After the execution of the mechanical zeroing it is possible, by exploiting the different
zeroing indexes (1 to 32), to carry out an electric zeroing on masters that do not differ
more than the maximum zeroing range without changing the measurement nominal
value (maximum zeroing range: maximum value of the zero shift range +
programmed value of the head zero range).
Changing the measurement nominal value does not cause a reset of the current
zeroing index.

“Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning” modality, NOT enabled

After the execution of an electric zeroing with a determined index, if you want to zero-
set with another index it is necessary to:
ƒ change the zeroing index
ƒ change the measurement nominal value

356 Zeroing length (Thickness) – Operator Guide

 ƒ zero-set.
This procedure is necessary because changing the nominal value causes a reset of
the current zeroing index.
If you change the Field Center value, the current zeroing index is always reset, unlike
the other indexes.
The zero adjust that was set remains valid until you switch between the zeroed
indexes, while it is reset when switching to a index that was not zeroed.

– Operator Guide Length (Thickness) 357

15.6. Zero Adjustments for Length (Thickness) (Option)

Zero adjustments are made when a post- To reach this page:

process inspection of the workpiece shows
¾ Select Manual or Automatic
an incorrect size.
mode then choose one:

¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to the Menu maps on
pages 324 and 326.

Example:
The workpiece is undersize: enter a zero adjustment with the same value but with
opposite sign.
APPLICATION PART TOO SMALL PART TOO BIG
OUTSIDE measure Add Subtract
INSIDE measure Subtract Add

This can be done in either Manual or Automatic mode.

15.6.1. Zero Adjustment in Manual mode
Enter
Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) and press .
Note: Zero adjustments in manual mode affect the next cycle.

Bargraph of Σ value

Part drawing Sum of zero

adjustments (Σ)

Bargraph and numerical

display of measurement
value

Value of zero adjustment

value entered

Zero Adjustment Reset key

Changing Zero Adjustment value

1. Press to highlight the field

358 Zero Adjustments for Length (Thickness) (Option) – Operator Guide

 2. Press or to increase or decrease the value.
Enter
3. Press .
4. The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the top of the
page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments).

Resetting Zero Adjustments

Enter
1. Press F5 or highlight and press . A “Reset?” question box will appear.
Zero
adjustments reset

Enter
2. Press to highlight “Yes” and press . The zero adjustments are reset.

15.6.2. Zero Adjustments in automatic mode

Note: Zero adjustments in automatic mode are made while grinding and affect
the current cycle.

15.6.2.1. Zero adjustment for the current Set (part/cycle)

Bargraph of Σ value

Sum of zero adjustments

Part drawing
(Σ)

Bargraph and numerical

display of measurement
value
Zero adjustment
value entered

Changing the zero adjustment value

1. Press to reach the page

– Operator Guide Length (Thickness) 359

 2. Press to highlight the field

3. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

4. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments for the cycle).

15.6.2.2. Zero adjustment with Set (Part/Cycle) selection

Bargraph of Σ value for the

selected cycle
Sum of zero adjustments
(Σ) for the selected cycle
Part drawing

Sum of zero adjustments

(Σ) for the selected Part

Zero adjustment value

entered for the selected
cycle

Zero adjustment value entered Number of selected Part

for the selected Part

The zero adjustments entered for the selected Part concern all the cycles using the
same head and belong to the same part. The common correction value is subtracted
in the same way following an electric zero-setting.

Selecting the Set (Part/Cycle)

1. Holding down press to highlight the Part/Cycle selection box below.

Current Part Type

Part Number Cycle Number

360 Zero Adjustments for Length (Thickness) (Option) – Operator Guide

 2. Press or to view the selected Part/Cycle, otherwise press or to
change the Cycle number and or to change the Part number.

3. Press to confirm the Part/Cycle selection made. The program automatically

exits the selection box and returns to the page.

Changing the zero adjustment value for the cycle

1. Press to reach the page

2. Press to highlight the field

3. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

4. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments for the cycle).

5. Press .

Changing the zero adjustment value for the part

1. Press to reach the page

2. Press to highlight the field

3. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

4. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments for the part).

5. Press .

– Operator Guide Length (Thickness) 361

15.7. Zero Reset for Length (Thickness)

This function removes all offsets generated To reach this page:

by the system during the last electrical
¾ Select Manual mode, then
zeroing (the transducers value is shown).
choose one:

¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to the Menu map on page
326.

It can be selected only in manual mode:

ƒ After mechanical changes to the gauge system.
ƒ When the maximum Zero Adjustment value available has been reached.
Electric Zeroing Reset Procedure:
1. Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
Enter
2. Press F5 or highlight and press . A “Reset?” question box will appear.

Enter
3. Press to highlight “Yes” and press .

4. Press and to highlight the Mechanical Zeroing page icon.

Mechanical
Zeroing page

The gauge system MUST NOW be Mechanically then Electrically Zeroed (see page
350).

362 Zero Reset for Length (Thickness) – Operator Guide

15.8. Changing Control Points Value (Automatic mode)
During the grinding process, it may be necessary to modify the control points value to
reach the optimum cycle.
Note: In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

Note: Changes made to the Control Points affect the current cycle.

To reach this page:

¾ Select Automatic mode, then
choose one:

¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to the Menu map on page
324

Enter
1. Press to highlight the control point to be changed and press .

2. Press to highlight the digit that needs changing.

3. Press or to increase or decrease the digit.

4. If more than one digit needs changing, press to highlight the next digit, then
press or to increase or decrease the digit
Enter
5. Press ,

Enter
6. Press to highlight “Apply to measure” and press .
7. The control point value has been changed.

– Operator Guide Length (Thickness) 363

364 Changing Control Points Value (Automatic mode) – Operator Guide
16. EXAR
This section covers the measurement application EXAR and its configured options.

Note: The information given in this section are valid also per EXAR applications of
single measurement (one measuring head) or two simultaneous
measurements (two measuring heads).
For more complete information, from now on the application description will
refer to an EXAR application with two simultaneous measurements.
For this section of the guide, the gauging cycle has been programmed as Part Type
1, Cycle 1 and Head 1. This gauging cycle can be defined with different Part Types
and Cycle numbers as long as they match the machine’s logic programming.

16.1. Menu Maps

Operator tasks are performed in both Automatic and Manual modes. Only the menu
map folders with operator functions -Viewing, General Adjustments and Utilities -
are shown on the following pages.

– Operator Guide Exar 365

16.1.1. Automatic Mode - Exar Menu Map

Viewings General adjustments

FOLDERS
SUB-FOLDERS

View measure View zeroings View programming

PAGES

Measurement Zero value Programmed Zero adjust

bargraph Section 16.4 values (Option)
Section 16.3.2 Section 16.2 Section 16.6.2

F4 - Control points
(Section 16.2.4)

Options (See the following page ….)

366 Menu Maps – Operator Guide

 Options
Automatic Mode

The optional functions are enabled during the application configuration stage; if the
optional function is available the corresponding icon function key is displayed.
There may be two function keys (F6 and F3) for calling out the optional functions (see
section 16.2.1.4)

Pulsed Feedback
- Stock Removal (measurement
(Section 16.2.5) correction). Section 16.2.6

BCD Feedback Direct coupling-

(measurement Dirac.
correction). Section 16.2.7 Section 16.2.8

Getting around the program

Enter
moves down to the next level.

moves up one level.

moves between folders, sub-folders or pages on the same level..

– Operator Guide Exar 367

16.1.2. Manual Mode - Exar Menu Map

Utilities
FOLDERS

Measure zeroing Measure setup View

SUB-FOLDERS
PAGES

Mechanical Electrical Zero View Page NOT View View

zeroing zeroing adjustments measure available Zeroings Programming
Sec. 16.5.2 Sec. 16.5.3 (Option) Sec. 16.2.5 Sec. 16.4 Sec. 16.2
Sec. 16.6.1

F4 - Controls points
(Section 16.2.4)

Options (See the following page ….)

368 Menu Maps – Operator Guide

 Options
Manual Mode

The optional functions are enabled during the application configuration stage; if the
optional function is available the corresponding icon function key is displayed.
There may be two function keys (F6 and F3) for calling out the optional functions (see
section 16.2.1.4)

Pulsed Feedback
- Stock Removal (measurement
(Section 16.2.5) correction).
Section 16.2.6

BCD Feedback Direct coupling-

(measurement Dirac.
correction). Section 16.2.7 Section 16.2.8

Getting around the program

Enter
moves down to the next level.

moves up one level.

moves between folders, sub-folders or pages on the same level..

– Operator Guide Exar 369

16.2. Viewing the Exar Programming

All the programmed values can be viewed in To reach this page:

either Automatic or Manual mode on the
¾ Select Manual or Automatic
”View Programming” page.
mode
Additional pages can be viewed by using the
¾ Refer to the Menu maps on
F3-F6 function keys or highlighting an option
pages 366 and 368.
Enter
and pressing .

Measurement
data

Synchronization
type of
measurement
Measurement type
Automatic mode Manual mode

The data viewed concern the selected Part/Cycle.

Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the machine’s
logic.

16.2.1. Measurement data

Zero shift data (only with

measuring heads
enabled for “zero shift”) Measuring head sub-page

Head Number of measuring head combined with the Set (Part/Cycle) selected.

Nominal value Nominal value of measurement (data valid only with measuring
heads enabled for “zero shift”).

370 Viewing the Exar Programming – Operator Guide

 Data not valid if the modality “Static self-learning zero shift” is active (see chapter
16.2.1.2 “Zero shift display” on page 372).
Master deviation The difference between the nominal value of master and the
gauged measurement of the workpiece used as such.

Delay Time passing between the “start cycle” signal supplied by the logic
system and the internal enabling to gauge for starting the measuring cycle.

16.2.1.1. Measuring head sub-page

Use to move the cursor to (highlight) the box before the head number and press
Enter
.

Measuring head sub-page

Head Number of measuring head combined with the Set (Part/Cycle) selected.

Display resolution for the current set:

• Metric system :1µm / 0,1 µm / 0,01µm
• Imperial/Inches system: 0.00001” / 0.000001” / 0.0000001”

ABS View Measure visualization modality. Non-significant data (underlit) with

measuring heads not enabled for “Zero shift” (measure in relative value).
DISABLED: measure visualization in relative value, with reference to the measure
“zero”.
Nominal Value: measure visualization in absolute value with reference to the
nominal value.
Field Center: measure visualization in absolute value in the whole measurement
range of the head, with reference to the field center value and without change of
scale.

– Operator Guide Exar 371

16.2.1.2. Zero shift display
Only with measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”.
Enter
Use to highlight the box beside the “Nominal Value” data and press : access
to a sub-page where there are displayed the type and values programmed for the
zero shift used.

The state of the Check Boxes defines the type of zero shift used in the cycle:

Internally calculated zero shift

The check boxes relevant to the other zero shift
modalities are OFF … (modalities not active).
Zero shift internally calculated based on the
nominal measurement value programmed
(Nominal Value) and the programmed value of
the Range Center.

Programmed zero shift

Set the corresponding check box to ON :.
For each contact of the measuring head it was
defined its own “Zero shift” value that is used
regardless the nominal measurement value
(Nominal Value) programmed.

Static self-learning zero shift

When the “Nominal Value” data is underlit
(invalid data) it means that the (static or dynamic)
zero shift self-learning mode is active.
Selecting this modality allows zero-setting in the
whole Zero Shift range, regardless the nominal
measurement value (Nominal Value)
programmed.
Note: the modality “Self-learning zero shift” is not available in applications with
measure card with DSP (linearization of the measure range / “Masterless”
application).

372 Viewing the Exar Programming – Operator Guide

16.2.1.3. Measurement Parameters
Controls. The number of control points is set at the configuration
level.

16.2.1.4. Measurement optional functions (Options)

The optional functions are enabled during the application configuration stage; if the
optional function is available the corresponding function key is displayed.
There may be two function keys (F3 and F6) for calling out the optional functions.

Function keys (F6 and F3) for

measurement optional function

If there are more than two optional functions (more function keys necessary) the F6
and F3 key have dynamic management. The “scroll” icon appears within the
key, beside the associated F# key number, to indicate that there are non-displayed
function keys. Highlight the key and use the and keys to scroll the list of the
measurement optional functions (represented by the relevant icons) available. Select
the optional function by pressing the F6 or F3 function key associated to the icon of
that function.

Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the measurement optional

functions present; an optional function is active when the box to the left of the
corresponding function key is full.
Example:

Stock removal function active

– Operator Guide Exar 373

16.2.2. Measurement synchronization mode

Type Type of measurement synchronization. The following options represented

by the icons are available:

Internal synchronization. The synchronism is internal and the

measurement is updated at each complete rotation/oscillation of the table;
the measurement updating rate (table rotation/oscillation speed) is
defined through the datum “Frequency”.
External synchronization. The synchronism is supplied from outside
through a logic input signal.

Frequency (with internal programming only). Table rotation/oscillation speed

for measurement updating (1 to 999 passages per minute).

16.2.3. Measurement type

Function enabled only in case of application with two simultaneous measurements
( ).

The following are available:

Max (1-2) Max1 – Max2

374 Viewing the Exar Programming – Operator Guide

16.2.4. Control points
The gauge is configured with a fixed number of control points, including a zero point.

Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the machine’s
logic.

ƒ To view the programmed control points, press F4 or highlight and

Enter
press .

Viewing control points in Manual mode

Viewing control points in Automatic mode

– Operator Guide Exar 375

16.2.5. Stock Removal (Option)
It allows to carry out machining cycles in which a predetermined quantity of stock is
removed instead of reaching the zero value.
The “Stock removal” option is enabled or disabled upon Programming, and its type
(ABSOLUTE or PERCENTAGE) is defined. The option is active if the box to the left of
the icon is full.
Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle). (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to view the stock removal data.

Viewing data in Manual mode

Viewing data in Automatic mode

Stock Removal Amount Amount of stock to be removed.

Stock Removal Percentage Percentage of stock to be removed

Note: Stock removal with input from outside (BCD, Binary or Field Bus). The value
displayed (stock value or percentage) represents the last value received. The stock
value is received in Automatic mode, before the cycle, and concerns the selected set.

376 Viewing the Exar Programming – Operator Guide

16.2.6. Pulsed Feed Back (measurement correction) (option)
We call Pulsed Feedback the measurement correction through “zero” shift determined
by pulses supplied through external logic unit.
Such a shift may be both positive and negative based on the type of pulse.
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the “Pulsed Feedback” option and
define its characteristics. The option is enabled when the small box to the left of the
icon is filled in.

Note: In manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the
pulsed Feedback data.

Viewing pulsed Feedback data in Manual mode

Viewing pulsed Feedback data in Automatic mode

Pulse Weight minimum correction value (0 to 50 µm) performed at each pulse.

– Operator Guide Exar 377

16.2.7. BCD Feed Back (measurement correction) (option)
Correction of the In-Process measurement based on a determined Post-Process
measurement performed with Marposs gauge. The communication between the two
applications takes place through BCD/Binary interface.
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the “BCD Feedback” option and
define its characteristics. The option is enabled when the small box to the left of the
icon is filled in.

Note: In manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the BCD
Feedback data.

Viewing BCD Feedback data in Manual mode

Viewing BCD Feedback data in Automatic mode

Corr. Code request code associated with the measurement you want to correct
(combination of Post-Process measurement and the current In-Process
measurement).

Interface number identification number of the BCD or Binary interface from which
the correction value comes. The maximum number of BCD/Binary interfaces is
fixed to four (IF#1 – IF#4).

378 Viewing the Exar Programming – Operator Guide

16.2.8. Direct coupling - Dirac (Option)
The Dirac application consists in the execution of the In-Process measurement of a
workpiece (typically an outside diameter) directly coupled with the Pre-Process
measurement of another workpiece (typically an inside diameter – hole).
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the “Dirac” option and define its
characteristics. The option is enabled when the small box to the left of the icon is filled
in.

Note: In manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the Dirac
application data.

Viewing Dirac application data in Manual mode

Viewing Dirac application data in Automatic mode

Correction Source the type of source of the correction values for the Dirac
function may be:

INTERNAL the correction comes from a set of the Post-Process type of the
same In-Process measurement CPU card that must carry out the
Dirac application.

EXTERNAL the correction comes from a Post-Process measurement processed

– Operator Guide Exar 379

 in a measurement CPU card other than the one that handles the In-
Process cycle (Post-Process measurement CPU card belonging to
a different equipment).

Correction Code request code associated with the measurement on which you want
to carry out the Dirac-type correction.
With INTERNAL-type "Correction source": the "Correction code" of the set of the
In-Process type that must carry out the Dirac correction shall be the same of the
associated set of the Post-Process type that determines the correction value.
With EXTERNAL-type "Correction source": the In-Process set that shall perform
the Dirac correction based on the measurement performed on a Post-Process
control plan shall have the same "Correction Code" number of the Post-Process
measurement associated.

Correction Sign selection of sign (+ or -) for the Dirac correction.

+ sign (default): standard Dirac application (Post-Process measurement Æ inside
diameter / In-Process measurement Æ outside diameter)
- sign: special Dirac application (the sign of the correction is inverted).
Example: Post-Process measurement Æ outside diameter / In-Process
measurement Æ inside diameter.

Interface Numberidentification number of the BCD or Binary interface from which the
Dirac correction comes (with EXTERNAL-type "Correction source" only). The
maximum number of BCD/Binary interfaces is fixed to four (IF#1 – IF#4).
The In-Process set that shall perform the Dirac correction based on the
measurement performed on a Post-Process control plan shall have the same
"Interface Number" of the Post-Process measurement associated.

One correction at a cycle Dirac correction used either only once (for just one
cycle) or more times (for more cycles)
: Dirac correction used for an In-Process cycle only
… Dirac correction used for more In-Process cycles

380 Viewing the Exar Programming – Operator Guide

16.3. Viewing Exar Measurement

The View Measure Bargraph page is where To reach this page:

the size of the workpiece can be monitored
¾ Select Automatic or Manual
during the grinding cycle in both Manual and
mode then choose one:
Automatic modes.
¾ Press
Typically, the View Measure Bargraph page
is defined as the Home page (default ¾ Press then
screen), see section 4.2.3 “Defining the ¾ Refer to Menu maps on pages
HOME key” on page 32. 366 and 368.

“ABS View” data valid: based on its programming (measuring head sub-page
- section 16.2.1.1, page 371) the measure visualization (numerical and
graphical) may be:
i • in relative value, with reference to the measure “zero”
• in absolute value, with reference to the programmed nominal value
• in absolute value in the whole measurement range of the head, with
reference to the field center value and without change of scale.

16.3.1. Viewing the Measurement in Manual Mode

ƒ Select the corresponding Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).

Electrical Zeroing
Numerical and button (1)
graphical
representation of
measuring head
Numerical value of
measurement
Retraction status
Bargraph of
measurement

Selected Part/Cycle

(1) Not present if the “Multiple electric zeroing” function (section 16.5.3.2 on page
390) is enabled.

Note: Electrical zero from this page, by means of the Zeroing button , is
possible only after a mechanical zeroing has been performed.

– Operator Guide Exar 381

16.3.2. Viewing the Measurement in Automatic mode

Note: In Automatic mode the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the machine’s
logic.

Numerical and graphic

representation of Bargraph of
current measuring measurement
head

Measurement zeroing status

(red) not zeroed
Numerical value of
(green) zeroed
measurement
Nominal value of the
measurement (1)
Status of commands:
highlighted box =
command triggered
Current Set (Part/Cycle)

(1) Not displayed with the “Static self-learning zero shift” modality enabled.

382 Viewing Exar Measurement – Operator Guide

16.4. Viewing the Exar Zeroing values

The Zero Summary page contains To reach this page:

information about the various zeroing
¾ Select Manual or Automatic
functions of the gauge system and can be
mode then choose one:
viewed in either Manual or Automatic
mode. ¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to Menu maps on pages
366 and 368.

Viewing Zeroing values in Manual and Automatic Modes

Zeroing Value Sum of the accumulated zeroing values from electrically zeroing
the gauge system.
Note: if the modality “Self-learning zero shift” (see chapter 16.2.1.2 “Zero shift
display” on page 372) is active, the “Zeroing Value” is not significant
anymore, and is replaced by the following symbols:

(red): system not zeroed

(green): zero-setting performed (system zeroed).

Master Deviation Value programmed to indicate the difference between the size of
the sample part and the final size you want to obtain.

Zero Adjust Sum of the zero corrections given through keyboard during the part
machining.

Dirac correction value of the Dirac correction (it appears if the "Direct
coupling/Dirac" option is enabled). The Dirac correction value is reset for all the
sets provided with the Dirac option in the following cases:
• at the electronic unit power on
• in the Automatic/Manual switching
• during zero-setting or zero-setting reset

– Operator Guide Exar 383

 Measure Feedback Measure correction value (it appears if the "Feed Back –
measure correction" option is enabled). The measure Feedback value is reset
whenever the zero-setting is reset.

16.4.1. Viewing the Zeroing values in Manual mode

ƒ Select the Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).

16.4.2. Viewing the Zeroing values in Automatic mode

Note: In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the

machine’s logic.

384 Viewing the Exar Zeroing values – Operator Guide

16.5. Zeroing Exar
16.5.1. Introduction
Zeroing is the process of setting up and adjusting the gauge and a measuring head to
a master workpiece to assure that post-process inspection of the workpiece yields the
desired final dimensions.
Types of Zeroing:
Mechanical Zeroing – physically adjusts the fingers/contacts so that they are within
the foreseen measurement range (see section 16.5.2 on page 386)
Electrical Zeroing – adjustment operation to be performed periodically to obtain the
maximum accuracy and reliability of measurements on the workpiece (see section
16.5.3 on page 388)
• Electric zero-setting shared by the sets – operation to be performed in case
of “Masterless” application (linearization of the measurement range). (see
section 16.5.3.1 on page 389).
• Multiple Electrical Zeroing – this functional feature is present if it was
enabled upon the configuration stage of the application (see section 16.5.3.2,
on page 390).
Zero Adjustments – Corrections made when after a post-process inspection of the
workpieces small differences in size are found (see section 16.6 on page 392).
Zero Resets – removes the offsets generated by the system during the last electrical
zeroing (see section 16.7 on page 397).
Zeroing Conditions
Static – The master workpiece is NOT rotating.
Dynamic – The master workpiece is rotating and wet by the coolant.

When to zero the gauge system?

TYPE OF ZEROING CONDITIONS
Mechanical Zeroing
followed by At initial setup
Electrical Zeroing
At grinder start up
Electrical Zeroing At the beginning of each work shift
After changing Part Type
Zero Adjust When the workpiece size changes
When the zeroing range of the measuring head
Zero Reset has been exceeded.
followed by After replacement of any measuring head
Mechanical Zeroing & component (head, contacts, fingers, etc.)
Electrical Zeroing After any mechanical changes are made to the
gauge system.

– Operator Guide Exar 385

16.5.2. Mechanical Zeroing of Exar
Mechanical zeroing MUST be done to a master workpiece:
ƒ At initial set up of the gauge system.
ƒ If the allowed zero adjustment range has been exceeded.
ƒ After any mechanical or electrical changes to the gauge system (fingers, contacts,
...).
Mechanical zeroing must be performed only in Manual mode and statically.
Note: Each measuring head that has been defined MUST be Mechanically
Zeroed.
Mechanical Zeroing of a measuring head:
1. Gauge in Manual Mode.
2. Select the Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) relevant to the head to
be zeroed.
3. Eliminate any zeroing offsets:

- press then ;
Enter
- press F5 or highlight the Zero Reset button and press .

- a question box appears asking to Reset: press to highlight “Yes” and press
Enter
.

4. Press then to highlight the Mechanical Zeroing page icon.

Numerical and graphic

Numerical and graphic view of measurement
view of measurement value of the second
value of the first transducer -T2 (if
transducer -T1 present)

5. Place the master workpiece into the machine.

6. Proceed with the zeroing of T1 measuring head

386 Zeroing Exar – Operator Guide

 Zero-setting of Exar measuring head

7. Loosen screw E1, and turn the measuring head on its support so as to move the
contact to the area concerned, near the surface to be measured. Lock screw E1.
8. Slightly loosen nut E2, and operate screw E3 so as to cause the contact to move
near the part, until the measurement value on the upper digital display of the
Mechanical Zeroing page is next to zero (± 10 µ).

Measurement value
next to zero.

9. Lock nut E2, leaving screw E3 free.

10. Proceed with the zeroing of T2 measuring head (if present).
11. Act on adjustment unit of T2 head, as described for T1 head, until the
measurement value on the upper digital display of the Mechanical Zeroing page
is next to zero (± 10 µ).

Measurement value
next to zero

This completes the mechanical setup of the measuring head; now perform an Electric
Zeroing (see section 16.5.3 on page 388).

– Operator Guide Exar 387

16.5.3. Electrical Zeroing of Exar
Electrical Zeroing MUST be done:
ƒ In manual mode on a master workpiece.
ƒ Dynamically, i.e. with the master workpiece rotating and wet by coolant.
ƒ Regularly, usually at the beginning of each work shift and/or when the grinding
wheel is switched on.
Note: Each measuring head that has been defined MUST be electrically zeroed
for each work cycle in which it is used.
Electrical Zeroing Procedure:
1. Gauge in manual mode.
2. Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
3. Position the master workpiece in machine (master workpiece rotating and wet by
coolant).
4. Bring the head to gauging position.

5. Bring up the electric zeroing page: press and then . The electric zero-
setting button is highlighted.

Zeroing value (1)

Electric zeroing
button
Master deviation
Measurement value

Enter
6. Press F4 or .

7. A question box appears for zeroing confirmation: press to highlight “Yes”

Enter
and press . Electrical zeroing is completed.

388 Zeroing Exar – Operator Guide

 If no error messages are displayed the electric zero-setting procedure has been
correctly performed.
The Gauge can be switched to Automatic operating mode.

(1)Note: if the modality “Self-learning zero shift” (see chapter 16.2.1.2 “Zero shift
display” on page 372) is active, the “Zeroing Value” is not significant
anymore, and is replaced by the following symbols:

(red): system not zeroed

(green): zero-setting performed (system zeroed).

16.5.3.1. Shared Electric zero-setting (“Masterless” function)

In case of application with “Masterless” function (linearization of the measurement
range / measurement card with DSP-Digital Signal Processing), carry out a
simultaneous zero-setting of all the sets that use the selected measuring head
(shared electric zero-setting).

Mechanical Zeroing
Page Measurement value 1
of the first contact

Measurement value of
the second contact
Measuring head in use

1 Data present only with measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”.

Execution of electric zero-setting shared by the sets

Aborts the electric zero-setting shared by the sets

Zero-setting procedure

– Operator Guide Exar 389

 • Position the measuring heads (contacts T1 / T2) and fasten them onto the special
mechanical support, in the most suitable range based on the available sample
workpiece.
• Bring the measuring heads to measuring position on the sample workpiece.

• Press the key to carry out zero-setting. In this way all the sets that use the
measuring head are perfectly zeroed (shared zero-setting).

Note: if a new set is defined, combined with this measuring head, it is necessary
to repeat the zero-setting procedure.

16.5.3.2. Multiple Electrical Zeroing (Option)

This functional feature is present if it was enabled upon the configuration stage of the
application.
This functional feature allows using up to 32 different zeroing indexes for each set;
this means that it is possible to zero-set on different masters without having to change
the set (all the other programming data being equal). Afterwards it is possible to work
with the corresponding parts by calling out the different zeroing indexes.

Measurement zeroing status

Zeroing index no. (red) not zeroed
(1 to 32)
(green) zeroed

Electric zeroing button

Measurement nominal
value (1)

(1) Not displayed with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning modality”
enabled.

To select the index no. act as follows:

ƒ use to move the cursor to the index number, or to view the desired
Enter
value, then press to confirm.

This functional feature is optimized for the use with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic)
self-learning” modality (see section 16.2.1.2, page 372), but can also be used if such
a modality has not been enabled
“Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning” modality, enabled

390 Zeroing Exar – Operator Guide

 After the execution of the mechanical zeroing it is possible, by exploiting the different
zeroing indexes (1 to 32), to carry out an electric zeroing on masters that do not differ
more than the maximum zeroing range without changing the measurement nominal
value (maximum zeroing range: maximum value of the zero shift range +
programmed value of the head zero range).
Changing the measurement nominal value does not cause a reset of the current
zeroing index.

“Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning” modality, NOT enabled

After the execution of an electric zeroing with a determined index, if you want to zero-
set with another index it is necessary to:
• change the zeroing index
• change the measurement nominal value
• zero-set.
This procedure is necessary because changing the nominal value causes a reset of
the current zeroing index.
If you change the Field Center value, the current zeroing index is always reset, unlike
the other indexes.
The zero adjust that was set remains valid until you switch between the zeroed
indexes, while it is reset when switching to a index that was not zeroed.

– Operator Guide Exar 391

16.6. Zero Adjustments for Exar (Option)

Zero adjustments are made when a post- To reach this page:

process inspection of the workpiece shows
¾ Select Manual or Automatic
an incorrect size.
mode then choose one:

¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to the Menu maps on
pages 366 and 368.

Example:
The workpiece is undersize: enter a zero adjustment with the same value but with
opposite sign.

This can be done in either Manual or Automatic mode.

16.6.1. Zero Adjustment in Manual mode
Enter
Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) and press .
Note: Zero adjustments in manual mode affect the next cycle.

Bargraph of Σ value

Part drawing Sum of zero

adjustments (Σ)

Bargraph and numerical

display of measurement
value

Value of zero adjustment

value entered
Zero Adjustment Reset key

Changing Zero Adjustment value

1. Press to highlight the field

2. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

Enter
3. Press .

392 Zero Adjustments for Exar (Option) – Operator Guide

 4. The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the top of the
page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments).

Resetting Zero Adjustments

Enter
1. Press F5 or highlight and press . A “Reset?” question box will appear.
Zero
adjustments reset

Enter
2. Press to highlight “Yes” and press . The zero adjustments are reset.

16.6.2. Zero Adjustments in automatic mode

Note: Zero adjustments in automatic mode are made while grinding and affect
the current cycle.

16.6.2.1. Zero adjustment for the current Set (part/cycle)

Bargraph of Σ value

Sum of zero adjustments

Part drawing (Σ)

Bargraph and numerical

display of measurement
value

Zero adjustment
value entered

– Operator Guide Exar 393

 Changing the zero adjustment value

1. Press to reach the page

2. Press to highlight the field

3. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

4. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments for the cycle).

16.6.2.2. Zero adjustment with Set (Part/Cycle) selection

Bargraph of Σ value for the

selected cycle
Sum of zero adjustments
(Σ) for the selected cycle
Part drawing

Sum of zero adjustments

(Σ) for the selected Part

Zero adjustment value

Number of selected Part
entered for the selected cycle

Zero adjustment value entered

for the selected Part

The zero adjustments entered for the selected Part concern all the cycles using the
same head and belong to the same part. The common correction value is subtracted
in the same way following an electric zero-setting.

394 Zero Adjustments for Exar (Option) – Operator Guide

 Selecting the Set (Part/Cycle)

1. Holding down press to highlight the Part/Cycle selection box below.

Current Part Type

Part Number Cycle Number

2. Press or to view the selected Part/Cycle, otherwise press or to

change the Cycle number and or to change the Part number.

3. Press to confirm the Part/Cycle selection made. The program automatically

exits the selection box and returns to the page.
Changing the zero adjustment value for the cycle

1. Press to reach the page

2. Press to highlight the field

3. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

4. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments for the cycle).

5. Press .

Changing the zero adjustment value for the part

1. Press to reach the page

2. Press to highlight the field

3. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

– Operator Guide Exar 395

 4. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments for the part).

5. Press .

396 Zero Adjustments for Exar (Option) – Operator Guide

16.7. Zero Reset for Exar

This function removes all offsets generated To reach this page:

by the system during the last electrical
¾ Select Manual mode, then
zeroing (the transducers value is shown).
choose one:

¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to the Menu map on page
368..

It can be selected only in manual mode:

ƒ After mechanical changes to the gauge system.
ƒ When the maximum Zero Adjustment value available has been reached.
Electric Zeroing Reset Procedure:
1. Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
Enter
2. Press F5 or highlight and press . A “Reset?” question box will appear.

Reset button

Enter
3. Press to highlight “Yes” and press .

4. Press and to highlight the Mechanical Zeroing page icon.

Mechanical
Zeroing page

The gauge system MUST NOW be Mechanically then Electrically Zeroed (see page
385).

– Operator Guide Exar 397

398 Zero Reset for Exar – Operator Guide
17. POST PROCESS DIAMETER / P.P. DIAMETERS WITH
SWITCHING
This section covers the measurement application SINGLE POST PROCESS DIAMETER–
outside or inside – and its configured options.
Note: Anyway the description of this section is valid also for the TWO POST PROCESS
DIAMETERS WITH SWITCHING measurement application.

For this section of the guide, the diameter has been programmed as Part Type 1,
Cycle 1 and Head 1. This gauging cycle can be defined with different Part Types and
Cycle numbers as long as they match the machine’s logic programming.

17.1. Menu Maps

Operator tasks are performed in both Automatic and Manual modes. Only the menu
map folders with operator functions -Viewing, General Adjustments and Utilities -
are shown on the following pages.

The only difference between an outside (O.D.) and an inside (I.D.) diameter is the
graphic on the Zero Adjustments page.

– Operator Guide Post Process Diameter / P.P. Diameters with switching 399
17.1.1. Automatic Mode - Post Process Diameter Menu Map

Viewings General adjustments

FOLDERS
SUB-FOLDERS

View measure View zeroings View programming

PAGES

Measurement Zero value Programmed Zero adjust (Option)

bargraph Section 1.4.2 values Section 1.6.2
Section 17.3.2 Section 1.2

F5 – Surface elaboration
F4 - Control
(only if the measuring function for
points
interrupted surfaces is enabled)
(Section . 1.2.3)
(Section 1.2.4)

Options (See the following page ….)

400 Menu Maps – Operator Guide

 Options
Automatic Mode

The optional functions are enabled during the application configuration stage; if the
optional function is available the corresponding icon function key is displayed.
There may be two function keys (F6 and F3) for calling out the optional functions (see
section 1.2.1.4)

TIR Ovality
(Section 1.2.5) (Section 1.2.6)

Direct coupling-
PP/IP coupling
Dirac.
Section 1.2.8
Section 1.2.7

Getting around the program

Enter
moves down to the next level.

moves up one level.

moves between folders, sub-folders or pages on the same level..

– Operator Guide Post Process Diameter / P.P. Diameters with switching 401
17.1.2. Manual Mode - Post Process Diameter Menu Map

Utilities
FOLDERS

Measure zeroing Measure setup View

SUB-FOLDERS
PAGES

Mechanical Electrical Zero View Surface type View View

zeroing zeroing adjustments measure setup (1) Zeroings Programming
Sec. 1.5.2 Sec. 1.5.3 (Option) Sec. 1.3.1 Sec. 0 Sec. 1.2
Sec. 1.6.1

(1) This page is not seen if the surface is

smooth.

F4 - Controls F5 – Surface elaboration

points (only if the measuring function for
(Section . 1.2.3) interrupted surfaces is enabled)
(Section 1.2.4)

Options (See the following page ….)

402 Menu Maps – Operator Guide

 Options
Manual Mode

The optional functions are enabled during the application configuration stage; if the
optional function is available the corresponding icon function key is displayed.
There may be two function keys (F6 and F3) for calling out the optional functions (see
section 1.2.1.4)

TIR Ovality
(Section 1.2.5) (Section 1.2.6)

Direct coupling-
PP/IP coupling
Dirac.
Section 1.2.8
Section 1.2.7

Getting around the program

Enter
moves down to the next level.

moves up one level.

moves between folders, sub-folders or pages on the same level..

– Operator Guide Post Process Diameter / P.P. Diameters with switching 403
17.2. Viewing the Diameter Programming

All the programmed values can be viewed in To reach this page:

either Automatic or Manual mode on the
¾ Select Manual or Automatic
”View Programming” page.
mode
Additional pages can be viewed by using the
¾ Refer to the Menu maps on
F3-F6 function keys or highlighting an option
pages 400 and 402.
Enter
and pressing .

Measurement
data

Measurement
type (integral)
data

Automatic mode Manual mode

The data viewed concern the selected Part/Cycle.

Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the machine’s
logic.

17.2.1. Measurement data

Zero shift data (only
with measuring heads
enabled for “zero Measuring head sub-page
shift”)

Head Number of measuring head combined with the part/cycle selected.

Nominal value Nominal value of measurement (data valid only with measuring
heads enabled for “zero shift”).
Data not valid if the modality “Self-learnt zero shift” is active (see chapter 1.2.1.2
“Zero shift display” on page 406).

404 Viewing the Diameter Programming – Operator Guide

 Master deviation The difference between the nominal value of master and the
gauged measurement of the workpiece used as such.

Delay Time passing between the “start cycle” signal supplied by the logic
system and the internal enabling to gauge for starting the measuring cycle.

17.2.1.1. Measuring head sub-page

Use to move the cursor to (highlight) the box before the head number and press
Enter
.

Measuring head sub-page

Head Number of measuring head combined with the part/cycle selected.

Display resolution for the current set:

• Metric system :1µm / 0,1 µm / 0,01µm
• Imperial/Inches system: 0.00001” / 0.000001” / 0.0000001”

ABS View Measure visualization modality. Non-significant data (underlit) with

measuring heads not enabled for “Zero shift” (measure in relative value).
DISABLED: measure visualization in relative value, with reference to the measure
“zero”.
Nominal Value: measure visualization in absolute value with reference to the
nominal value.
Field Center: measure visualization in absolute value in the whole measurement
range of the head, with reference to the field center value and without change of
scale.
Example

ABS View= DISABLED ABS View= Nominal Value ABS View= Field Center
(40.0000)

– Operator Guide Post Process Diameter / P.P. Diameters with switching 405
17.2.1.2. Zero shift display
Only with measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”.
Enter
Use to highlight the box beside the “Nominal Value” data and press : access
to a sub-page where there are displayed the type and values programmed for the
zero shift used.

The state of the Check Boxes defines the type of zero shift used in the cycle:

Internally calculated zero shift

The check boxes relevant to the other zero shift
modalities are OFF … (modalities not active).
Zero shift internally calculated based on the
nominal measurement value programmed
(Nominal Value) and the programmed value of
the Range Center.

Programmed zero shift

Set the corresponding check box to ON :.
For each contact of the measuring head it was
defined its own “Zero shift” value that is used
regardless the nominal measurement value
(Nominal Value) programmed.

Static/Dynamic self-learning zero shift

When the “Nominal Value” data is underlit
(invalid data) it means that the (static or dynamic)
zero shift self-learning mode is active.
Selecting this modality allows zero-setting in the
whole Zero Shift range, regardless the nominal
measurement value (Nominal Value)
programmed.
Note: the modality “Self-learning zero shift” is not available in applications with
measure card with DSP (linearization of the measure range / “Masterless”
application).

406 Viewing the Diameter Programming – Operator Guide

17.2.1.3. Measurement Parameters
Controls. The number of control points is set at the configuration
level.
Surface Elaboration. Icon present only if the measurement function
for interrupted surfaces has been enabled.

17.2.1.4. Measurement optional functions (Options)

The optional functions are enabled during the application configuration stage; if the
optional function is available the corresponding function key is displayed.
There may be two function keys (F6 and F3) for calling out the optional functions.

Function keys (F6 and F3) for

measurement optional function

If there are more than two optional functions (more function keys necessary) the F6
and F3 key have dynamic management. The “scroll” icon appears within the
key, beside the associated F# key number, to indicate that there are non-displayed
function keys. Highlight the key and use the and keys to scroll the list of the
measurement optional functions (represented by the relevant icons) available. Select
the optional function by pressing the F6 or F3 function key associated to the icon of
that function.

Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the measurement optional

functions present; an optional function is active when the box to the left of the
corresponding function key is full.
Example:

TIR optional function active

– Operator Guide Post Process Diameter / P.P. Diameters with switching 407
17.2.2. Integral measurement

Manual mode

Enter
Type of
integral
measurement

Automatic mode

Enter
Type of
integral
measurement

Type Type of integral measurement. The following modalities represented by the

icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

Processing of the Average value
Processing of the Rolling average
Elaboration for smooth parts in eccentric rotation

Parameters Access to the sub-page containing the parameters of the integral

Enter
measurement: press to highlight the check-box and press .

408 Viewing the Diameter Programming – Operator Guide

17.2.2.1. Parameters of the integral measurement
The sub-page containing the parameters of the integral measurement can also be
called out from the page of “Ovality” measurement, if present (section 1.2.6, page
416).
Manual Mode example.

Ovality Measurement
4

Enter Enter

Parameters of the integral

measurement

4 With “Type of integral measurement” = , the parameters of the integral

measurement concern just the “Ovality” measurement (if present). Should this
option is not present, access to the page of the integral measurement
parameters is disabled.

Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside. With
the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of the
workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking the
interval between two clock pulses as time.
The data “Meas. RPM” and “Rev. Percentage” are not valid anymore.

Meas. Rpm Number of revolutions/minute of the workpiece for the integral

measurement processing.

Rev. Percentage (1 to 1000%) percentage of the revolution of the part on

which the integral measurement is performed. Default 100% = 1 revolution of the
part.

– Operator Guide Post Process Diameter / P.P. Diameters with switching 409
17.2.3. Control points
The gauge is configured with a fixed number of control points, including a zero point.

Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the machine’s
logic.

ƒ To view the programmed control points, press F4 or highlight and

Enter
press .

Viewing control points in Manual mode

Viewing control points in Automatic mode

410 Viewing the Diameter Programming – Operator Guide

17.2.4. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces)
The measurement of interrupted surfaces is electrically damped (filtered) and such a
damping shall be linked both to the type of workpiece and rotation speed. Damping
serves to keep the measurement stable when there are interruptions on the
workpiece.
Upon Programming it is possible to define the features of the measurement
processing for interrupted surfaces.
Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ To view the data relevant to interrupted surfaces measurement press F5 or

Enter
highlight and press .
Surface elaboration
Surface elaboration type coefficient
Integral measurement
type

Sub-page of the
algorithm parameters

Viewing data for interrupted surfaces in Manual mode

Viewing data for interrupted surfaces in Automatic mode

The validity of the data appearing on the page depend on the “Surface Elaboration
Type ” selected (see the table below):

– Operator Guide Post Process Diameter / P.P. Diameters with switching 411
 Surface Elaboration Type

Surface elaboration
Fixed at 1 Yes Yes Yes
coefficient
Integral measurement type No No No Yes
Algorithm type No No No Yes
Max. Settling Time No Yes Yes Yes

Surface Elaboration Type type of workpiece based on the surface features

(interruptions present or not); it will be used for the execution of the measurement
processing.

Smooth workpiece

Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are simultaneously on the

full section.
Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are NEVER simultaneously
on the full section.
Workpiece with keyway

Surface elaboration coefficient Measurement damping filter for interrupted

surfaces. The processing algorithms of the measurement for interrupted surfaces
foresee determined parameters of the filter, selectable with three different pre-
defined coefficients (1, 2, 3).
The higher damping is obtained with “Surface elaboration coefficient” = 3

“Surface Elaboration Type” = or : each one of the three coefficients (1, 2

and 3) is associated with three different damping speeds.

“Surface Elaboration Type” = : programming the coefficients (1, 2 and 3) causes

the measurement to be held when the contacts are not touching the workpiece.
The measurement is held in different ways for coefficient 1, and for coefficients 2
and 3 (different “Algorithm type” for measure elaboration).

Algorithm type programmed algorithm type.

THRESHOLD – Sampling memory
Four successive measure samples are elaborated (samples distance: 8 ms):
- If the difference between them is more than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is held.
- If the difference between them is less than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is acquired.
HEAD EXT. SYNC. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside. With
the check box enabled, the measurement processing and the integral

412 Viewing the Diameter Programming – Operator Guide

 measurement requested are enabled or disabled according to this signal (for
external synchronism ON the measure is performed)
DERIVATE – Derived memory
The measure trailing edge and leading edge are identified. After the leading edge,
a settling time is awaited before acquiring the measure; it can be programmed in
the sub-page of the technical parameters of the algorithm (Latency Time data).
See chapter 1.2.4.1, on page 413.

Integral Measurement Type type of integral measurement for the period of validity
of the measurement itself.
The following modalities represented by the icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

Processing of the Average value

Max. Settling Time Maximum time passing between the moment the start cycle
is given and the moment when the software starts processing the damped
measurement.

17.2.4.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters

The presence and validity of the parameters appearing on this sub-page depend on
the programming of the “Surface Elaboration Type” and “Algorithm type” parameters.

B
C

Algorithm’s technical parameters sub-page (example)

Surface elaboration type

Surface elaboration
No Yes Yes Yes
parameters (A)
Measure Times (B) No No No Yes
Filter parameters (C) Yes Yes Yes Yes

– Operator Guide Post Process Diameter / P.P. Diameters with switching 413
 A Parameters of the surface elaboration algorithm defined upon the application
configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical personnel or Marposs’
personnel).

B Measure times
Latency Time Lapse of time during which the measurement is held to
prevent the instability due to over-elongations in the instant in which the
contacts, exiting the hold time, return onto the workpiece.
Measure Time Measurement acquisition time (minimum lapse of time
during which the contacts touch the workpiece).

C Filter parameters for the surface elaboration algorithm. Parameters defined

upon the application configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical
personnel or Marposs’ personnel).

414 Viewing the Diameter Programming – Operator Guide

17.2.5. TIR (Total Indicator Reading) (Option)
It allows to determine the eccentricity error of the workpiece to the rotation axis by
using just a contact (T1).
The TIR option can be enabled or disabled upon Programming. The option is enabled
when the small box to the left of the icon is filled in.
Note: In manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to view the TIR measurement
data.

Viewing TIR measurement data in Manual mode

Viewing TIR measurement data in Automatic mode

Tir Control Value beyond which the T.I.R. measurement must be considered
out of tolerance.

Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside. With
the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of the
workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking the
interval between two clock pulses as time.
The datum “Tir Rpm” is not valid anymore.

Tir Rpm Rotation speed of the workpiece during T.I.R. check.

Tir Delay Time delay before taking the T.I.R. measurement.

– Operator Guide Post Process Diameter / P.P. Diameters with switching 415
17.2.6. Ovality (Option)
Check of workpiece ovality.
Note: The Ovality measurement is NOT valid with Fenar-L measuring heads
(the ovality check does not make sense at all).
The Ovality option can be enabled or disabled upon Programming. The option is
enabled when the small box to the left of the icon is filled in.
Note: In manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to view the ovality

measurement data.

Parameters of the integral

measurement
Viewing the ovality measurement data in Manual mode

Parameters of the integral

measurement
Viewing the ovality measurement data in Automatic mode

Ovality Control Value beyond which the ovality measurement must be considered
out of tolerance.

Parameters Access to the sub-page containing the parameters of the integral

Enter
measurement: press .
See the meaning of the parameters on chapter 1.2.2.1 "Parameters of the integral
measurement”, page 409.

416 Viewing the Diameter Programming – Operator Guide

17.2.7. Direct coupling - Dirac (Option)
The Dirac application consists in the execution of the In-Process measurement of a
workpiece (typically an outside diameter) directly coupled with the Pre-Process
measurement of another workpiece (typically an inside diameter – hole).
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the “Dirac” option and define its
characteristics. The option is enabled when the small box to the left of the icon is filled
in.
Note: In manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the Dirac
application data.

Viewing Dirac application data in Manual mode

Viewing Dirac application data in Automatic mode

Correction Code request code associated with the measurement on which you want
to carry out the Dirac-type correction.
The "Correction code" of the set of the Post-Process type, that determines the
correction value, shall be the same of the associated set of the In-Process type
that must carry out the Dirac correction.

Clearance parameter of coupling between In-Process measurement and Post-

Process measurement. The programmed value is algebraically added to the
measurement and is ignored during zero-setting.

– Operator Guide Post Process Diameter / P.P. Diameters with switching 417
17.2.8. PP/IP coupling (Option)
Association of an Post-Process diameter measurement with an In-Process diameter
measurement (either simple or double).
The association between sets is obtained by setting the same coupling code (1 to 31,
necessarily different from 0) in all the sets to be associated.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to view the page of data.

Viewing data in Manual mode

Viewing data in Automatic mode

Coupling Code code of association between the sets (1 to 31). Code “0” indicates
no association.

418 Viewing the Diameter Programming – Operator Guide

17.3. Viewing Diameter Measurement

The View Measure Bargraph page is where To reach this page:

the size of the workpiece can be monitored
¾ Select Automatic or Manual
in both Manual and Automatic modes.
mode then choose one:

Typically, the View Measure Bargraph page ¾ Press

is defined as the Home page (default
screen), see section 4.2.3 “Defining the ¾ Press then
HOME key” on page 32. ¾ Refer to Menu maps on pages
400 and 402

“ABS View” data valid: based on its programming (measuring head sub-page
- section 1.2.1.1, page 405) the measure visualization (numerical and
graphical) may be:
i • in relative value, with reference to the measure “zero”
• in absolute value, with reference to the programmed nominal value
• in absolute value in the whole measurement range of the head, with
reference to the field center value and without change of scale.

17.3.1. Viewing the Measurement in Manual Mode

ƒ Select the corresponding Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).

Electrical Zeroing
Numerical and button (1)
graphical
representation of
measuring head
Numerical value of
measurement
Retraction status
Bargraph of
measurement

Selected Part/Cycle

(1) Not present if the “Multiple electric zeroing” function (section 1.5.3.2 on page 429)
is enabled.

Note: Electrical zero from this page, by means of the Zeroing button , is
possible only after a mechanical zeroing has been performed.

– Operator Guide Post Process Diameter / P.P. Diameters with switching 419
17.3.2. Viewing the Measurement in Automatic mode

Note: In Automatic mode the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the machine’s
logic.
Numerical and graphic
representation of current
measuring head Bargraph of
measurement
Measurement zeroing status
(red) not zeroed
(green) zeroed
Numerical value of
measurement
Nominal value of the
measurement (1)
Status of commands:
highlighted box =
Current Set (Part/Cycle)
command triggered

(1) Not displayed with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning” modality,
enabled.
When TIR, Ovality, Remspeed, etc. options are installed, this tab has an additional
icon.
Icon indicating additional pages.

Press or to reach the other pages.

Bargraph of measurement
Numerical value of
measurement
TIR
Control point status:
under limit
over limit

Bargraph of measurement
Numerical value of
Ovality measurement
Control point status:
under limit
over limit
Note: The Ovality measurement is NOT valid with Fenar-L measuring heads
(the ovality check does not make sense at all).

420 Viewing Diameter Measurement – Operator Guide

17.4. Viewing the Diameter Zeroing values

The Zero Summary page To reach this page:

contains information about
¾ Select Manual or Automatic mode then
the various zeroing functions
choose one:
of the gauge system and can
be viewed in either Manual or ¾ Press then .
Automatic mode.
¾ Refer to Menu maps on pages 400 and 402.

Viewing zeroing values in Manual and Automatic Modes

Zeroing Value Sum of the accumulated zeroing values from electrically zeroing
the gauge system.
Note: if the modality “Self-learning zero shift” (see paragraph 1.2.1.2, page 406)
is active, the “Zeroing Value” is not significant anymore, and is replaced
by the following symbols:

(red): system not zeroed

(green): zero-setting performed (system zeroed).

Master Deviation Value programmed to indicate the difference between the size of
the sample part and the final size you want to obtain.

Zero Adjust Sum of the zero corrections given through keyboard during the part
machining.

Dirac correction value of the Dirac correction (it appears if the "Direct
coupling/Dirac" option is enabled). The Dirac correction value is reset for all the
sets provided with the Dirac option in the following cases:
• at the electronic unit power on
• in the Automatic/Manual switching
• during zero-setting or zero-setting reset

Clearance parameter of coupling between In-Process measurement and Post-

Process measurement.

– Operator Guide Post Process Diameter / P.P. Diameters with switching 421
17.4.1. Viewing the Zeroing values in Manual mode
ƒ Select the Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).

17.4.2. Viewing the Zeroing values in Automatic mode

Note: In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the

machine’s logic.

422 Viewing the Diameter Zeroing values – Operator Guide

17.5. Zeroing diameter
17.5.1. Introduction
Zeroing is the process of setting up and adjusting the gauge and a measuring head to
a master workpiece to assure that post-process inspection of the workpiece yields the
desired final dimensions.
Types of Zeroing:
Mechanical Zeroing – physically adjusts the fingers/contacts so that they are within
the foreseen measurement range (see section 1.5.2, on page 424).
Electrical Zeroing – adjustment operation to be performed periodically to obtain the
maximum accuracy and reliability of measurements on the workpiece (see section
1.5.3, on page 426).
• Electric zero-setting shared by the sets – operation to be performed in
case of “Masterless” application (linearization of the measurement range).
(see section 1.5.3.1, on page 428).
• Multiple Electrical Zeroing – this functional feature is present if it was
enabled upon the configuration stage of the application (see section 1.5.3.2,
on page 429).
Zero Adjustments – Corrections made when small differences in size are found (see
section 1.6, on page 431).
Zero Resets – removes the offsets generated by the system during the last electrical
zeroing (see section 1.7, on page 436).
Zeroing Conditions
Static – The master workpiece is NOT rotating.
Dynamic – The master workpiece is rotating.

When to zero the gauge system?

TYPE OF ZEROING CONDITIONS
Mechanical Zeroing
followed by At initial setup
Electrical Zeroing
At the beginning of each work shift
Electrical Zeroing After changing Part Type

Zero Adjust When the workpiece size changes

When the zeroing range of the measuring head
Zero Reset has been exceeded.
followed by After replacement of any measuring head
Mechanical Zeroing & component (head, contacts, fingers, etc.)
Electrical Zeroing After any mechanical changes are made to the
gauge system.

– Operator Guide Post Process Diameter / P.P. Diameters with switching 423
17.5.2. Mechanical Zeroing of Diameter
Mechanical zeroing MUST be done to a master workpiece:
ƒ At initial set up of the gauge system.
ƒ If the allowed zero adjustment range has been exceeded.
ƒ After any mechanical or electrical changes to the gauge system (fingers, contacts,
...).
Mechanical zeroing must be performed only in Manual mode and statically.
Note: Each measuring head that has been defined MUST be Mechanically
Zeroed.
Mechanical Zeroing of a measuring head:
1. Gauge in Manual Mode.
2. Select the Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) relevant to the head to
be zeroed.
3. Eliminate any zeroing offsets:

- press then ;
Enter
- press F5 or highlight the Zero Reset button and press .

Enter
- a question box appears asking to Reset: press .

4. Press then to highlight the Mechanical Zeroing page icon.

Numerical and graphic

Numerical and graphic view of measurement
view of measurement value of the second
value of the first transducer -T2
transducer -T1

5. Place the master workpiece into the machine.

6. Adjust the finger/contact assemblies of the measuring head so they can be
inserted into gauging position safely.
The adjustment mode of the finger/contact assemblies depends on the
adjustment method used (with adjustable guides or with contacts).

424 Zeroing diameter – Operator Guide

 (pls. see Chapter 6 “Measuring head Mechanical zero-setting” on page 535).

Finger/contact assembly – T1
Cable

Measuring
head support Measuring Contacts
head DO NOT
touch master

Slide
adapter
Finger/contact assembly – T2
Slide

7. Bring the measuring head to gauging position.

8. Adjust the upper finger/contact assembly (T1) making the contact touch the
master until the measurement value on the upper digital display of the
Mechanical Zeroing page is next to zero (± 10 µ).

Measurement value
next to zero.

9. Adjust the lower finger/contact assembly (T2) making the contact touch the
master until the measurement value on the upper digital display of the
Mechanical Zeroing page is next to zero (± 10 µ).

Measurement value
next to zero

This completes the mechanical setup of the measuring head; now perform an Electric
Zeroing (see section 1.5.3 on page 426).

– Operator Guide Post Process Diameter / P.P. Diameters with switching 425
17.5.3. Electrical Zeroing of Diameter
Electrical Zeroing MUST be done:
ƒ In manual mode on a master workpiece.
ƒ Dynamically, i.e. with the master workpiece rotating
ƒ Regularly, usually at the beginning of each work shift
Note: Each measuring head that has been defined MUST be electrically zeroed
for each work cycle in which it is used.

Electrical Zeroing Procedure:

1. Gauge in manual mode.
2. Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
3. Position the master workpiece to gauging position
4. Bring the head to gauging position.

5. Bring up the electric zeroing page: press and then . The electric zero-
setting button is highlighted.

Zeroing value (1)

Electric zeroing
button
Master deviation
Nominal value of the Measurement value
measurement (2)

(2) Not displayed with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning modality”
enabled.

Enter
6. Press F4 or . A question box appears for zeroing confirmation

Enter
7. Press to highlight “Yes” and press . Electrical zeroing is completed.

426 Zeroing diameter – Operator Guide

 If no error messages are displayed the electric zero-setting procedure has been
correctly performed.
The Gauge can be switched to Automatic operating mode.

Note: Electric zero-setting with integral measurement.

Once completed the electric zero-setting procedure the measurement is
still displayed (graphic and numerical display) dynamically (viewing of the
measurement variation during the part rotation).

(1)Note: if the modality “Self-learning zero shift” (see paragraph 1.2.1.2, page 406)
is active, the “Zeroing Value” is not significant anymore, and is replaced
by the following symbols:

(red): system not zeroed

(green): zero-setting performed (system zeroed).

– Operator Guide Post Process Diameter / P.P. Diameters with switching 427
17.5.3.1. Shared Electric zero-setting (“Masterless” function)
In case of application with “Masterless” function (linearization of the measurement
range / measurement card with DSP-Digital Signal Processing), carry out a
simultaneous zero-setting of all the sets that use the selected measuring head
(shared electric zero-setting).

Mechanical Zeroing
Page Measurement value 1
of the first contact

Measurement value of
the second contact
Measuring head in use

1 Data present only with measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”.

Execution of electric zero-setting shared by the sets

Aborts the electric zero-setting shared by the sets

Zero-setting procedure
• Position the measuring heads (contacts T1 / T2) and fasten them onto the special
mechanical support, in the most suitable range based on the available sample
workpiece.
• Bring the measuring heads to measuring position on the sample workpiece.

• Press the key to carry out zero-setting. In this way all the sets that use the
measuring head are perfectly zeroed (shared zero-setting).

Note: if a new set is defined, combined with this measuring head, it is necessary
to repeat the zero-setting procedure.

428 Zeroing diameter – Operator Guide

17.5.3.2. Multiple Electrical Zeroing (Option)
This functional feature is present if it was enabled upon the configuration stage of the
application.
This functional feature allows using up to 32 different zeroing indexes for each set;
this means that it is possible to zero-set on different masters without having to change
the set (all the other programming data being equal). Afterwards it is possible to work
with the corresponding parts by calling out the different zeroing indexes.

Measurement zeroing status

Zeroing index no. (red) not zeroed
(1 to 32)
(green) zeroed

Electric zeroing button

Measurement nominal
value (1)

(1) Not displayed with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning modality”
enabled.

To select the index no. act as follows:

ƒ use to move the cursor to the index number, or to view the desired
Enter
value, then press to confirm.

This functional feature is optimized for the use with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic)
self-learning” modality (see section 1.2.1.2, page 406), but can also be used if such a
modality has not been enabled
“Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning” modality, enabled
After the execution of the mechanical zeroing it is possible, by exploiting the different
zeroing indexes (1 to 32), to carry out an electric zeroing on masters that do not differ
more than the maximum zeroing range without changing the measurement nominal
value (maximum zeroing range: maximum value of the zero shift range +
programmed value of the head zero range).
Changing the measurement nominal value does not cause a reset of the current
zeroing index.

“Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning” modality, NOT enabled

After the execution of an electric zeroing with a determined index, if you want to zero-
set with another index it is necessary to:
• change the zeroing index
• change the measurement nominal value

– Operator Guide Post Process Diameter / P.P. Diameters with switching 429
 • zero-set.
This procedure is necessary because changing the nominal value causes a reset of
the current zeroing index.
If you change the Field Center value, the current zeroing index is always reset, unlike
the other indexes.
The zero adjust that was set remains valid until you switch between the zeroed
indexes, while it is reset when switching to a index that was not zeroed.

430 Zeroing diameter – Operator Guide

17.6. Zero Adjustments for Diameter (Option)

Zero adjustments are made when a post- To reach this page:

process inspection of the workpiece shows
¾ Select Manual or Automatic
an incorrect size.
mode then choose one:

¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to the Menu maps on
pages 400 and 402.

Example:
The workpiece is undersize: enter a zero adjustment with the same value but with
opposite sign.
APPLICATION PART TOO SMALL PART TOO BIG
OUTSIDE diameter Add Subtract
INSIDE diameter Subtract Add
This can be done in either Manual or Automatic mode.
17.6.1. Zero Adjustment in Manual mode
Enter
Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) and press .
Note: Zero adjustments in manual mode affect the next cycle.

Bargraph of Σ value

Part drawing Sum of zero

adjustments (Σ)

Value of zero adjustment Bargraph and numerical

value entered display of measurement
value

Zero Adjustment Reset key

Changing Zero Adjustment value

1. Press to highlight the field

2. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

– Operator Guide Post Process Diameter / P.P. Diameters with switching 431
 Enter
3. Press .
4. The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the top of the
page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments).

Resetting Zero Adjustments

Enter
1. Press F5 or highlight and press . A “Reset?” question box will appear.
Zero
adjustments reset

Enter
2. Press to highlight “Yes” and press . The zero adjustments are reset.

17.6.2. Zero Adjustments in automatic mode

Note: Zero adjustments in automatic mode are made while grinding and affect
the current cycle.

17.6.2.1. Zero adjustment for the current Set (part/cycle)

Bargraph of Σ value

Sum of zero adjustments

Part drawing
(Σ)

Bargraph and numerical

display of measurement
value

Zero adjustment
value entered

432 Zero Adjustments for Diameter (Option) – Operator Guide

 Changing the zero adjustment value

1. Press to reach the page

2. Press to highlight the field

3. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

4. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments for the cycle).

17.6.2.2. Zero adjustment with Set (Part/Cycle) selection

Bargraph of Σ value for the

selected cycle
Sum of zero adjustments
(Σ) for the selected cycle
Part drawing

Sum of zero adjustments

(Σ) for the selected Part

Zero adjustment value

entered for the selected cycle Number of selected Part

Zero adjustment value entered

for the selected Part

The zero adjustments entered for the selected Part concern all the cycles using the
same head and belong to the same part. The common correction value is subtracted
in the same way following an electric zero-setting.

– Operator Guide Post Process Diameter / P.P. Diameters with switching 433
 Selecting the Set (Part/Cycle)

1. Holding down press to highlight the Part/Cycle selection box below.

Current Part Type

Part Number Cycle Number

2. Press or to view the selected Part/Cycle, otherwise press or to

change the Cycle number and or to change the Part number.

3. Press to confirm the Part/Cycle selection made. The program automatically

exits the selection box and returns to the page.

Changing the zero adjustment value for the cycle

1. Press to reach the page

2. Press to highlight the field

3. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

4. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments for the cycle).

5. Press .

Changing the zero adjustment value for the part

1. Press to reach the page

2. Press to highlight the field

434 Zero Adjustments for Diameter (Option) – Operator Guide

 3. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

4. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments for the part).

5. Press .

– Operator Guide Post Process Diameter / P.P. Diameters with switching 435
17.7. Zero Reset for Diameter

This function removes all offsets generated To reach this page:

by the system during the last electrical
¾ Select Manual mode, then
zeroing (the transducers value is shown).
choose one:

¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to the Menu map on page
402

It can be selected only in manual mode:

ƒ After mechanical changes to the gauge system.
ƒ When the maximum Zero Adjustment value available has been reached.
Electric Zeroing Reset Procedure:
1. Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
Enter
2. Press F5 or highlight and press . A “Reset?” question box will appear.

Reset button

Enter
3. Press to highlight “Yes” and press .

4. Press and to highlight the Mechanical Zeroing page icon.

Mechanical
Zeroing page

The gauge system MUST NOW be Mechanically then Electrically Zeroed (see page
423).

436 Zero Reset for Diameter – Operator Guide

18. TWO POST-PROCESS DIAMETERS SIMULTANEOUSLY
This section covers the measurement application TWO POST-PROCESS DIAMETERS
SIMULTANEOUSLY and its configured options.
In this application two measuring heads are used to perform two different
measurements simultaneously (Measurement A & Measurement B) on a part.

Note: Anyway the measuring application TWO POST-PROCESS DIAMETERS

SIMULTANEOUSLY can also be used as SINGLE POST-PROCESS DIAMETER
(Measurement A) measuring cycle.
This measuring cycle can be combined with Parts/Cycles as long as they match the
machine’s logic programming.

Note: In the rest of the chapter the screen pages relevant to Measurement A will
be reported as an example; the pages relevant to Measurement B are
identical.

18.1. Menu Maps

Operator tasks are performed in both Automatic and Manual modes. Only the menu
map folders with operator functions -Viewing, General Adjustments and Utilities -
are shown on the following pages.

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters simultaneously 437

18.1.1. Automatic Mode - Two Post-Process Diameters Simultaneously
Menu Map
Viewings General adjustments
FOLDER

View measure View zeroings View programming

SUB-FOLDERS
PAGES

Measurement Zero values Measure A Zero adjust (Option)

bargraph Section 2.4 + Section 2.6.2
Section 2.3.2

Use to view Measure B

Programmed values
Section 2.2

Options Options
Measure A Measure B

Meas. A Meas. B

F5 – Surface elaboration
F4 - (only if the measuring function
Control points for interrupted surfaces is
(Section 2.2.3) enabled) (Section 2.2.4)

Options (measure A / measure B) (See the following page ….)

438 Menu Maps – Operator Guide

 Options (measure a / measure B)
Automatic Mode

The optional functions are enabled during the application configuration stage; if the
optional function is available the corresponding icon function key is displayed.
There may be two function keys (F6 and F3) for calling out the optional functions (see
section 2.2.1.4)

TIR Ovality
(Section 2.2.5 (Section 2.2.6)

Direct coupling-
PP/IP coupling
Dirac.
Section 2.2.8
Section 2.2.7

Getting around the program

Enter
moves down to the next level.

moves up one level.

moves between folders, sub-folders or pages on the same level..

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters simultaneously 439

18.1.2. Manual Mode - Two Post-Process Diameters Simultaneously Menu
Map
Utility
FOLDERS

Measure zeroing Measure setup View

SUB-FOLDERS
PAGES

Meas. A Meas. A Meas. A Meas. A Meas. A Meas. A Meas. A

Meas. B Meas. B Meas. B Meas. B Meas. B Meas. B

Mechanical Electrical Zero View measure Surface type View Zeroings
zeroing zeroing adjustments Sec. 2.3.1 setup (1) Sez. 0 Meas. B
Sec. 2.5.2 Sec. 2.5.3 (Option) View
Sec. 2.6.1 Programming
Sec. 2.2

(1) This page is not seen if the

surface is smooth

F4 - Control F5 – Surface elaboration (only

points if the measuring function for
(Section . 2.2.3) interrupted surfaces is enabled ).
Section 2.2.4

Options (measure A / measure B) (See the following page ….)

440 Menu Maps – Operator Guide

 Options (measure a / measure B)
Manual Mode

The optional functions are enabled during the application configuration stage; if the
optional function is available the corresponding icon function key is displayed.
There may be two function keys (F6 and F3) for calling out the optional functions (see
section 2.2.1.4)

TIR Ovality
(Section 2.2.5 (Section 2.2.6)

Direct coupling-
PP/IP coupling
Dirac.
Section 2.2.8
Section 2.2.7

Getting around the program

Enter
moves down to the next level.

moves up one level.

moves between folders, sub-folders or pages on the same level..

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters simultaneously 441

18.2. Viewing the Measurements A and B Programming

All the programmed values can be viewed in To reach this page:

either Automatic or Manual mode on the
¾ Select Manual or Automatic
”View Programming” page.
mode
Additional pages can be viewed by using the
¾ Refer to the Menu maps on
F3-F6 function keys or highlighting an option
pages 438 and 440.
Enter
and pressing .

There are two identical and independent programming pages for measurements A
and B (only the icon of the page that identifies the measurement type is different):

Measurement A (Diameter 1)
Measurement B (Diameter 2)

For simplicity, from here on we will refer to the page relevant to Measurement A
(Diameter 1) .
Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) and
the measurement (A or B) to be viewed.
In Automatic mode the Set (Part/Cycle) and the measurement selection is
made by the machine’s logic.

Viewing Programming page in Manual mode

Press to view Measurement A , Measurement B individually and in

sequence.

Measurement A Measurement B
Integral measurement data

Measurement data

The data viewed concern the selected Part/Cycle.

442 Viewing the Measurements A and B Programming – Operator Guide

 Viewing Programming page in Automatic mode

Press + to view Measurement A , Measurement B individually and

in sequence.

Measurement A Measurement B
Integral measurement data

Measurement data

The data viewed concern the selected Part/Cycle.

18.2.1. Measurement data

Zero shift data (only

with measuring heads Measuring head sub-page
enabled for “zero
shift”)

Head Number of measuring head (Measurement A ) combined with the

part/cycle selected

Nominal value Nominal value of measurement (data valid only with measuring
heads enabled for “zero shift”).
Data not valid if the modality “Self-learning zero shift” is active (see chapter 2.2.1.2
“Zero shift display” on page 445).

Master deviation The difference between the nominal value of master and the
gauged measurement of the workpiece used as such.

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters simultaneously 443

 Delay Time passing between the “start cycle” signal supplied by the logic
system and the internal enabling to gauge for starting the measuring cycle.

18.2.1.1. Measuring head sub-page

Use to move the cursor to (highlight) the box before the head number and press
Enter
.

Measuring head sub-page

Head Number of measuring head (Measurement A ) combined with the

part/cycle selected

Display resolution for the current set:

• Metric system :1µm / 0,1 µm / 0,01µm
• Imperial/Inches system: 0.00001” / 0.000001” / 0.0000001”

ABS View Measure visualization modality. Non-significant data (underlit) with

measuring heads not enabled for “Zero shift” (measure in relative value).
DISABLED: measure visualization in relative value, with reference to the measure
“zero”.
Nominal Value: measure visualization in absolute value with reference to the
nominal value.
Field Center: measure visualization in absolute value in the whole measurement
range of the head, with reference to the field center value and without change of
scale.
Example

ABS View= DISABLED ABS View= Nominal Value ABS View= Field Center
(40.0000)

444 Viewing the Measurements A and B Programming – Operator Guide

18.2.1.2. Zero shift display
Only with measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”.
Enter
Use to highlight the box beside the “Nominal Value” data and press : access
to a sub-page where there are displayed the type and values programmed for the
zero shift used.

The state of the Check Boxes defines the type of zero shift used in the cycle:

Internally calculated zero shift

The check boxes relevant to the other zero shift
modalities are OFF … (modalities not active).
Zero shift internally calculated based on the
nominal measurement value programmed
(Nominal Value) and the programmed value of
the Range Center.

Programmed zero shift

Set the corresponding check box to ON :.
For each contact of the measuring head it was
defined its own “Zero shift” value that is used
regardless the nominal measurement value
(Nominal Value) programmed.

Static/Dynamic self-learning zero shift

When the “Nominal Value” data is underlit
(invalid data) it means that the (static or dynamic)
zero shift self-learning mode is active.
Selecting this modality allows zero-setting in the
whole Zero Shift range, regardless the nominal
measurement value (Nominal Value)
programmed.
Note: the modality “Self-learning zero shift” is not available in applications with
measure card with DSP (linearization of the measure range / “Masterless”
application).

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters simultaneously 445

18.2.1.3. Measurement Parameters
Controls. The number of control points is set at the configuration
level.
Surface Elaboration. Icon present only if the measurement function
for interrupted surfaces has been enabled.

18.2.1.4. Measurement optional functions (Options)

The optional functions are enabled during the application configuration stage; if the
optional function is available the corresponding function key is displayed.
There may be two function keys (F6 and F3) for calling out the optional functions.

Function keys (F6 and F3) for

measurement optional function

If there are more than two optional functions (more function keys necessary) the F6
and F3 key have dynamic management. The “scroll” icon appears within the
key, beside the associated F# key number, to indicate that there are non-displayed
function keys. Highlight the key and use the and keys to scroll the list of the
measurement optional functions (represented by the relevant icons) available. Select
the optional function by pressing the F6 or F3 function key associated to the icon of
that function.

Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the measurement optional

functions present; an optional function is active when the box to the left of the
corresponding function key is full.
Example:

TIR optional function active

446 Viewing the Measurements A and B Programming – Operator Guide

18.2.2. Integral Measurement

Manual mode

Enter
Type of
integral
measurement

Automatic mode

Enter
Type of
integral
measurement

Type Type of integral measurement. The following modalities represented by the

icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

Processing of the Average value
Processing of the Rolling average

Parameters Access to the sub-page containing the parameters of the integral

Enter
measurement: press to highlight the check-box and press .

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters simultaneously 447

18.2.2.1. Parameters of the integral measurement
The sub-page containing the parameters of the integral measurement can also be
called out from the page of “Ovality” measurement, if present (section 2.2.6, page
455).
Manual Mode example.

Ovality Measurement
4

Enter Enter

Parameters of the integral

measurement

4 With “Type of integral measurement” = , the parameters of the integral

measurement concern just the “Ovality” measurement (if present). Should this
option is not present, access to the page of the integral measurement
parameters is disabled.

Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside. With
the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of the
workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking the
interval between two clock pulses as time.
The data “Meas. RPM” and “Rev. Percentage” are not valid anymore.

Meas. Rpm Number of revolutions/minute of the workpiece for the integral

measurement processing.

Rev. Percentage (1 to 1000%) percentage of the revolution of the part on

which the integral measurement is performed. Default 100% = 1 revolution of the
part.

448 Viewing the Measurements A and B Programming – Operator Guide

18.2.3. Control points
The gauge is configured with a fixed number of control points.
Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) and
the measurement (A or B) to be viewed.
In Automatic mode the Set (Part/Cycle) and the measurement selection is
made by the machine’s logic.

ƒ To view the programmed control points, press F4 or highlight and

Enter
press .

Viewing control points in Manual mode

Viewing control points in Automatic mode

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters simultaneously 449

18.2.4. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces)
The measurement of interrupted surfaces is electrically damped (filtered) and such a
damping shall be linked both to the type of workpiece and rotation speed. Damping
serves to keep the measurement stable when there are interruptions on the
workpiece.
Upon Programming it is possible to define the features of the measurement
processing for interrupted surfaces.
Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) and
measurement (A or B) to be viewed.
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) and the measurement selection is
made by the machine’s logic.

ƒ To view the data relevant to Interrupted surfaces measurement press F5 or

Enter
highlight and press .

Surface elaboration
Surface elaboration type coefficient
Integral measurement
type

Sub-page of the
algorithm parameters

Viewing data for interrupted surfaces in Manual mode

Viewing data for interrupted surfaces in Automatic mode

The validity of the data appearing on the page depend on the “Surface Elaboration
Type ” selected (see the table below):

450 Viewing the Measurements A and B Programming – Operator Guide

 Surface Elaboration Type

Surface elaboration
Fixed at 1 Yes Yes Yes
coefficient
Integral measurement type No No No Yes
Algorithm type No No No Yes
Max. Settling Time No Yes Yes Yes

Surface Elaboration Type type of workpiece based on the surface features

(interruptions present or not); it will be used for the execution of the measurement
processing.

Smooth workpiece

Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are simultaneously on the

full section.
Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are NEVER simultaneously
on the full section.
Workpiece with keyway

Surface elaboration coefficient Measurement damping filter for interrupted

surfaces. The processing algorithms of the measurement for interrupted surfaces
foresee determined parameters of the filter, selectable with three different pre-
defined coefficients (1, 2, 3).
The higher damping is obtained with “Surface elaboration coefficient” = 3

“Surface Elaboration Type” = or : each one of the three coefficients (1, 2

and 3) is associated with three different damping speeds.

“Surface Elaboration Type” = : programming the coefficients (1, 2 and 3) causes

the measurement to be held when the contacts are not touching the workpiece.
The measurement is held in different ways for coefficient 1, and for coefficients 2
and 3 (different “Algorithm type” for measure elaboration).

Algorithm type programmed algorithm type.

THRESHOLD – Sampling memory
Four successive measure samples are elaborated (samples distance: 8 ms):
- If the difference between them is more than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is held.
- If the difference between them is less than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is acquired.
HEAD EXT. SYNC. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside. With
the check box enabled, the measurement processing and the integral

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters simultaneously 451

 measurement requested are enabled or disabled according to this signal (for
external synchronism ON the measure is performed)
DERIVATE – Derived memory
The measure trailing edge and leading edge are identified. After the leading edge,
a settling time is awaited before acquiring the measure; it can be programmed in
the sub-page of the technical parameters of the algorithm (Latency Time data).
See chapter 2.2.4.1, on page 452.

Integral Measurement Type type of integral measurement for the period of validity
of the measurement itself.
The following modalities represented by the icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

Processing of the Average value

Max. Settling Time Maximum time passing between the moment the start cycle
is given and the moment when the software starts processing the damped
measurement.

18.2.4.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters

The presence and validity of the parameters appearing on this sub-page depend on
the programming of the “Surface Elaboration Type” and “Algorithm type” parameters.

B
C

Algorithm’s technical parameters sub-page (example)

Surface elaboration type

Surface elaboration
No Yes Yes Yes
parameters (A)
Measure Times (B) No No No Yes
Filter parameters (C) Yes Yes Yes Yes

452 Viewing the Measurements A and B Programming – Operator Guide

 A Parameters of the surface elaboration algorithm defined upon the application
configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical personnel or Marposs’
personnel).

B Measure times
Latency Time Lapse of time during which the measurement is held to
prevent the instability due to over-elongations in the instant in which the
contacts, exiting the hold time, return onto the workpiece.
Measure Time Measurement acquisition time (minimum lapse of time
during which the contacts touch the workpiece).

C Filter parameters for the surface elaboration algorithm. Parameters defined

upon the application configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical
personnel or Marposs’ personnel).

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters simultaneously 453

18.2.5. TIR (Total Indicator Reading) (Option)
It allows to determine the eccentricity error of the workpiece to the rotation axis by
using just a contact (T1).
The TIR option can be enabled or disabled upon Programming. The option is enabled
when the small box to the left of the icon is filled in.
Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) and
measurement (A or B) to be viewed.
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) and the measurement selection is
made by the machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to view the TIR measurement
data.

Viewing TIR measurement data in Manual mode

Viewing TIR measurement data in Automatic mode

Tir Control Value beyond which the T.I.R. measurement must be considered
out of tolerance.

Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside. With
the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of the
workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking the
interval between two clock pulses as time.
The datum “Tir Rpm” is not valid anymore.

Tir Rpm Rotation speed of the workpiece during T.I.R. check.

Tir Delay Time delay before taking the T.I.R. measurement.

454 Viewing the Measurements A and B Programming – Operator Guide

18.2.6. Ovality (Option)
Check of workpiece ovality.
Note: The Ovality measurement is NOT valid with Fenar-L measuring heads
(the ovality check does not make sense at all).
The Ovality option can be enabled or disabled upon Programming. The option is
enabled when the small box to the left of the icon is filled in.
Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) and
measurement (A or B) to be viewed.
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) and the measurement selection is
made by the machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to view the ovality

measurement data.

Parameters of the integral

measurement
Viewing the ovality measurement data in Manual mode

Parameters of the integral

measurement
Viewing the ovality measurement data in Automatic mode

Ovality Control Value beyond which the ovality measurement must be considered
out of tolerance.

Parameters Access to the sub-page containing the parameters of the integral

Enter
measurement: press .
See the meaning of the parameters on chapter 2.2.2.1 "Parameters of the integral
measurement", page 448.

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters simultaneously 455

18.2.7. Direct coupling - Dirac (Option)
The Dirac application consists in the execution of the In-Process measurement of a
workpiece (typically an outside diameter) directly coupled with the Pre-Process
measurement of another workpiece (typically an inside diameter – hole).
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the “Dirac” option and define its
characteristics. The option is enabled when the small box to the left of the icon is filled
in.

Note: In manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the Dirac
application data.

Viewing Dirac application data in Manual mode

Viewing Dirac application data in Automatic mode

Correction Code request code associated with the measurement on which you want
to carry out the Dirac-type correction.
The "Correction code" of the set of the Post-Process type, that determines the
correction value, shall be the same of the associated set of the In-Process type
that must carry out the Dirac correction.

456 Viewing the Measurements A and B Programming – Operator Guide

 Correction Mode selection of the Post-Process measurement value to be
used for the Dirac function

SINGLE Value of the single measurement (A or B) of the double cycle

MAX (A, B) Maximum measurement value between the two measurements
(A and B) of the double cycle
MIN (A, B) Minimum measurement value between the two measurements (A
and B) of the double cycle
MEAN (A, B) Mean measurement value between the two measurements (A
and B) of the double cycle

Clearance parameter of coupling between In-Process measurement and Post-

Process measurement. The programmed value is algebraically added to the
measurement and is ignored during zero-setting.

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters simultaneously 457

18.2.8. PP/IP coupling (Option)
Association of an Post-Process diameter measurement with an In-Process diameter
measurement (either simple or double).
The association between sets is obtained by setting the same coupling code (1 to 31,
necessarily different from 0) in all the sets to be associated.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to view the page of data.

Viewing data in Manual mode

Viewing data in Automatic mode

Coupling Code code of association between the sets (1 to 31). Code “0” indicates
no association.

458 Viewing the Measurements A and B Programming – Operator Guide

18.3. Viewing Measurements A and B

The View Measure Bargraph page is where To reach this page:

the size of the workpiece can be monitored
¾ Select Automatic or Manual
in both Manual and Automatic modes.
mode then choose one:

Typically, the View Measure Bargraph page ¾ Press

is defined as the Home page (default
screen), see section 4.2.3 “Defining the ¾ Press then
HOME key” on page 32. ¾ Refer to Menu maps on pages
438 and 440.

“ABS View” data valid: based on its programming (measuring head sub-page
- section 2.2.1.1, page 444) the measure visualization (numerical and
graphical) may be:
i • in relative value, with reference to the measure “zero”
• in absolute value, with reference to the programmed nominal value
• in absolute value in the whole measurement range of the head, with
reference to the field center value and without change of scale.

18.3.1. Viewing the Measurement in Manual Mode

Select the corresponding Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
Current measurement

Electrical Zeroing
Numerical and gra- button (1)
phical representation of
the selected measuring
head Numerical value of
measurement
Retraction
status
Bargraph of
measurement
Selected Part
Type/Cycle

(1) Not present if the “Multiple electric zeroing” function (section 2.5.3.2 on page 472)
is enabled.

To pass from viewing of Measurement A to Measurement B, and the contrary, act

as follows:

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters simultaneously 459

 Enter
1. Press to access the page.

2. Press to highlight the “Measurement selection” field.

3. Press or to pass from Measurement A to Measurement B or the

contrary.
Measurement
selection field

or

Note: Electrical zero from this page, by means of the Zeroing button , is
possible only after a mechanical zeroing has been performed.

460 Viewing Measurements A and B – Operator Guide

18.3.2. Viewing the Measurement in Automatic mode

Note: In Automatic mode the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the machine’s
logic.

Measurement diagram with cone

direction viewing

Numerical and graphic Numerical and graphic

representation of representation of
Measurement A Measurement B

Current Part/Cycle

Press to view measurements A and B individually and in sequence.

Measurement zeroing status
(red) not zeroed
(green) zeroed
Bargraph of Numerical value of
measurement measurement

Measurement A Measurement B
Nominal value of the
measurement (1)

Control points viewing (the squares fill in as

the control point is reached

(1) Not displayed with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning” modality,
enabled.

If optional functions (TIR, Ovality) are present on one or both measurements, they
can be viewed in sequence by means of key or .

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters simultaneously 461

 The display sequence is as follows:
Measurement A « Measurement A Options « Measurement B « Measurement
B Options
Hereafter there are the Measurement A options view pages as an example.

Bargraph of measurement
Numerical value of
measurement
TIR
Control point status:
under limit
over limit
Bargraph of measurement
Numerical value of
measurement
Ovality
Control point status:
under limit
over limit

Note: The Ovality measurement is NOT valid with Fenar-L measuring heads
(the ovality check does not make sense at all).

462 Viewing Measurements A and B – Operator Guide

18.4. Viewing the Zeroing values of Measurements A and B

The Zero Summary page To reach this page:

contains information about
¾ Select Manual or Automatic mode then
the various zeroing functions
choose one:
of the gauge system and can
be viewed in either Manual or ¾ Press then .
Automatic mode.
¾ Refer to Menu maps on pages 438 and 440.
Measurement selection field

Viewing zeroing values in Manual and Automatic Modes

Note: this page shows only the zeroing values for the functions active in the current
application.

Zeroing Value Sum of the accumulated zeroing values from electrically zeroing
the gauge system.
Note: if the modality “Self-learning zero shift” (see paragraph 2.2.1.2, page 445)
is active, the “Zeroing Value” is not significant anymore, and is replaced
by the following symbols:

(red): system not zeroed

(green): zero-setting performed (system zeroed).

Master Deviation Value programmed to indicate the difference between the size of
the sample part and the final size you want to obtain.

Zero Adjust Sum of the zero corrections given through keyboard during the part
machining.

Dirac correction value of the Dirac correction (it appears if the "Direct
coupling/Dirac" option is enabled). The Dirac correction value is reset for all the
sets provided with the Dirac option in the following cases:
• at the electronic unit power on
• in the Automatic/Manual switching
• during zero-setting or zero-setting reset

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters simultaneously 463

 Clearance parameter of coupling between In-Process measurement and Post-
Process measurement.

18.4.1. Viewing the Zeroing values in Manual mode

Select the Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).

18.4.2. Viewing the Zeroing values in Automatic mode

Note: In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the

machine’s logic.

464 Viewing the Zeroing values of Measurements A and B – Operator Guide

18.5. Zeroing Measurements A and B
18.5.1. Introduction
Zeroing is the process of setting up and adjusting the gauge and a measuring head to
a master workpiece to assure that post-process inspection of the workpiece yields the
desired final dimensions.
Types of Zeroing:
Mechanical Zeroing – physically adjusts the fingers/contacts so that they are within
the foreseen measurement range (see section 2.5.2, on page 466).
Electrical Zeroing – adjustment operation to be performed periodically to obtain the
maximum accuracy and reliability of measurements on the workpiece (see section
2.5.3, on page 469).
• Electric zero-setting shared by the sets – operation to be performed in
case of “Masterless” application (linearization of the measurement range).
(see section 2.5.3.1, on page 471).
• Multiple Electrical Zeroing – this functional feature is present if it was
enabled upon the configuration stage of the application (see section 2.5.3.2,
on page 472).
Zero Adjustments – Corrections made when after a post-process inspection of the
workpieces small differences in size are found (see section 2.6, on page 474).
Zero Resets – removes the offsets generated by the system during the last electrical
zeroing (see section 2.7, on page 480).
Zeroing Conditions
Static – The master workpiece is NOT rotating.
Dynamic – The master workpiece is rotating and wet by the coolant.

When to zero the gauge system?

TYPE OF ZEROING CONDITIONS
Mechanical Zeroing
At initial setup
followed by
Electrical Zeroing
At grinder start up
Electrical Zeroing At the beginning of each work shift
After changing Part Type

Zero Adjust When the workpiece size changes

When the zeroing range of the measuring head
Zero Reset has been exceeded.
followed by After replacement of any measuring head
Mechanical Zeroing & component (head, contacts, fingers, etc.)
Electrical Zeroing After any mechanical changes are made to the
gauge system.

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters simultaneously 465

18.5.2. Mechanical Zeroing
Mechanical zeroing MUST be done to a master workpiece:
ƒ At initial set up of the gauge system.
ƒ If the allowed zero adjustment range has been exceeded.
ƒ After any mechanical or electrical changes to the gauge system (fingers, contacts,
...).
Mechanical zeroing must be performed only in Manual mode and statically.
Note: Each measuring head that has been defined MUST be Mechanically
Zeroed.
Mechanical Zeroing of a measuring head:
1. Gauge in Manual Mode.
2. Select the Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) relevant to the head to
be zeroed.
3. Eliminate any zeroing offsets:

- press then ;
Enter
- press F5 or highlight the Zero Reset button and press .

- a question box appears asking to Reset: press to highlight “Yes” and press
Enter
.
Note: Zero reset is performed both for Measurement A and Measurement B.

4. Press then to highlight the Mechanical Zeroing page icon.

The mechanical zeroing page relevant to Measurement A is viewed.
Indication of measurement
and measuring head

Numerical and graphic

Numerical and graphic
view of measurement
view of measurement
value of the first
value of the second
transducer -T1
transducer -T2

5. Place the master workpiece into the machine.

466 Zeroing Measurements A and B – Operator Guide

 6. Adjust the finger/contact assemblies of the measuring head 1 so they can be
inserted into gauging position safely.
The adjustment mode of the finger/contact assemblies depends on the
adjustment method used (with adjustable guides or with contacts).
(pls. see Chapter 6 “Measuring head Mechanical zero-setting” on page 535).

Finger/contact assembly – T1
Cable

Measuring Contacts
head support DO NOT
touch
Measuring master
head

Slide adapter
Finger/contact assembly – T2

Slide

7. Bring the measuring head to gauging position.

8. Adjust the upper finger/contact assembly (T1) making the contact touch the
master until the measurement value on the upper digital display of the
Mechanical Zeroing page is next to zero (± 10 µ).

Measurement
value next to zero

9. Adjust the lower finger/contact assembly (T2) making the contact touch the
master until the measurement value on the upper digital display of the
Mechanical Zeroing page is next to zero (± 10 µ).

Measurement
value next to zero

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters simultaneously 467

 This completes the mechanical of measuring head-Measurement A; now perform an
mechanical setup of measuring head-Measurement B.

ƒ Press to highlight the “Measurement selection” field.

ƒ Press or to pass from Measurement A to Measurement B.

Measurement
selection field Indication of measurement
and measuring head

Repeat the operations described for measuring head-Measurement A from step 6 to

step 9 for measuring head-Measurement B.

This completes the mechanical setup of measuring heads; now perform an Electric
Zeroing (see section 2.5.3 on page 469).

468 Zeroing Measurements A and B – Operator Guide

18.5.3. Electrical Zeroing
Electrical Zeroing MUST be done:
ƒ In manual mode on a master workpiece.
ƒ Dynamically, i.e. with the master workpiece rotating and wet by coolant.
ƒ Regularly, usually at the beginning of each work shift and/or when the grinding
wheel is switched on.
Note: Each measuring head that has been defined MUST be electrically zeroed
for each work cycle in which it is used.
The electrical zeroing procedure acts on both measurements, indipendent
of measurement displayed (A or B).

Electrical Zeroing Procedure:

1. Gauge in manual mode.
2. Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
3. Position the master workpiece in machine
4. Bring the measuring heads to gauging position

5. Bring up the electric zeroing page: press and then . Measurement A is

displayed.

6. Press or with the “Measurement selection” field highlighted to switch

from Measure A to Measure B and back.

Zeroing value (1)

Electric zeroing
button
Master deviation
Nominal value of the Measurement value
measurement (2)

Measurement selection
(current measurement)

(2) Not displayed with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning modality”
enabled.

Enter
7. Press F4 or highlight with and press .

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters simultaneously 469

 8. A question box appears asking to confirm the zeroing: press to highlight
Enter
“Yes” and press .

Zeroing button

Both measurements have been electrically zero-set.

If no error messages are displayed the electric zero-setting procedure has been
correctly performed.
The Gauge can be switched to Automatic operating mode.
Note: Electric zero-setting with integral measurement.
Once completed the electric zero-setting procedure the measurement is
still displayed (graphic and numerical display) dynamically (viewing of the
measurement variation during the part rotation).

(1)Note: if the modality “Self-learning zero shift” (see paragraph 2.2.1.2, page 445)
is active, the “Zeroing Value” is not significant anymore, and is replaced
by the following symbols:

(red): system not zeroed

(green): zero-setting performed (system zeroed).

470 Zeroing Measurements A and B – Operator Guide

18.5.3.1. Shared Electric zero-setting (“Masterless” function)
In case of application with “Masterless” function (linearization of the measurement
range / measurement card with DSP-Digital Signal Processing), carry out a
simultaneous zero-setting of all the sets that use the selected measuring head
(shared electric zero-setting).

Measuring head in use

Mechanical Zeroing
Page Measurement value
of the first contact

Measurement value of 1
the second contact
Measurement selection field

1 Data present only with measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”.

Execution of electric zero-setting shared by the sets

Aborts the electric zero-setting shared by the sets

Zero-setting procedure
• Position the measuring heads (contacts T1 / T2) and fasten them onto the special
mechanical support, in the most suitable range based on the available sample
workpiece.
• Bring the measuring heads to measuring position on the sample workpiece.

• Press or with the “Measurement selection” field highlighted to switch

from Measure A to Measure B and back.

• Press the key to carry out zero-setting. In this way all the sets that use the
measuring head are perfectly zeroed (shared zero-setting).

Note: if a new set is defined, combined with this measuring head, it is necessary
to repeat the zero-setting procedure.

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters simultaneously 471

18.5.3.2. Multiple Electrical Zeroing (Option)
This functional feature is present if it was enabled upon the configuration stage of the
application.
This functional feature allows using up to 32 different zeroing indexes for each set;
this means that it is possible to zero-set on different masters without having to change
the set (all the other programming data being equal). Afterwards it is possible to work
with the corresponding parts by calling out the different zeroing indexes.

Measurement zeroing status

Zeroing index no. (red) not zeroed
(1 to 32)
(green) zeroed

Electric zeroing button

Measurement nominal
value (1)

(1) Not displayed with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning modality”
enabled.

To select the index no. act as follows:

ƒ use to move the cursor to the index number, or to view the desired
Enter
value, then press to confirm.

This functional feature is optimized for the use with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic)
self-learning” modality (see section 2.2.1.2, page 445), but can also be used if such a
modality has not been enabled
“Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning” modality, enabled
After the execution of the mechanical zeroing it is possible, by exploiting the different
zeroing indexes (1 to 32), to carry out an electric zeroing on masters that do not differ
more than the maximum zeroing range without changing the measurement nominal
value (maximum zeroing range: maximum value of the zero shift range +
programmed value of the head zero range).
Changing the measurement nominal value does not cause a reset of the current
zeroing index.

“Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning” modality, NOT enabled

After the execution of an electric zeroing with a determined index, if you want to zero-
set with another index it is necessary to:
• change the zeroing index
• change the measurement nominal value

472 Zeroing Measurements A and B – Operator Guide

 • zero-set.
This procedure is necessary because changing the nominal value causes a reset of
the current zeroing index.
If you change the Field Center value, the current zeroing index is always reset, unlike
the other indexes.
The zero adjust that was set remains valid until you switch between the zeroed
indexes, while it is reset when switching to a index that was not zeroed.

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters simultaneously 473

18.6. Zero Adjustments for Measurements A and B (Option)

Zero adjustments are made when a post- To reach this page:

process inspection of the workpiece shows
¾ Select Manual or Automatic
an incorrect size.
mode then choose one:

¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to the Menu maps on
pages 438 and 440.

Example:
The workpiece is undersize: enter a zero adjustment with the same value but with
opposite sign.
APPLICATION PART TOO SMALL Part too big
OUTSIDE diameter Add Subtract
INSIDE diameter Subtract Add
This can be done in either Manual or Automatic mode.
There are identical and independent pages for zero adjustment programming for
Measurement A and for Measurement B:
Measurement selection field
Current measurement

Measurement A Measurement B

To select Measurement A or Measurement B:

1. Press to reach the page.

2. Use to highlight the “Measurement selection” field .

3. Press or to select Measurement A or Measurement B.

For simplicity we will always refer to the page relevant to Measurement A from here
on.

474 Zero Adjustments for Measurements A and B (Option) – Operator Guide

18.6.1. Zero Adjustment in Manual mode

Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) and press .
Note: Zero adjustments in manual mode affect the next cycle.

Bargraph of sum of zero

adjustments

Part drawing
Sum of zero
adjustments

Bargraph and numerical

display of measurement
Single/double zero value
adjustment

Value of zero adjustment

value entered

Zero Adjustment Reset key

Changing Zero Adjustment value

1. Press to highlight the field

2. Press or to increase or decrease the value

3. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form (summation of zero adjustments).

Single/double zero adjustment

Possibility of inserting a zero adjustment value either for the single measurement or
for both measurements simultaneously.

To select the desired mode, press the F2 key or highlight the key and press
until the corresponding icon is selected.
The selected icon (key) indicates:

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters simultaneously 475

 Zero adjustment on the single measurement A or B selected

Zero adjustment on both measurements simultaneously

Resetting Zero Adjustments

Enter
1. Press F5 or highlight and press . A “Reset?” question box will appear.

Zero adjustments reset

Enter
2. Press to highlight “Yes” and press . The zero adjustments are reset
for both measurement.

18.6.2. Zero Adjustments in automatic mode

Note: Zero adjustments in automatic mode are made while grinding and affect
the current cycle.

18.6.2.1. Zero adjustment for the current Set (part/cycle)

Bargraph of Σ value

Part drawing Sum of zero adjustments

(Σ)

Single/double zero Bargraph and numerical

adjustment display of measurement
value

Zero adjustment
value entered

476 Zero Adjustments for Measurements A and B (Option) – Operator Guide

 Changing the zero adjustment value

1. Press to reach the page

2. Press to highlight the field

3. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

4. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments for the cycle).

Single/double zero adjustment

Possibility of inserting a zero adjustment value either for the single measurement or
for both measurements simultaneously.

To select the desired mode, press the F2 key or highlight the key and press
until the corresponding icon is selected.
The selected icon (key) indicates:

Zero adjustment on the single measurement A or B selected

Zero adjustment on both measurements simultaneously

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters simultaneously 477

18.6.2.2. Zero adjustment with Set (Part/Cycle) selection

Bargraph of Σ value for the

selected cycle
Sum of zero adjustments
Part drawing (Σ) for the selected Part

Sum of zero adjustments

(Σ) for the selected cycle

Zero adjustment value

Number of selected Part
entered for the selected cycle

Zero adjustment value entered

for the selected Part

The zero adjustments entered for the selected Part concern all the cycles using the
same head and belong to the same part. The common correction value is subtracted
in the same way following an electric zero-setting.

Selecting the Set (Part/Cycle)

1. Holding down press to highlight the Part/Cycle selection box below.

Current Part Type

Part Number Cycle Number

2. Press or to view the selected Part/Cycle, otherwise press or to

change the Cycle number and or to change the Part number.

3. Press to confirm the Part/Cycle selection made. The program automatically

exits the selection box and returns to the page.

478 Zero Adjustments for Measurements A and B (Option) – Operator Guide

 Changing the zero adjustment value for the cycle

1. Press to reach the page

2. Press to highlight the field

3. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

4. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments for the cycle).

5. Press .

Changing the zero adjustment value for the part

1. Press to reach the page

2. Press to highlight the field

3. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

4. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments for the part).

5. Press .

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters simultaneously 479

18.7. Zero Reset for Measurements A and B

This function removes all offsets generated To reach this page:

by the system during the last electrical
¾ Select Manual mode, then
zeroing (the transducers value is shown).
choose one:

¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to the Menu map on page
440.
It can be selected only in manual mode:
ƒ After mechanical changes to the gauge system.
ƒ When the maximum Zero Adjustment value available has been reached.
Electric Zeroing Reset Procedure:

Note: The reset procedure acts on both measurements, indipendent of

measurement displayed (A or B).
1. Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
Enter
2. Press F5 or highlight and press . A “Reset?” question box will appear.
Reset button

Enter
3. Press to highlight “Yes” and press .

4. Press and to highlight the Mechanical Zeroing page icon.

Mechanical
zeroing page

The gauge system MUST NOW be Mechanically then Electrically Zeroed (see section
2.5 on page 465).

480 Zero Reset for Measurements A and B – Operator Guide

19. TWO POST-PROCESS DIAMETERS & TAPER
This section covers the measurement application TWO POST-PROCESS DIAMETERS &
TAPER and its configured options.
In this application two measuring heads are used to perform two different
measurements simultaneously (Measurement A & Measurement B) on a part.
The taper measurement is calculated as difference between Measurement A and
Measurement B:
Taper = (Measurement A) – (Measurement B)

Note: Anyway the measuring application TWO POST-PROCESS DIAMETERS & TAPER
can also be used as SINGLE POST-PROCESS DIAMETER (Measurement A)
measuring cycle.
This measuring cycle can be combined with Parts/Cycles as long as they match the
machine’s logic programming.

Note: In the rest of the chapter the screen pages relevant to Measurement A will
be reported as an example; the pages relevant to Measurement B are
identical.

19.1. Menu Maps

Operator tasks are performed in both Automatic and Manual modes. Only the menu
map folders with operator functions -Viewing, General Adjustments and Utilities -
are shown on the following pages.

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper 481

19.1.1. Automatic Mode - Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper Menu
Map
Viewings General adjustments
FOLDER

View measure View zeroings View programming

SUB-FOLDERS
PAGES

Measurement Zero values Meas. A Zero adjust (Option)

bargraph Section 3.4 + Section 3.6.2
Section 3.3.2 Meas. B
+

Use to view

Taper
Programmed values
Section 3.2

Options Options
Measure A Measure B

Meas. A Meas. B Taper

F5 – Surface elaboration
F4 - (only if the measuring function for
Control points interrupted surfaces is enabled)
(Section 3.2.4) (Section 3.2.5)

Options (measure A / measure B) (See the following page ….)

482 Menu Maps – Operator Guide

 Options (measure a / measure B)
Automatic Mode

The optional functions are enabled during the application configuration stage; if the
optional function is available the corresponding icon function key is displayed.
There may be two function keys (F6 and F3) for calling out the optional functions (see
section 3.2.1.4)

TIR Ovality
(Section 3.2.6) (Section 3.2.7)

Direct coupling-
PP/IP coupling
Dirac.
Section 3.2.9
Section 3.2.8

Getting around the program

Enter
moves down to the next level.

moves up one level.

moves between folders, sub-folders or pages on the same level..

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper 483

19.1.2. Manual Mode - Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper Menu Map

Utility
FOLDERS

Measure zeroing Measure setup View

SUB-FOLDERS
PAGES

Meas. A Meas. A Meas. A Meas. A Meas. A Meas. A Meas. A

Meas. B Meas. B Meas. B Meas. B Meas. B Meas. B Meas. B

Mechanical Electrical Zero View measure Surface type View
zeroing zeroing adjustments Sec. 3.3.1 setup (1) Zeroings
Sec. 3.5.2 Sec. 3.5.3 (Option) Sez. 0
Sec. 3.6.1
Taper
View
Programming
(1) This page is not seen if the Sec. 3.2
surface is smooth

F4 - Control F5 – Surface elaboration

points (only if the measuring function for
(Section . 3.2.4) interrupted surfaces is enabled ).
Section 3.2.5

Options (measure A / measure B) (See the following page ….)

484 Menu Maps – Operator Guide

 Options (measure a / measure B)
Manual Mode

The optional functions are enabled during the application configuration stage; if the
optional function is available the corresponding icon function key is displayed.
There may be two function keys (F6 and F3) for calling out the optional functions (see
section 3.2.1.4)

TIR Ovality
(Section 3.2.6) (Section 3.2.7

Direct coupling-
PP/IP coupling
Dirac.
Section 3.2.9
Section 3.2.8

Getting around the program

Enter
moves down to the next level.

moves up one level.

moves between folders, sub-folders or pages on the same level..

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper 485

19.2. Viewing the Measurements A, B and Taper Programming

All the programmed values can be viewed in To reach this page:

either Automatic or Manual mode on the
¾ Select Manual or Automatic
”View Programming” page.
mode
Additional pages can be viewed by using the
¾ Refer to the Menu maps on
F3-F6 function keys or highlighting an option
pages 482 and 484.
Enter
and pressing .

There are two identical and independent programming pages for measurements A
and B (only the icon of the page that identifies the measurement type is different), and
a page for Taper measurement:

Measurement A / Diameter 1
Measurement B / Diameter 2
Taper masurement
For simplicity, from here on we will refer to the page relevant to Measurement A for
both measurements A and B.
Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) and
the measurement (A, B or Taper) to be viewed.
In Automatic mode the Set (Part/Cycle) and the measurement selection is
made by the machine’s logic.

Viewing Programming page in Manual mode

Press to view Measurement A , Measurement B or Taper

Measurement individually and in sequence.

Measurement A Measurement B Taper masurement

Options
Integral measurement data
Measurement data

The data viewed concern the selected Part/Cycle.

486 Viewing the Measurements A, B and Taper Programming – Operator Guide

 Viewing Programming page in Automatic mode

Press + to view Measurement A , Measurement B or Taper

Measurement individually and in sequence.

Measurement A Measurement B Taper Measurement

Options

Measurement data Integral measurement data

The data viewed concern the selected Part/Cycle.

19.2.1. Measurement data

Zero shift data (only with

measuring heads Measuring head sub-page
enabled for “zero shift”)

Head Number of measuring head (Measurement A ) combined with the

part/cycle selected

Nominal value Nominal value of measurement (data valid only with measuring
heads enabled for “zero shift”).
Data not valid if the modality “Self-learning zero shift” is active (see chapter 3.2.1.2
“Zero shift display“ on page 489).

Master deviation The difference between the nominal value of master and the
gauged measurement of the workpiece used as such.

Delay Time passing between the “start cycle” signal supplied by the logic
system and the internal enabling to gauge for starting the measuring cycle.

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper 487

19.2.1.1. Measuring head sub-page

Use to move the cursor to (highlight) the box before the head number and press
Enter
.

Measuring head sub-page

Head Number of measuring head (Measurement A ) combined with the

part/cycle selected

Display resolution for the current set:

• Metric system :1µm / 0,1 µm / 0,01µm
• Imperial/Inches system: 0.00001” / 0.000001” / 0.0000001”

ABS View Measure visualization modality. Non-significant data (underlit) with

measuring heads not enabled for “Zero shift” (measure in relative value).
DISABLED: measure visualization in relative value, with reference to the measure
“zero”.
Nominal Value: measure visualization in absolute value with reference to the
nominal value.
Field Center: measure visualization in absolute value in the whole measurement
range of the head, with reference to the field center value and without change of
scale.
Example

ABS View= DISABLED ABS View= Nominal Value ABS View= Field Center
(40.0000)

488 Viewing the Measurements A, B and Taper Programming – Operator Guide

19.2.1.2. Zero shift display
Only with measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”.
Enter
Use to highlight the box beside the “Nominal Value” data and press : access
to a sub-page where there are displayed the type and values programmed for the
zero shift used.

The state of the Check Boxes defines the type of zero shift used in the cycle:

Internally calculated zero shift

The check boxes relevant to the other zero shift
modalities are OFF … (modalities not active).
Zero shift internally calculated based on the
nominal measurement value programmed
(Nominal Value) and the programmed value of
the Range Center.

Programmed zero shift

Set the corresponding check box to ON :.
For each contact of the measuring head it was
defined its own “Zero shift” value that is used
regardless the nominal measurement value
(Nominal Value) programmed.

Static/Dynamic self-learning zero shift

When the “Nominal Value” data is underlit
(invalid data) it means that the (static or dynamic)
zero shift self-learning mode is active.
Selecting this modality allows zero-setting in the
whole Zero Shift range, regardless the nominal
measurement value (Nominal Value)
programmed.
Note: the modality “Self-learning zero shift” is not available in applications with
measure card with DSP (linearization of the measure range / “Masterless”
application).

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper 489

19.2.1.3. Measurement Parameters
Controls. The number of control points is set at the configuration
level.
Surface Elaboration. Icon present only if the measurement function
for interrupted surfaces has been enabled.

19.2.1.4. Measurement optional functions (Options)

The optional functions are enabled during the application configuration stage; if the
optional function is available the corresponding function key is displayed.
There may be two function keys (F6 and F3) for calling out the optional functions.

Function keys (F6 and F3) for

measurement optional function

If there are more than two optional functions (more function keys necessary) the F6
and F3 key have dynamic management. The “scroll” icon appears within the
key, beside the associated F# key number, to indicate that there are non-displayed
function keys. Highlight the key and use the and keys to scroll the list of the
measurement optional functions (represented by the relevant icons) available. Select
the optional function by pressing the F6 or F3 function key associated to the icon of
that function.

Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the measurement optional

functions present; an optional function is active when the box to the left of the
corresponding function key is full.
Example:

TIR optional function active

490 Viewing the Measurements A, B and Taper Programming – Operator Guide

19.2.2. Taper Measurement
The taper measurement can be enabled/disabled upon programming.

Taper measurement
: enabled
… disabled

Value of taper measu-

rement control points

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper 491

19.2.3. Integral Measurement

Manual mode

Enter
Type of
integral
measurement

Automatic mode

Enter
Type of
integral
measurement

Type Type of integral measurement. The following modalities represented by the

icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

Processing of the Average value
Processing of the Rolling average

Parameters Access to the sub-page containing the parameters of the integral

Enter
measurement:: press to highlight the check-box and press .

492 Viewing the Measurements A, B and Taper Programming – Operator Guide

19.2.3.1. Parameters of the integral measurement
The sub-page containing the parameters of the integral measurement can also be
called out from the page of “Ovality” measurement, if present (section 3.2.7, page
500).
Manual Mode example.

Ovality Measurement
4

Enter Enter

Parameters of the integral

measurement

4 With “Type of integral measurement” = , the parameters of the integral

measurement concern just the “Ovality” measurement (if present). Should this
option is not present, access to the page of the integral measurement
parameters is disabled.

Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside. With
the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of the
workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking the
interval between two clock pulses as time.
The data “Meas. RPM” and “Rev. Percentage” are not valid anymore.

Meas. Rpm Number of revolutions/minute of the workpiece for the integral

measurement processing.

Rev. Percentage (1 to 1000%) percentage of the revolution of the part on

which the integral measurement is performed. Default 100% = 1 revolution of the
part.

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper 493

19.2.4. Control points
The gauge is configured with a fixed number of control points.
Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) and
the measurement (A or B) to be viewed.
In Automatic mode the Set (Part/Cycle) and the measurement selection is
made by the machine’s logic.

ƒ To view the programmed control points, press F4 or highlight and

Enter
press .

Viewing control points in Manual mode

Viewing control points in Automatic mode

494 Viewing the Measurements A, B and Taper Programming – Operator Guide

19.2.5. Type of surface processing (interrupted surfaces)
The measurement of interrupted surfaces is electrically damped (filtered) and such a
damping shall be linked both to the type of workpiece and rotation speed. Damping
serves to keep the measurement stable when there are interruptions on the
workpiece.
Upon Programming it is possible to define the features of the measurement
processing for interrupted surfaces.
Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) and
measurement (A or B) to be viewed.
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) and the measurement selection is
made by the machine’s logic.

ƒ To view the data relevant to Interrupted surfaces measurement press F5 or

Enter
highlight and press .

Surface elaboration
Surface elaboration type coefficient
Integral measurement
type

Sub-page of the
algorithm parameters

Viewing data for interrupted surfaces in Manual mode

Viewing data for interrupted surfaces in Automatic mode

The validity of the data appearing on the page depend on the “Surface Elaboration
Type ” selected (see the table below):

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper 495

 Surface Elaboration Type

Surface elaboration
Fixed at 1 Yes Yes Yes
coefficient
Integral measurement type No No No Yes
Algorithm type No No No Yes
Max. Settling Time No Yes Yes Yes

Surface Elaboration Type type of workpiece based on the surface features

(interruptions present or not); it will be used for the execution of the measurement
processing.

Smooth workpiece

Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are simultaneously on the

full section.
Grooved workpiece. The measuring contacts are NEVER simultaneously
on the full section.
Workpiece with keyway

Surface elaboration coefficient Measurement damping filter for interrupted

surfaces. The processing algorithms of the measurement for interrupted surfaces
foresee determined parameters of the filter, selectable with three different pre-
defined coefficients (1, 2, 3).
The higher damping is obtained with “Surface elaboration coefficient” = 3

“Surface Elaboration Type” = or : each one of the three coefficients (1, 2

and 3) is associated with three different damping speeds.

“Surface Elaboration Type” = : programming the coefficients (1, 2 and 3) causes

the measurement to be held when the contacts are not touching the workpiece.
The measurement is held in different ways for coefficient 1, and for coefficients 2
and 3 (different “Algorithm type” for measure elaboration).

Algorithm type programmed algorithm type.

THRESHOLD – Sampling memory
Four successive measure samples are elaborated (samples distance: 8 ms):
- If the difference between them is more than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is held.
- If the difference between them is less than 5 µm (threshold value) the
measurement is acquired.
HEAD EXT. SYNC. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside. With
the check box enabled, the measurement processing and the integral

496 Viewing the Measurements A, B and Taper Programming – Operator Guide

 measurement requested are enabled or disabled according to this signal (for
external synchronism ON the measure is performed)
DERIVATE – Derived memory
The measure trailing edge and leading edge are identified. After the leading edge,
a settling time is awaited before acquiring the measure; it can be programmed in
the sub-page of the technical parameters of the algorithm (Latency Time data).
See chapter 3.2.5.1, on page 497.

Integral Measurement Type type of integral measurement for the period of validity
of the measurement itself.
The following modalities represented by the icons are available:

Instant measurement value

Processing of the Maximum value

Processing of the Minimum value

Processing of the Average value

Max. Settling Time Maximum time passing between the moment the start cycle
is given and the moment when the software starts processing the damped
measurement.

19.2.5.1. Sub-page of the algorithm’s technical parameters

The presence and validity of the parameters appearing on this sub-page depend on
the programming of the “Surface Elaboration Type” and “Algorithm type” parameters.

B
C

Algorithm’s technical parameters sub-page (example)

Surface elaboration type

Surface elaboration
No Yes Yes Yes
parameters (A)
Measure Times (B) No No No Yes
Filter parameters (C) Yes Yes Yes Yes

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper 497

 A Parameters of the surface elaboration algorithm defined upon the application
configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical personnel or Marposs’
personnel).

B Measure times
Latency Time Lapse of time during which the measurement is held to
prevent the instability due to over-elongations in the instant in which the
contacts, exiting the hold time, return onto the workpiece.
Measure Time Measurement acquisition time (minimum lapse of time
during which the contacts touch the workpiece).

C Filter parameters for the surface elaboration algorithm. Parameters defined

upon the application configuration stage (reserved for qualified technical
personnel or Marposs’ personnel).

498 Viewing the Measurements A, B and Taper Programming – Operator Guide

19.2.6. TIR (Total Indicator Reading) (Option)
It allows to determine the eccentricity error of the workpiece to the rotation axis by
using just a contact (T1).
The TIR option can be enabled or disabled upon Programming. The option is enabled
when the small box to the left of the icon is filled in.
Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) and
measurement (A or B) to be viewed.
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) and the measurement selection is
made by the machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to view the TIR measurement
data.

Viewing TIR measurement data in Manual mode

Viewing TIR measurement data in Automatic mode

Tir Control Value beyond which the T.I.R. measurement must be considered
out of tolerance.

Head Ext. Synch. Measurement performed with clock signal from outside. With
the check box enabled, the measurement processing self learns the speed of the
workpiece rotation and performs the integral measurement requested, taking the
interval between two clock pulses as time.
The datum “Tir Rpm” is not valid anymore.

Tir Rpm Rotation speed of the workpiece during T.I.R. check.

Tir Delay Time delay before taking the T.I.R. measurement.

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper 499

19.2.7. Ovality (Option)
Check of workpiece ovality.
Note: The Ovality measurement is NOT valid with Fenar-L measuring heads
(the ovality check does not make sense at all).
The Ovality option can be enabled or disabled upon Programming. The option is
enabled when the small box to the left of the icon is filled in.
Note: In Manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) and
measurement (A or B) to be viewed.
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) and the measurement selection is
made by the machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to view the ovality

measurement data.

Parameters of the integral

measurement
Viewing the ovality measurement data in Manual mode

Parameters of the integral

measurement
Viewing the ovality measurement data in Automatic mode

Ovality Control Value beyond which the ovality measurement must be considered
out of tolerance.

Parameters Access to the sub-page containing the parameters of the integral

Enter
measurement:: press .
See the meaning of the parameters on chapter 3.2.3.1 "Parameters of the integral
measurement", page 493.

500 Viewing the Measurements A, B and Taper Programming – Operator Guide

19.2.8. Direct coupling - Dirac (Option)
The Dirac application consists in the execution of the In-Process measurement of a
workpiece (typically an outside diameter) directly coupled with the Pre-Process
measurement of another workpiece (typically an inside diameter – hole).
Upon Programming it is possible to enable/disable the “Dirac” option and define its
characteristics. The option is enabled when the small box to the left of the icon is filled
in.

Note: In manual mode, select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the
machine’s logic.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to access the page of the Dirac
application data.

Viewing Dirac application data in Manual mode

Viewing Dirac application data in Automatic mode

Correction Code request code associated with the measurement on which you want
to carry out the Dirac-type correction.
The "Correction code" of the set of the Post-Process type, that determines the
correction value, shall be the same of the associated set of the In-Process type
that must carry out the Dirac correction.

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper 501

 Correction Mode selection of the Post-Process measurement value to be
used for the Dirac function

SINGLE Value of the single measurement (A or B) of the double cycle

MAX (A, B) Maximum measurement value between the two measurements
(A and B) of the double cycle
MIN (A, B) Minimum measurement value between the two measurements (A
and B) of the double cycle
MEAN (A, B) Mean measurement value between the two measurements (A
and B) of the double cycle

Clearance parameter of coupling between In-Process measurement and Post-

Process measurement. The programmed value is algebraically added to the
measurement and is ignored during zero-setting.

502 Viewing the Measurements A, B and Taper Programming – Operator Guide

19.2.9. PP/IP coupling (Option)
Association of an Post-Process diameter measurement with an In-Process diameter
measurement (either simple or double).
The association between sets is obtained by setting the same coupling code (1 to 31,
necessarily different from 0) in all the sets to be associated.

ƒ Press the F# key associated to the icon to view the page of data.

Viewing data in Manual mode

Viewing data in Automatic mode

Coupling Code code of association between the sets (1 to 31). Code “0” indicates
no association.

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper 503

19.3. Viewing Measurements A and B

The View Measure Bargraph page is where To reach this page:

the size of the workpiece can be monitored
¾ Select Automatic or Manual
in both Manual and Automatic modes.
mode then choose one:

Typically, the View Measure Bargraph page ¾ Press

is defined as the Home page (default
screen), see section 4.2.3 “Defining the ¾ Press then
HOME key” on page 32. ¾ Refer to Menu maps on pages
482 and 484.

“ABS View” data valid: based on its programming (measuring head sub-page
- section 3.2.1.1, page 488) the measure visualization (numerical and
graphical) may be:
i • in relative value, with reference to the measure “zero”
• in absolute value, with reference to the programmed nominal value
• in absolute value in the whole measurement range of the head, with
reference to the field center value and without change of scale.

19.3.1. Viewing the Measurement in Manual Mode

Select the corresponding Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
Current measurement

Electrical Zeroing
Numerical and gra- button (1)
phical representation of
the selected measuring
head Numerical value of
measurement
Retraction
status
Bargraph of
measurement
Selected Part
Type/Cycle

(1) Not present if the “Multiple electric zeroing” function (section 3.5.3.2 on page 517)
is enabled.

To pass from viewing of Measurement A to Measurement B, and the contrary, act

as follows:

504 Viewing Measurements A and B – Operator Guide

 Enter
1. Press to access the page.

2. Press to highlight the “Measurement selection” field.

3. Press or to pass from Measurement A to Measurement B or the

contrary.
Measurement
selection field

or

Note: Electrical zero from this page, by means of the Zeroing button , is
possible only after a mechanical zeroing has been performed.

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper 505

19.3.2. Viewing the Measurement in Automatic mode

Note: In Automatic mode the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the machine’s
logic.
Measurement diagram with cone
direction viewing

Numerical and graphic Numerical and graphic

representation of representation of
Measurement A Measurement B

Numerical representation
of Taper Measurement
(Measurement A – Current Part/Cycle
Measurement B)

Press to view measurements A, B and Taper individually and in sequence.

Measurement zeroing status

View taper measurement
(red) not zeroed control points
(green) zeroed

Measurement A Measurement B Taper

(Meas. A – Meas. B)
Nominal value of the
measurement (1)
Control points viewing (the squares fill in as the
control point is reached)

(1) Not displayed with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning” modality,
enabled.

506 Viewing Measurements A and B – Operator Guide

 If optional functions (TIR, Ovality) are present on one or both measurements, they
can be viewed in sequence by means of key or .
The display sequence is as follows:
Measurement A « Measurement A Options « Measurement B « Measurement
B Options « Taper
Hereafter there are the Measurement A options view pages as an example.

Bargraph of measurement
Numerical value of
measurement
TIR
Control point status:
under limit
over limit
Bargraph of measurement
Numerical value of
measurement
Ovality
Control point status:
under limit
over limit
Note: The Ovality measurement is NOT valid with Fenar-L measuring heads
(the ovality check does not make sense at all).

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper 507

19.4. Viewing the Zeroing values of Measurements A and B

The Zero Summary page To reach this page:

contains information about the
¾ Select Manual or Automatic mode then
various zeroing functions of the
choose one:
gauge system and can be
viewed in either Manual or ¾ Press then .
Automatic mode.
¾ Refer to Menu maps on pages 482 and 484.
Measurement selection field

Viewing zeroing values in Manual and Automatic modes

Note: this page shows only the zeroing values for the functions active in the current
application.

Zeroing Value Sum of the accumulated zeroing values from electrically zeroing
the gauge system.
Note: if the modality “Self-learning zero shift” (see paragraph 3.2.1.2, page 489)
is active, the “Zeroing Value” is not significant anymore, and is replaced
by the following symbols:

(red): system not zeroed

(green): zero-setting performed (system zeroed).

Master Deviation Value programmed to indicate the difference between the size of
the sample part and the final size you want to obtain.

Zero Adjust Sum of the zero corrections given through keyboard during the part
machining.

Dirac correction value of the Dirac correction (it appears if the "Direct
coupling/Dirac" option is enabled). The Dirac correction value is reset for all the
sets provided with the Dirac option in the following cases:
• at the electronic unit power on
• in the Automatic/Manual switching
• during zero-setting or zero-setting reset

508 Viewing the Zeroing values of Measurements A and B – Operator Guide

 Clearance parameter of coupling between In-Process measurement and Post-
Process measurement.

19.4.1. Viewing the Zeroing values in Manual mode

Select the Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).

19.4.2. Viewing the Zeroing values in Automatic mode

Note: In Automatic mode, the Set (Part/Cycle) selection is made by the

machine’s logic.

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper 509

19.5. Zeroing Measurements A and B
19.5.1. Introduction
Zeroing is the process of setting up and adjusting the gauge and a measuring head to
a master workpiece to assure that post-process inspection of the workpiece yields the
desired final dimensions.
Types of Zeroing:
Mechanical Zeroing – physically adjusts the fingers/contacts so that they are within
the foreseen measurement range (see section 3.5.2, on page 511).
Electrical Zeroing – adjustment operation to be performed periodically to obtain the
maximum accuracy and reliability of measurements on the workpiece (see section
3.5.3, on page 514).
• Electric zero-setting shared by the sets – operation to be performed in
case of “Masterless” application (linearization of the measurement range).
(see section 3.5.3.1, on page 516).
• Multiple Electrical Zeroing – this functional feature is present if it was
enabled upon the configuration stage of the application (see section 3.5.3.2,
on page 517).
Zero Adjustments – Corrections made when after a post-process inspection of the
workpieces small differences in size are found (see section 3.6, on page 519).
Zero Resets – removes the offsets generated by the system during the last electrical
zeroing (see section 3.7, on page 525).
Zeroing Conditions
Static – The master workpiece is NOT rotating.
Dynamic – The master workpiece is rotating and wet by the coolant.

When to zero the gauge system?

TYPE OF ZEROING CONDITIONS
Mechanical Zeroing
followed by At initial setup
Electrical Zeroing
At grinder start up
Electrical Zeroing At the beginning of each work shift
After changing Part Type

Zero Adjust When the workpiece size changes

When the zeroing range of the measuring head
Zero Reset has been exceeded.
followed by After replacement of any measuring head
Mechanical Zeroing & component (head, contacts, fingers, etc.)
Electrical Zeroing After any mechanical changes are made to the
gauge system.

510 Zeroing Measurements A and B – Operator Guide

19.5.2. Mechanical Zeroing
Mechanical zeroing MUST be done to a master workpiece:
ƒ At initial set up of the gauge system.
ƒ If the allowed zero adjustment range has been exceeded.
ƒ After any mechanical or electrical changes to the gauge system (fingers, contacts,
...).
Mechanical zeroing must be performed only in Manual mode and statically.
Note: Each measuring head that has been defined MUST be Mechanically
Zeroed.
Mechanical Zeroing of a measuring head:
1. Gauge in Manual Mode.
2. Select the Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) relevant to the head to
be zeroed.
3. Eliminate any zeroing offsets:

- press then ;
Enter
- press F5 or highlight the Zero Reset button and press .

- a question box appears asking to Reset: press to highlight “Yes” and press
Enter
.
Note: Zero reset is performed both for Measurement A and Measurement B.

4. Press then to highlight the Mechanical Zeroing page icon.

The mechanical zeroing page relevant to Measurement A is viewed.
Indication of measurement
and measuring head

Numerical and graphic

view of measurement Numerical and graphic
value of the first view of measurement
transducer -T1 value of the second
transducer -T2

5. Place the master workpiece into the machine.

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper 511

 6. Adjust the finger/contact assemblies of the measuring head 1 so they can be
inserted into gauging position safely.
The adjustment mode of the finger/contact assemblies depends on the
adjustment method used (with adjustable guides or with contacts).
(pls. see Chapter 6 “Measuring head Mechanical zero-setting” on page 535).

Finger/contact assembly – T1
Cable

Measuring Contacts
head support Measuring DO NOT
head touch
master

Slide adapter
Finger/contact assembly – T2
Slide

7. Bring the measuring head to gauging position.

8. Adjust the upper finger/contact assembly (T1) making the contact touch the
master until the measurement value on the upper digital display of the
Mechanical Zeroing page is next to zero (± 10 µ).

Measurement value
next to zero.

9. Adjust the lower finger/contact assembly (T2) making the contact touch the
master until the measurement value on the upper digital display of the
Mechanical Zeroing page is next to zero (± 10 µ).

Measurement value
next to zero.

512 Zeroing Measurements A and B – Operator Guide

 This completes the mechanical setup of measuring head-Measurement A; now
perform an mechanical setup of measuring head-Measurement B.

ƒ Press to highlight the “Measurement selection” field.

ƒ Press or to pass from Measurement A to Measurement B.

Measurement
Indication of measurement
selection field
and measuring head

Repeat the operations described for measuring head-Measurement A from step 6 to

step 9 for measuring head-Measurement B.

This completes the mechanical setup of measuring heads; now perform an Electric
Zeroing (see section 3.5.3 on page 514).

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper 513

19.5.3. Electrical Zeroing
Electrical Zeroing MUST be done:
ƒ In manual mode on a master workpiece.
ƒ Dynamically, i.e. with the master workpiece rotating and wet by coolant.
ƒ Regularly, usually at the beginning of each work shift and/or when the grinding
wheel is switched on.
Note: Each measuring head that has been defined MUST be electrically zeroed
for each work cycle in which it is used.
The electrical zeroing procedure acts on both measurements, indipendent
of measurement displayed (A or B).

Electrical Zeroing Procedure:

1. Gauge in manual mode.
2. Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
3. Position the master workpiece in machine
4. Bring the measuring heads to gauging position

5. Bring up the electric zeroing page: press and then . Measurement A is

displayed.

6. Press or with the “Measurement selection” field highlighted to switch

from Measure A to Measure B and back.

Zeroing value (1)

Electric zeroing
button
Master deviation
Measurement value

Measurement selection
(current measurement)

Enter
7. Press F4 or highlight with and press .

8. A question box appears asking to confirm the zeroing: press to highlight

Enter
“Yes” and press .

514 Zeroing Measurements A and B – Operator Guide

 Zeroing button

Both measurements have been electrically zero-set.

If no error messages are displayed the electric zero-setting procedure has been
correctly performed.
The Gauge can be switched to Automatic operating mode.
Note: Electric zero-setting with integral measurement.
Once completed the electric zero-setting procedure the measurement is
still displayed (graphic and numerical display) dynamically (viewing of the
measurement variation during the part rotation).

(1)Note: if the modality “Self-learning zero shift” (see paragraph 3.2.1.2, page 489)
is active, the “Zeroing Value” is not significant anymore, and is replaced
by the following symbols:

(red): system not zeroed

(green): zero-setting performed (system zeroed).

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper 515

19.5.3.1. Shared Electric zero-setting (“Masterless” function)
In case of application with “Masterless” function (linearization of the measurement
range / measurement card with DSP-Digital Signal Processing), carry out a
simultaneous zero-setting of all the sets that use the selected measuring head
(shared electric zero-setting).

Measuring head in use

Mechanical Zeroing
Page Measurement value
of the first contact

Measurement value of 1
the second contact
Measurement selection field

1 Data present only with measuring heads enabled for “zero shift”.

Execution of electric zero-setting shared by the sets

Aborts the electric zero-setting shared by the sets

Zero-setting procedure
• Position the measuring heads (contacts T1 / T2) and fasten them onto the special
mechanical support, in the most suitable range based on the available sample
workpiece.
• Bring the measuring heads to measuring position on the sample workpiece.

• Press or with the “Measurement selection” field highlighted to switch

from Measure A to Measure B and back.

• Press the key to carry out zero-setting. In this way all the sets that use the
measuring head are perfectly zeroed (shared zero-setting).

Note: if a new set is defined, combined with this measuring head, it is necessary
to repeat the zero-setting procedure.

516 Zeroing Measurements A and B – Operator Guide

19.5.3.2. Multiple Electrical Zeroing (Option)
This functional feature is present if it was enabled upon the configuration stage of the
application.
This functional feature allows using up to 32 different zeroing indexes for each set;
this means that it is possible to zero-set on different masters without having to change
the set (all the other programming data being equal). Afterwards it is possible to work
with the corresponding parts by calling out the different zeroing indexes.

Measurement zeroing status

Zeroing index no. (red) not zeroed
(1 to 32)
(green) zeroed

Electric zeroing button

Measurement nominal
value (1)

(4) Not displayed with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning modality”
enabled.

To select the index no. act as follows:

ƒ use to move the cursor to the index number, or to view the desired
Enter
value, then press to confirm.

This functional feature is optimized for the use with the “Zero shift (static or dynamic)
self-learning” modality (see section 3.2.1.2, page 489), but can also be used if such a
modality has not been enabled
“Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning” modality, enabled
After the execution of the mechanical zeroing it is possible, by exploiting the different
zeroing indexes (1 to 32), to carry out an electric zeroing on masters that do not differ
more than the maximum zeroing range without changing the measurement nominal
value (maximum zeroing range: maximum value of the zero shift range +
programmed value of the head zero range).
Changing the measurement nominal value does not cause a reset of the current
zeroing index.

“Zero shift (static or dynamic) self-learning” modality, NOT enabled

After the execution of an electric zeroing with a determined index, if you want to zero-
set with another index it is necessary to:
• change the zeroing index
• change the measurement nominal value

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper 517

 • zero-set.
This procedure is necessary because changing the nominal value causes a reset of
the current zeroing index.
If you change the Field Center value, the current zeroing index is always reset, unlike
the other indexes.
The zero adjust that was set remains valid until you switch between the zeroed
indexes, while it is reset when switching to a index that was not zeroed.

518 Zeroing Measurements A and B – Operator Guide

19.6. Zero Adjustments for Measurements A and B (Option)

Zero adjustments are made when a post- To reach this page:

process inspection of the workpiece shows
¾ Select Manual or Automatic
an incorrect size.
mode then choose one:

¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to the Menu maps on
pages 482 and 484.

Example:
The workpiece is undersize: enter a zero adjustment with the same value but with
opposite sign.
APPLICATION PART TOO SMALL Part too big
OUTSIDE diameter Add Subtract
INSIDE diameter Subtract Add
This can be done in either Manual or Automatic mode.

There are identical and independent pages for zero adjustment programming for
Measurement A and for Measurement B:
Measurement selection field
Current measurement

Measurement A Measurement B
To select Measurement A or Measurement B:

1. Press to reach the page.

2. Use to highlight the “Measurement selection” field .

3. Press or to select Measurement A or Measurement B.

For simplicity we will always refer to the page relevant to Measurement A from here
on.

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper 519

19.6.1. Zero Adjustment in Manual mode

Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34) and press .
Note: Zero adjustments in manual mode affect the next cycle.

Bargraph of sum of zero

adjustments

Part drawing
Sum of zero
adjustments

Bargraph and numerical

display of measurement
Single/double zero value
adjustment

Value of zero adjustment

value entered

Zero Adjustment Reset key

Changing Zero Adjustment value

1. Press to highlight the field

2. Press or to increase or decrease the value

3. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form (summation of zero adjustments).

Single/double zero adjustment

Possibility of inserting a zero adjustment value either for the single measurement or
for both measurements simultaneously.

To select the desired mode, press the F2 key or highlight the key and press
until the corresponding icon is selected.
The selected icon (key) indicates:

520 Zero Adjustments for Measurements A and B (Option) – Operator Guide

 Zero adjustment on the single measurement A or B selected

Zero adjustment on both measurements simultaneously

Resetting Zero Adjustments

Enter
1. Press F5 or highlight and press . A “Reset?” question box will appear.

Zero adjustments reset

Enter
2. Press to highlight “Yes” and press . The zero adjustments are reset
for both measurement.

19.6.2. Zero Adjustments in automatic mode

Note: Zero adjustments in automatic mode are made while grinding and affect
the current cycle.

19.6.2.1. Zero adjustment for the current Set (part/cycle)

Bargraph of Σ value

Part drawing Sum of zero adjustments

(Σ)

Single/double zero Bargraph and numerical

adjustment display of measurement
value

Zero adjustment
value entered

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper 521

 Changing the zero adjustment value

1. Press to reach the page

2. Press to highlight the field

3. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

4. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments for the cycle).

Single/double zero adjustment

Possibility of inserting a zero adjustment value either for the single measurement or
for both measurements simultaneously.

To select the desired mode, press the F2 key or highlight the key and press
until the corresponding icon is selected.
The selected icon (key) indicates:

Zero adjustment on the single measurement A or B selected

Zero adjustment on both measurements simultaneously

522 Zero Adjustments for Measurements A and B (Option) – Operator Guide

19.6.2.2. Zero adjustment with Set (Part/Cycle) selection

Bargraph of Σ value for the

selected cycle
Sum of zero adjustments
(Σ) for the selected cycle
Part drawing

Sum of zero adjustments

(Σ) for the selected Part

Zero adjustment value

Number of selected Part
entered for the selected cycle

Zero adjustment value entered

for the selected Part

The zero adjustments entered for the selected Part concern all the cycles using the
same head and belong to the same part. The common correction value is subtracted
in the same way following an electric zero-setting.

Selecting the Set (Part/Cycle)

1. Holding down press to highlight the Part/Cycle selection box below.

Current Part Type

Part Number Cycle Number

2. Press or to view the selected Part/Cycle, otherwise press or to

change the Cycle number and or to change the Part number.

3. Press to confirm the Part/Cycle selection made. The program automatically

exits the selection box and returns to the page.

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper 523

 Changing the zero adjustment value for the cycle

1. Press to reach the page

2. Press to highlight the field

3. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

4. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments for the cycle).

5. Press .

Changing the zero adjustment value for the part

1. Press to reach the page

2. Press to highlight the field

3. Press or to increase or decrease the value.

4. Press . The value is algebraically added to the bargraph shown both at the
top of the page and in numerical form beside the “Σ” symbol (summation of zero
adjustments for the part).

5. Press .

524 Zero Adjustments for Measurements A and B (Option) – Operator Guide

19.7. Zero Reset for Measurements A and B

This function removes all offsets generated To reach this page:

by the system during the last electrical
¾ Select Manual mode, then
zeroing (the transducers value is shown).
choose one:

¾ Press then .
¾ Refer to the Menu map on page
484.

It can be selected only in manual mode:

ƒ After mechanical changes to the gauge system.
ƒ When the maximum Zero Adjustment value available has been reached.
Electric Zeroing Reset Procedure:

Note: The reset procedure acts on both measurements, indipendent of

measurement displayed (A or B).
1. Select Set (Part/Cycle) (see section 6.1 on page 34).
Enter
2. Press F5 or highlight and press . A “Reset?” question box will appear.

Reset button

Enter
3. Press to highlight “Yes” and press .

4. Press and to highlight the Mechanical Zeroing page icon.

Mechanical
Zeroing page

The gauge system MUST NOW be Mechanically then Electrically Zeroed (see section
3.5 on page 510).

– Operator Guide Two Post-Process Diameters & Taper 525

526 Zero Reset for Measurements A and B – Operator Guide
20. GAP & CRASH CONTROL SETTING
Setting, in Automatic mode, of GAP and CRASH controls carried out through a
microphone (piezoelectric transducer) with two independent control channels
simultaneously enabled.
GAP control
Check of contact between wheel and workpiece: the definition of a noise threshold
allows to detect the contact between wheel and workpiece to switch from approach
speed to feed rate.
CRASH control
The definition of an appropriate noise threshold makes it possible to detect accidental
collisions of the grinding wheel.

In Automatic mode select folder General adjustment .

Press and then to select

the icon of GAP Eliminator

Press

Setting of Gap & Crash controls

Section 4.2 page 530 and 4.3
page 532.

– Operator Guide Gap & Crash control setting 527

20.1. Page for GAP and CRASH controls setting
This section describes the elements for GAP and CRASH controls setting.

Noise display area

Bargraph Icon of control type

GAP control area CRASH control area

Noise display area

Noise is displayed through a bargraph, with values increasing from left to right.
Symbol V on bargraph indicates the control triggering point.
Beside the bargraph there is an icon indicating the type of control the noise displayed
refers to:

GAP control

CRASH control
Note: In case of alarm (if at least one alarm is enabled) the icon displayed in that
moment is replaced by the alarm icon that flashes.

GAP control area Status of GAP control

Start/Stop gain Gain acquisition type

automatic acquisition

Scroll bar for gain value adjustment

Key =Î

Key =Í

Status of GAP control

The status of GAP control is indicated by a LED:
LED lit: GAP control enabled

528 Page for GAP and CRASH controls setting – Operator Guide
 LED not lit: GAP control triggered
Type of gain acquisition
It is possible to select two different types of gain control procedure:

automatic gain control procedure (with variable and oscillating background

noise)

fixed gain control procedure (with stable and repetitive background noise).

To select, proceed as follows:

ƒ highlight the desired field with , display the desired icon with or , and
press to confirm.

Start/Stop gain automatic acquisition

Start gain automatic acquisition (enabled only if the automatic gain control
procedure has been selected).

Stop gain automatic acquisition (the selection of gain acquisition type is

disabled).

CRASH control area

Status of CRASH control

Scroll bar for gain value adjustment

Key =Î

Key =Í

Status of CRASH control

The status of CRASH control is indicated by a LED:
LED lit: CRASH control enabled
LED not lit: CRASH control triggered

– Operator Guide Gap & Crash control setting 529

20.2. GAP control setting
The GAP cycle can be controlled with the definition of an appropriate ultrasonic limit
value. This limit must be empirically defined according to the characteristics of the
application.
At first the grinding wheel must be in rest position, normally spinning and with the
coolant off. The noise displayed by the bargraph, in this particular condition is the
background noise which is a basic characteristic of the application.
The value of the background noise displayed can be:
ƒ fairly stable and repetitive
ƒ variable and oscillating
Stable and repetitive background noise
1. Select the fixed gain control procedure.

2. Use to highlight the gain adjustment area and to set the gain value to
zero (scroll bar of the scale completely on the left).
GAP control LED

GAP Bargraph

Fixed gain

Scroll bar for gain value adjustment

Key = Î / Key =Í

3. Bring the wheel almost in contact with the workpiece, or with the reference pin if
the GAP control is used to check position, etc., as in normal working conditions
(wheel spinning at work speed, workpiece rotating, coolant on, etc.).

4. With the gain adjustment area highlighted, adjust the sensitivity with keys
and , bringing the noise display on bargraph slightly below the threshold V
and just before the GAP control LED switches off.
5. To verify the programming perform a few cycles and verify that the GAP control
has triggered at the right time.

Note: If the type of wheel, workpiece, etc. is changed, it might be necessary to

reprogram the system.

530 GAP control setting – Operator Guide

 Variable and oscillating background noise
1. Select the automatic (variable) gain control procedure.

2. Use to highlight the gain adjustment area and to set the gain value to
zero (scroll bar of the scale completely on the left).
GAP control LED

GAP Bargraph

Start/Stop gain
automatic acquisition

Automatic gain

Scroll bar for gain value adjustment

Key = Î / Key =Í

3. Bring the wheel almost in contact with the workpiece, or with the reference pin if
the GAP control is used to check position, etc., as in normal working conditions
(wheel spinning at work speed, workpiece rotating, coolant on, etc.).

4. Highlight and press (the icon changes meaning becoming ).

5. With the gain adjustment area highlighted, adjust the sensitivity with keys
and , bringing the noise display on bargraph slightly below the threshold V
and just before the GAP control LED switches off.

6. Highlight and press .

7. To verify the programming perform a few cycles and verify that the GAP control
has triggered at the right time.

Note: The background noise acquisition time is 300 ms from the start cycle so it
is mandatory that the grinding wheel takes more time to reach the
workpiece.

Note: If the type of wheel, workpiece, etc. is changed it may be necessary to

reprogram the system.

– Operator Guide Gap & Crash control setting 531

20.3. CRASH control setting
The CRASH control must be intended as an ALARM signal that is given when the
grinding wheel collides against the workpiece or other devices and/or parts of the
grinder due to a malfunction or to a bad programming.

Setting procedure

CRASH control LED

CRASH Bargraph

Scroll bar for gain value adjustment

Key = Î / Key =Í

1. Use to highlight the gain adjustment area and keys and to define
the sensitivity by setting the gain value approximately at the center of its range
(scroll bar of the scale in central position).
2. Simulate a few cycles and all the possible machine conditions (grinding,
workpiece loading/unloading, dressing, etc.) to identify the maximum noise
condition and adjust the sensitivity to have the noise value displayed on the
bargraph scale just below the threshold V (control triggering point).
In case the above procedure leads to the definition of a CRASH limit value with
a much lower sensitivity than in the GAP setting, to have a reliable CRASH
control it may be necessary to set the sensitivity only 10-20% lower than for
GAP control.

532 CRASH control setting – Operator Guide

21. DIAGNOSTICS
An error or malfunction condition of the system or the execution of incorrect
operations is indicated by a message on display, within a dedicated window.
The messages display is structured as follows:
ƒ Message code and title
ƒ Cause that generated the alarm message
ƒ Remedy (operations required for restoring the correct operation)
The structure of the message code is as follows:
T XX Y ZZZ
T type of message (A = alarm; W = warning; E = error)
XX measure function code
00 = System
01 = In-Process
02 = Post-Process
03 = Balancer
04 = Sensor devices
Y function number
ZZZ message number

There are two modes for viewing the error or malfunction messages.

Modality 1

Example of “Warning” Example of “Error"

Act as follows to completely display the information (CAUSE / REMEDY) relevant to

the event displayed:

ƒ use to highlight the text scroll bar, then use the and keys.

Press or to exit the error display, and then act as indicated under the item
"REMEDY".

– Operator Guide Diagnostics 533

 Modality 2

Example of “Warning” Example of "Alarm"

?
Use key, to completely display the information (CAUSE / REMEDY) relevant to
the event displayed:
Example

? ?

Press to exit the error display, and then act as indicated under the item
"REMEDY".

534 CRASH control setting – Operator Guide

22. MEASURING HEAD MECHANICAL ZERO-SETTING
22.1. Mechanical zero-setting with adjustment guides
Measuring head with two spherical contacts
Figure 1

Head holding
unit

Unimar measuring heads with spherical contacts

Figure 2

Head holding
unit

– Operator Guide Measuring head Mechanical zero-setting 535

 Measuring head with two bar contacts
Figure 3

Head holding
unit

Unimar measuring heads with bar contacts

Figure 4

Head holding
unit

Setting up the measuring head diameter

(Refer to the layouts of Figure 1, Figure 2, Figure 3 and Figure 4)
1. Place a ground workpiece either on the spindle or between the centers.
2. Loosen screws 1 and 3 to allow a frictioned movement of the guides.

536 Mechanical zero-setting with adjustment guides – Operator Guide

 3. Rotate screws 2 and 4 (knob or hexagonal head screw) bringing the styli to a
position allowing to insert the head in measuring position in safe conditions
(without impact with the workpiece).
4. Bring the measuring head to measuring position.
5. Rotate screws 2 and 4 making the contacts touch the workpiece until they are
within the range (refer to the readout of the individual transducers on the
electronic unit).
6. Tighten screws 1 and 3.
7. Now act on the head holding unit.

Head support – Slide with Head support – Slide with

retaining screws locking handle

Loosen screws 5 holding them

frictioned.
Release the movement of the head
support acting on handle 5b.
Adjust screws 5a so as to allow a
frictioned movement of the head
support.
Rotate the screw/knob 6 moving the measuring head forth/back (Beware!! Pls.
see the note for measuring heads with bar contacts) until it reaches the position
with the maximum measurement readout (contacts on diameter); refer to the
diameter display on the electronic unit.

Tighten screws 5. Lock the head support with handle 5b.

Rotate the screw/knob 6 in the opposite direction to release it and prevent

tensioning of the adjustment system.

BEWARE

Measuring heads with bar contacts

When positioning the contacts lengthwise on the
workpiece (measuring head back/forth movement)
pay attention to value X.
Value X shall be lower than ½ the diameter to be
gauged in order to prevent a collision between stylus
and wheel.

– Operator Guide Measuring head Mechanical zero-setting 537

 BEWARE

Measurement of grooved parts

In case of measurement of grooved parts with
interruptions ≤10 mm, it is recommended that the
working portion Y of the contact is higher than the
interruption sector. Should there be interruptions
with different lengths, consider the longest one.
Interruptions >10 mm must be considered one at a
time.

Adjusting the upper contact

(Refer to the layouts of Figure 1, Figure 2, Figure 3 and Figure 4)
1. Loosen screw 1 holding it frictioned.
2. Rotate screw 2 (knob or hexagonal head screw) to make the upper contact
touch the master workpiece until the measurement value appearing on the
upper digital display of the "Mechanical zero-setting" page is around zero (± 10
µm).
3. After completing these operations tighten screw 1 and rotate screw 2 in the
opposite direction until it is released in order to prevent tensioning the
adjustment system.

Adjusting the lower contact

(Refer to the layouts of Figure 1, Figure 2, Figure 3 and Figure 4)
1. Loosen screw 3 holding it frictioned.
2. Rotate screw 4 (knob or hexagonal head screw) to make the lower contact touch
the master workpiece until the measurement value appearing on the lower
digital display of the "Mechanical zero-setting" page is around zero (± 10 µm).
3. After completing these operations tighten screw 3 and rotate screw 4 in the
opposite direction until it is released in order to prevent tensioning the
adjustment system.

Once the mechanical zero-setting operations described above have been correctly
completed, proceed with electric zero-setting (see section "Electric zero-setting
").

538 Mechanical zero-setting with adjustment guides – Operator Guide

22.2. Mechanical zero-setting with contact tips
Measuring head with two contacts
Figure 5

Head holding
unit

Unimar measuring heads

Figure 6

Head holding
unit

Setting up the measuring head diameter

(Refer to the layouts of Figure 5 and Figure 6)
1. Place a ground workpiece either on the spindle or between the centers.

– Operator Guide Measuring head Mechanical zero-setting 539

 2. Loosen screws 1 and 3 to allow a frictioned movement of contact tips 2 and 4.
3. Rotate contact tips 2 and 4 moving them to a position where it is possible to
insert the head in measuring position in safe conditions (without impact with the
part).
4. Bring the measuring head to measuring position.
5. Rotate contact tips 2 and 4 making the contacts touch the workpiece until they
are within their range (refer to the display of individual transducers on the
electronic unit).
6. Tighten screws 1 and 3.
7. Now act on the head holding unit.

Head support – Slide with Head support – Slide with

retaining screws locking handle

Loosen screws 5 holding them

frictioned.
Release the movement of the head
support acting on handle 5b.
Adjust screws 5a so as to allow a
frictioned movement of the head
support.
Rotate the screw/knob 6 moving the measuring head forth/back until it reaches
the position with the maximum measurement readout (contacts on diameter);
refer to the diameter display on the electronic unit.

Tighten screws 5. Lock the head support with handle 5b.

Rotate the screw/knob 6 in the opposite direction to release it and prevent

tensioning of the adjustment system.

Adjusting the upper contact

(Refer to the layouts of Figure 5 and Figure 6)
1. Loosen screw 1 holding it frictioned.
2. Rotate contact tip 2 to make the upper contact touch the master workpiece until
the measurement value appearing on the upper digital display of the
"Mechanical zero-setting" page is around zero (± 10 µm).
3. Tighten screw 1 after completing these operations.

Adjusting the lower contact

540 Mechanical zero-setting with contact tips – Operator Guide

 (Refer to the layouts of Figure 5 and Figure 6)
1. Loosen screw 3 holding it frictioned.
2. Rotate contact tip 4 to make the lower contact touch the master workpiece until
the measurement value appearing on the lower digital display of the
"Mechanical zero-setting" page is around zero (± 10 µm).
3. Tighten screw 3 after completing these operations.

Once the mechanical zero-setting operations described above have been correctly
completed, proceed with electric zero-setting (see section "Electric zero-setting
").

– Operator Guide Measuring head Mechanical zero-setting 541

22.3. Rapid zero-setting of unimar heads with locking lever
(frictioned support)
Figure 7

Frictioned
support

(7) In order to make it easy to assemble the frictioned support and to correctly adjust
the rapid zero-setting units (lever B and corresponding stop dowel) also refer to
document "UNIMAR – Swing bracket application" (code D4340021M1).

Setting up the measuring head diameter

NOTE: Considering the particular zero-setting system, we suggest to setup the
diameter on the mean diameter of the application measurement range.
(Refer to the layout of Figure 7)
1. Place a ground workpiece either on the spindle or between the centers.
2. Rotate the locking lever A of the frictioned support to "SET UP", making the
movement of heads T1 and T2 be slightly frictioned.
3. Open the heads to be able to insert them on the workpiece in safe conditions.
4. Bring the heads to measuring position.
5. Simultaneously push levers B of the rapid zero-setting unit present on the stylus
holders and close the heads with a single movement bringing the contacts onto
the master workpiece.
6. While holding down levers B, rotate lever A to "RUN" until the heads are locked.
7. Release levers B of the rapid zero-setting unit making sure they return to rest
position.
8. Now act on the head holding unit.

542 Rapid zero-setting of unimar heads with locking lever (frictioned support) – Operator
Guide
 Head support – Slide with Head support – Slide with
retaining screws locking handle

Loosen screws 5 holding them

frictioned.
Release the movement of the head
support acting on handle 5b.
Adjust screws 5a so as to allow a
frictioned movement of the head
support.
Rotate the screw/knob 6 moving the measuring head forth/back until it reaches
the position with the maximum measurement readout (contacts on diameter);
refer to the diameter display on the electronic unit.

Tighten screws 5. Lock the head support with handle 5b.

Rotate the screw/knob 6 in the opposite direction to release it and prevent

tensioning of the adjustment system.

Zero-setting on diameter
(Refer to the layout of Figure 7)
1. Place a ground workpiece either on the spindle or between the centers.
2. Rotate the locking lever A of the frictioned support to "SET UP", making the
movement of heads T1 and T2 be slightly frictioned.
3. Open the heads to be able to insert them on the workpiece in safe conditions.
4. Bring the heads to measuring position.
5. Simultaneously push levers B of the rapid zero-setting unit present on the stylus
holders and close the heads with a single movement bringing the contacts onto
the master workpiece.
6. While holding down levers B, rotate lever A to "RUN" until the heads are locked.
7. Release levers B of the rapid zero-setting unit. Make sure that levers B return to
rest position and that the measurement of contacts T1 and T2 is within ±150 µm
(refer to the readout of the individual transducers on the electronic unit).

Once the mechanical zero-setting operations described above have been correctly
completed, proceed with electric zero-setting (see section "Electric zero-setting
").

– Operator Guide Measuring head Mechanical zero-setting 543

22.4. Mechanical zero-setting with WEMAR type support
Figure 8

Setting up the measuring head diameter

(Refer to the layout of Figure 8)
1. Place a ground workpiece either on the spindle or between the centers.
2. Loosen screws 1 and 3 so as to allow a frictioned movement of screws 2 and 4
(heads frictioned movement on support).
3. Rotate screws 2 and 4 bringing the styli to a position allowing to insert the head
in measuring position in safe conditions (without impact with the workpiece).
4. Bring the measuring head to measuring position.
5. Rotate screws 2 and 4 making the contacts touch the workpiece until they are
within the range (refer to the readout of the individual transducers on the
electronic unit).
6. Tighten screws 1 and 3.
7. Loosen screws 5 holding them frictioned.
8. Rotate screw 6 moving the measuring head forth/back until it reaches the
position with the maximum measurement readout (contacts on diameter); refer
to the diameter display on the electronic unit.
9. Tighten screws 5.

544 Mechanical zero-setting with WEMAR type support – Operator Guide

 10. Rotate the screw/knob 6 in the opposite direction to release it and prevent
tensioning of the adjustment system.

Adjusting the upper contact

(Refer to the layout of Figure 8)
1. Loosen screw 1 holding it frictioned.
2. Rotate screw 2 to make the upper contact touch the master workpiece until the
measurement value appearing on the upper digital display of the "Mechanical
zero-setting" page is around zero (± 10 µm).
3. After completing these operations tighten screw 1 and rotate screw 2 in the
opposite direction until it is released in order to prevent tensioning the
adjustment system.

Adjusting the lower contact

(Refer to the layout of Figure 8)
1. Loosen screw 3 holding it frictioned.
2. Rotate screw 4 to make the lower contact touch the master workpiece until the
measurement value appearing on the lower digital display of the "Mechanical
zero-setting" page is around zero (± 10 µm).
3. After completing these operations tighten screw 3 and rotate screw 4 in the
opposite direction until it is released in order to prevent tensioning the
adjustment system.

Once the mechanical zero-setting operations described above have been correctly
completed, proceed with electric zero-setting (see section "Electric zero-setting
").

– Operator Guide Measuring head Mechanical zero-setting 545

22.5. Mechanical zero-setting of Positionar
Figure 9

(Refer to the layout of Figure 9)

1. Place a ground workpiece either on the spindle or between the centers.
2. Loosen screw 1 to allow a frictioned movement of the guide.
3. Rotate screw 2 (knob or hexagonal head screw) bringing the stylus to a position
allowing to insert the head in measuring position in safe conditions (without
impact with the workpiece).
4. Bring the measuring head to measuring position.
5. Loosen screws 3 holding them frictioned.
6. Rotate screw 4 moving the measuring head forth/back until you find the desired
position.
7. Tighten screws 3.
8. Rotate screw 4 in the opposite direction until it is released in order to prevent
tensioning the adjustment system.
9. Rotate screw 2 to make the contact touch the master workpiece until the
measurement value appearing on the digital display of the "Mechanical zero-
setting" page is around zero (± 10 µm).
10. Tighten screw 1.

Once the mechanical zero-setting operations described above have been correctly
completed, proceed with electric zero-setting (see section "Electric zero-setting
").

546 Mechanical zero-setting of Positionar – Operator Guide

22.6. Zero-setting a Multicomparator application
In the applications with Unimar measuring heads model W it is possible to gauge
different diameters within a maximum range of ± 12.7 mm in relation to a diameter
defined as "Range Center", with just a mechanical zero-setting.
The value of the "Range Center" diameter, mean diameter of the diameters to be
gauged, to be programmed shall be defined as follows:
maximum diameter + minimum diameter
Range center (mean diameter) =
2

NOTE: the "Range center" value is the same for all the Parts/Cycles provided with the
configuration and mechanical arrangement of the measuring application
(position obtained following the mechanical zero-setting operation).

Figure 10

"Range center" Ø

The extensions to maximum diameter and to minimum diameter depend on the stroke
range of the mechanical adjustments of measuring heads and/or zero-setting guides
/contact tips.

NOTE: The ±12.7 mm maximum range can only be obtained with styli whose length is
≥120 mm. For shorter styli it is necessary to refer to the following table.

– Operator Guide Measuring head Mechanical zero-setting 547

 Max. range (*) with 2 Unimar W
Stylus length
measuring heads
L=
40 mm ± 5.1 mm
50 mm ± 6.0 mm
60 mm ± 7.0 mm
70 mm ± 7.9 mm
80 mm ± 8.9 mm
90 mm ± 9.9 mm
100 mm ± 10.8 mm
110 mm ± 11.8 mm
120 mm ± 12.7 mm
(*) Maximum range with ±500 µm measurement range and ±250 µm zero-
setting range (default values) for each measuring head.

Mechanical zero-setting of measuring head

1. Mount in machine a master workpiece with Nominal Diameter identical, or as
close as possible, to the Range Center diameter.
2. Program the Nominal Diameter value.
3. Proceed as indicated in the previous descriptions concerning the Unimar
measuring heads (Figure 2, Figure 4 and Figure 6) with the styli and contacts in
use (pls. see "Mechanical zero-setting with adjustment guides" on page 535 and
"Mechanical zero-setting with contact tips" on page 539).

Once the mechanical zero-setting operations described above have been correctly
completed, proceed with electric zero-setting (see section "Electric zero-setting
").
NOTE: electric zero-setting must be performed on all the programmed diameters.

548 Zero-setting a Multicomparator application – Operator Guide

23. "THRUVAR" MEASURING HEAD
Upper stylus
Adjustment of fastening screw
pneumatic retraction
amount

"Thruvar" head
body
Styli with contacts

Lower stylus fastening

screw

Note: each pair of styli corresponds to a determined measurement range.

23.1. Pneumatic retraction of the styli

The special screw allows adjusting the retraction amount to the following values:
• position 1: minimum retraction
• position 2: mean retraction
• position 3: maximum retraction

Air outlet Cable

(vent)

Pneumatic retraction
5-6 bar air inlet

Thruvar 70 - Rear view

Never mistake the air inlet Pneumatic retraction

fitting with the vent fitting: 5-6 bar air inlet
feeding the head from the vent
side could damage it.

Cable Air outlet (vent)

Thruvar 50 - Rear view

– Operator Guide "Thruvar" measuring head 549

23.2. Assembling the measuring styli on the head
Electronic unit in "Programming" mode
1. Define the value of the "Field Center" you want to use
2. Set the diameter Nominal value corresponding to the diameter of the finished
part to be checked (diameter nominal value inside the measurement range).
3. Set the check box indicated with "Self-learning zero shift" to ON ; in the
“Nominal value" sub-page (sub-page for selection/programming of zero shift).

Nominal Value
sub-page

4. "Thruvar" measuring head either without styli or with styli fitted but not fastened
(styli fastening screws free).
5. With the electronic unit in Manual mode, select the mechanical zeroing page on
the display.

Mechanical zeroing page

F3 key : complete closing of the styli

F5 key : complete opening of the styli

F6 key : styli opening to the value of the programmed nominal diameter

6. Press F6 to control the movement of the internal part of the head to the
position of the programmed nominal diameter value (corresponding to the styli
opening to the nominal diameter).
7. Part mounted in machine with the programmed diameter size.
8. Mount the styli by leaning the contacts to the part and fasten them in this
position by tightening the styli fastening screws.

550 Assembling the measuring styli on the head – Operator Guide

 Now the head and the styli are in measuring position, but not zeroed yet.

9. Press F3 to close the styli completely (optional operation).

23.3. Zero-setting on the diameters included in the measurement

range
Electric zeroing
1. Bring up the "Electric zeroing" page on display. During this stage the electric
zeroing key F4 is not active (underlit key).

Next to the zero Ø value the symbol (red) indicates “system not zeroed”

Red = NOT zeroed

Electric zeroing page

F1 key : styli movement on the part + zeroing

F2 key : complete closing of the styli

2. Press F1 : the dialog window is displayed for confirming the request for
zeroing: select Yes and press Enter.
The movement of the styli is stated (closing + opening) until the styli are carried
against the part, and then the electric zeroing stage is carried out (F4
flashing).
After a few seconds the system is perfectly zeroed; this is indicated by symbol
(green) next to the zero Ø value.

– Operator Guide "Thruvar" measuring head 551

 Green = zeroed

Zero measurement
value

Electric zeroing page

Note: to perform the electric zeroing on the same diameter value anytime the
equipment is switched off and on again, just move to the "Electric zeroing" page and
press F4 .

If one of the motor movements is not completed (e.g. due to an obstacle) a warning
appears as shown in the following figure).

552 Zero-setting on the diameters included in the measurement range – Operator Guide
24. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

24.1. Cleaning the electronic unit

Clean the outside of the electronic unit and the front panel using a cloth with
denatured alcohol.
Do not use solvents or abrasive products.

24.2. Data back-up batteries

The programming data of the sets are stored by the equipment onto memory chips.
These electronic devices need to be powered even when the equipment is switched
off in order to keep the data stored. The P7 is powered through accumulators that are
recharged every time the equipment is switched on. The use of rechargeable
accumulators instead of batteries was developed according with the reduction of both
polluting waste materials and maintenance times. Actually the batteries involve
expenses for disposal and require a preventive maintenance (replacement every 6
months) to prevent loss of acid.
The P7 unit is supplied with charged accumulators. The accumulators used
guarantee that the data are stored, with the equipment switched off, for 12 months in
an environment with temperatures ranging between -20 and 35 °C. In case of
temperatures exceeding 35 °C or lower than -20 °C the data retention time can be
remarkably lower.
If the unit is not used for a few weeks (4 - 6) we suggest to keep the equipment
on for at least a workday (8 consecutive hours).
In case of complete loss of the accumulators charge level the unit must be kept
continuously switched on for 40 hours to restore the accumulator charge.
Once programmed the P7 unit we suggest to copy the programming data through the
“Back-up/Restore Tool” program that can be supplied by any Marposs center
throughout the world. This program, to be used with a PC, is based on Windows®
operating system and makes it very easy to connect the PC to P7 through a "Serial"
cable, to make a copy of the programmed data, and/or to restore them in the unit.

*********************** End of Document **********************

– Operator Guide Routine maintenance 553